US20040059313A1 - Ultrasound assembly for use with light activated drugs - Google Patents

Ultrasound assembly for use with light activated drugs Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20040059313A1
US20040059313A1 US10/620,296 US62029603A US2004059313A1 US 20040059313 A1 US20040059313 A1 US 20040059313A1 US 62029603 A US62029603 A US 62029603A US 2004059313 A1 US2004059313 A1 US 2004059313A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
light activated
activated drug
ultrasound
catheter
microbubble
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US10/620,296
Inventor
Katsuro Tachibana
Shunro Tachibana
James Anderson
Gary Lichttenegger
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Individual
Original Assignee
Individual
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP7048710A external-priority patent/JPH08245420A/en
Priority claimed from JP25581497A external-priority patent/JP4791616B2/en
Priority claimed from US09/129,980 external-priority patent/US6210356B1/en
Application filed by Individual filed Critical Individual
Priority to US10/620,296 priority Critical patent/US20040059313A1/en
Assigned to EKOS L.L.C. reassignment EKOS L.L.C. LICENSE AGREEMENT Assignors: TACHIBANA, KATSURO, TACHIBANA, SHUNRO
Publication of US20040059313A1 publication Critical patent/US20040059313A1/en
Priority to US12/252,291 priority patent/US20090105633A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K41/00Medicinal preparations obtained by treating materials with wave energy or particle radiation ; Therapies using these preparations
    • A61K41/0047Sonopheresis, i.e. ultrasonically-enhanced transdermal delivery, electroporation of a pharmacologically active agent
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61MDEVICES FOR INTRODUCING MEDIA INTO, OR ONTO, THE BODY; DEVICES FOR TRANSDUCING BODY MEDIA OR FOR TAKING MEDIA FROM THE BODY; DEVICES FOR PRODUCING OR ENDING SLEEP OR STUPOR
    • A61M37/00Other apparatus for introducing media into the body; Percutany, i.e. introducing medicines into the body by diffusion through the skin
    • A61M37/0092Other apparatus for introducing media into the body; Percutany, i.e. introducing medicines into the body by diffusion through the skin using ultrasonic, sonic or infrasonic vibrations, e.g. phonophoresis
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61NELECTROTHERAPY; MAGNETOTHERAPY; RADIATION THERAPY; ULTRASOUND THERAPY
    • A61N7/00Ultrasound therapy
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B17/00Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
    • A61B17/22Implements for squeezing-off ulcers or the like on the inside of inner organs of the body; Implements for scraping-out cavities of body organs, e.g. bones; Calculus removers; Calculus smashing apparatus; Apparatus for removing obstructions in blood vessels, not otherwise provided for
    • A61B17/22004Implements for squeezing-off ulcers or the like on the inside of inner organs of the body; Implements for scraping-out cavities of body organs, e.g. bones; Calculus removers; Calculus smashing apparatus; Apparatus for removing obstructions in blood vessels, not otherwise provided for using mechanical vibrations, e.g. ultrasonic shock waves
    • A61B17/22012Implements for squeezing-off ulcers or the like on the inside of inner organs of the body; Implements for scraping-out cavities of body organs, e.g. bones; Calculus removers; Calculus smashing apparatus; Apparatus for removing obstructions in blood vessels, not otherwise provided for using mechanical vibrations, e.g. ultrasonic shock waves in direct contact with, or very close to, the obstruction or concrement
    • A61B17/2202Implements for squeezing-off ulcers or the like on the inside of inner organs of the body; Implements for scraping-out cavities of body organs, e.g. bones; Calculus removers; Calculus smashing apparatus; Apparatus for removing obstructions in blood vessels, not otherwise provided for using mechanical vibrations, e.g. ultrasonic shock waves in direct contact with, or very close to, the obstruction or concrement the ultrasound transducer being inside patient's body at the distal end of the catheter
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B17/00Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
    • A61B2017/00831Material properties
    • A61B2017/00853Material properties low friction, hydrophobic and corrosion-resistant fluorocarbon resin coating (ptf, ptfe, polytetrafluoroethylene)
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B17/00Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
    • A61B17/22Implements for squeezing-off ulcers or the like on the inside of inner organs of the body; Implements for scraping-out cavities of body organs, e.g. bones; Calculus removers; Calculus smashing apparatus; Apparatus for removing obstructions in blood vessels, not otherwise provided for
    • A61B2017/22001Angioplasty, e.g. PCTA
    • A61B2017/22002Angioplasty, e.g. PCTA preventing restenosis
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B17/00Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
    • A61B17/22Implements for squeezing-off ulcers or the like on the inside of inner organs of the body; Implements for scraping-out cavities of body organs, e.g. bones; Calculus removers; Calculus smashing apparatus; Apparatus for removing obstructions in blood vessels, not otherwise provided for
    • A61B17/22004Implements for squeezing-off ulcers or the like on the inside of inner organs of the body; Implements for scraping-out cavities of body organs, e.g. bones; Calculus removers; Calculus smashing apparatus; Apparatus for removing obstructions in blood vessels, not otherwise provided for using mechanical vibrations, e.g. ultrasonic shock waves
    • A61B17/22012Implements for squeezing-off ulcers or the like on the inside of inner organs of the body; Implements for scraping-out cavities of body organs, e.g. bones; Calculus removers; Calculus smashing apparatus; Apparatus for removing obstructions in blood vessels, not otherwise provided for using mechanical vibrations, e.g. ultrasonic shock waves in direct contact with, or very close to, the obstruction or concrement
    • A61B17/2202Implements for squeezing-off ulcers or the like on the inside of inner organs of the body; Implements for scraping-out cavities of body organs, e.g. bones; Calculus removers; Calculus smashing apparatus; Apparatus for removing obstructions in blood vessels, not otherwise provided for using mechanical vibrations, e.g. ultrasonic shock waves in direct contact with, or very close to, the obstruction or concrement the ultrasound transducer being inside patient's body at the distal end of the catheter
    • A61B2017/22021Implements for squeezing-off ulcers or the like on the inside of inner organs of the body; Implements for scraping-out cavities of body organs, e.g. bones; Calculus removers; Calculus smashing apparatus; Apparatus for removing obstructions in blood vessels, not otherwise provided for using mechanical vibrations, e.g. ultrasonic shock waves in direct contact with, or very close to, the obstruction or concrement the ultrasound transducer being inside patient's body at the distal end of the catheter electric leads passing through the catheter
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B17/00Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
    • A61B17/22Implements for squeezing-off ulcers or the like on the inside of inner organs of the body; Implements for scraping-out cavities of body organs, e.g. bones; Calculus removers; Calculus smashing apparatus; Apparatus for removing obstructions in blood vessels, not otherwise provided for
    • A61B2017/22051Implements for squeezing-off ulcers or the like on the inside of inner organs of the body; Implements for scraping-out cavities of body organs, e.g. bones; Calculus removers; Calculus smashing apparatus; Apparatus for removing obstructions in blood vessels, not otherwise provided for with an inflatable part, e.g. balloon, for positioning, blocking, or immobilisation
    • A61B2017/22062Implements for squeezing-off ulcers or the like on the inside of inner organs of the body; Implements for scraping-out cavities of body organs, e.g. bones; Calculus removers; Calculus smashing apparatus; Apparatus for removing obstructions in blood vessels, not otherwise provided for with an inflatable part, e.g. balloon, for positioning, blocking, or immobilisation to be filled with liquid
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B17/00Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
    • A61B17/22Implements for squeezing-off ulcers or the like on the inside of inner organs of the body; Implements for scraping-out cavities of body organs, e.g. bones; Calculus removers; Calculus smashing apparatus; Apparatus for removing obstructions in blood vessels, not otherwise provided for
    • A61B2017/22082Implements for squeezing-off ulcers or the like on the inside of inner organs of the body; Implements for scraping-out cavities of body organs, e.g. bones; Calculus removers; Calculus smashing apparatus; Apparatus for removing obstructions in blood vessels, not otherwise provided for after introduction of a substance
    • A61B2017/22088Implements for squeezing-off ulcers or the like on the inside of inner organs of the body; Implements for scraping-out cavities of body organs, e.g. bones; Calculus removers; Calculus smashing apparatus; Apparatus for removing obstructions in blood vessels, not otherwise provided for after introduction of a substance ultrasound absorbing, drug activated by ultrasound

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a method and catheter for treating biological tissues with light activated drugs, and more particularly, to a method and catheter for treating biological tissues by delivering a light activated drug to a biological tissue and exposing the light activated drug to ultrasound energy.
  • Photodynamic therapy begins with the systemic administration of a selected light activated drug to a patient.
  • the drug disperses throughout the body and is taken up by most tissues within the body. After a period of time usually between 3 and 48 hours, the drug clears from most normal tissue and is retained to a greater degree in lipid rich regions such as the liver, kidney, tumor and atheroma.
  • a light source such as a fiber optic, is then directed to a targeted tissue site which includes the light activated drug. The tissues of the tissue site are then exposed to light from the light source in order to activate any light activated drugs within the tissue site. The activation of the light activated drug causes tissue death within the tissue site.
  • the concentration of the light activated drug within the targeted tissue site is limited by the quantity of light activated drug administered.
  • the concentration of the light activated drug within a tissue site can also be limited by the degree of selective uptake of the light activated drug into the tissue site. Specifically, if the targeted tissue site does not selectively uptake the light activated drug, the concentration of light activated drug within the tissue site can be too low for an effective treatment.
  • An additional problem associated with photodynamic therapy concerns depth of treatment. Light cannot penetrate deeply into opaque tissues. As a result, the depth that light penetrates most tissue sites is limited. This limited depth can prevent photodynamic therapy from being used to treat tissues which are located deeply in the interior of a tissue site.
  • An object for an embodiment of the invention is causing tissue death within a tissue site.
  • Another object for an embodiment of the present invention is locally delivering a light activated drug to a tissue site and activating the light activated drug.
  • Yet another object for an embodiment of the present invention is locally delivering a light activated drug to a tissue site and delivering ultrasound energy to the delivered light activated drug to activate the light activated drug.
  • a further object for an embodiment of the present invention is using a catheter to locally deliver a light activated drug to a tissue site and delivering ultrasound energy from an ultrasound element on the catheter to activate the light activated drug.
  • Yet a further object for an embodiment of the present invention is including the light activated drug in an emulsion, locally delivering the emulsion to a tissue site and delivering ultrasound energy to the light activated drug within the tissue site to activate the light activated drug.
  • Even a further object for an embodiment of the present invention is including the light activated drug in a liposome, locally delivering the liposome to a tissue site and delivering ultrasound energy to the light activated drug within the tissue site to activate the light activated drug.
  • An additional object for an embodiment of the present invention is including the light activated drug in an aqueous solution, locally delivering the aqueous solution to a tissue site and delivering ultrasound energy to the light activated drug within the tissue site to activate the light activated drug.
  • Yet a further object for an embodiment of the present invention is including the light activated drug in an emulsion, systemically delivering the emulsion, providing the light activated drug sufficient time to localize within a tissue site and delivering ultrasound energy to the light activated drug within the tissue site to activate the light activated drug.
  • Even a further object for an embodiment of the present invention is including the light activated drug in liposomes, systemically delivering the liposomes, providing the light activated drug sufficient time to localize within a tissue site and delivering ultrasound energy to the light activated drug within the tissue site to activate the light activated drug.
  • An additional object for an embodiment of the present invention is including the light activated drug in an aqueous solution, systemically delivering the aqueous solution, providing the light activated drug sufficient time to localize within a tissue site and delivering ultrasound energy to the light activated drug within the tissue site to activate the light activated drug.
  • Another object for an embodiment of the present invention is coupling a site directing molecule to a light activated drug, locally delivering the light activated drug to a tissue site and activating the light activated drug within the tissue site.
  • Yet another object for an embodiment of the invention is providing a catheter for locally delivering a media including a light activated drug to a tissue site.
  • the catheter including an ultrasound assembly configured to activate the light activated drug within the tissue site.
  • a further object for an embodiment of the invention is providing a catheter for delivering a media including a light activated drug to a tissue site.
  • the catheter including an ultrasound assembly for reducing exposure of the light activated drug to ultrasound energy until the light activated drug has been delivered from within the catheter.
  • a kit for causing tissue death within a tissue site includes a media with a light activated drug activatable upon exposure to a particular level of ultrasound energy.
  • the kit also includes a catheter with a lumen coupled with a media delivery port through which the light activated drug can be locally delivered to the tissue site.
  • the ultrasound transducer is configured to transmit the level of ultrasound energy which activates the light activated drug with sufficient power that the ultrasound energy can penetrate the tissue site.
  • a method for causing tissue death in a subdermal tissue site includes providing a catheter for locally delivering a light activated drug to the subdermal tissue site, the catheter including an ultrasound transducer.
  • the method also includes locally delivering the light activated drug to the tissue site; producing ultrasound energy from the ultrasound transducer; and directing the ultrasound energy to the subdermal tissue site following penetration of the light activated drug into the subdermal tissue site to activate at least a portion of the light activated drug within the subdermal tissue site.
  • a method for activating a light activated drug includes providing a catheter with an ultrasound transducer.
  • the method also includes introducing the light activated drug into a patient's body where a subdermal tissue site absorbs at least a portion of the light activated drug; producing ultrasound energy; directing the ultrasound energy to the light activated containing subdermal tissue site including the light activated drug; and activating at least a portion of the light activated drug in the subdermal selected tissue site.
  • a method for releasing a therapeutic from a microbubble includes providing a microbubble with a light activated drug activatable upon exposure to ultrasound energy; and delivering ultrasound energy to the microbubble at a frequency and intensity which activates the light activated drug to cause a rupture of the microbubble.
  • a microbubble is also disclosed.
  • the microbubble includes a substrate defining a shell of the microbubble and having a thickness permitting hydraulic transport of the microbubble.
  • the microbubble also includes a light activated drug activatable upon exposure to ultrasound energy. Activation of the light activated drug causes a disruption in the shell sufficient to cause a rupture of the microbubble.
  • the microbubble further includes a therapeutic releasable from the microbubble upon rupture of the microbubble and yielding a therapeutic effect upon release from the microbubble.
  • FIG. 1A is a side view of a catheter for locally delivering a media including a light activated drug to a tissue site.
  • FIG. 1B is an axial cross section of an ultrasound assembly for use with the catheter shown in FIG. 1A.
  • FIG. 1C is a lateral cross section of an ultrasound assembly for use with the catheter shown in FIG. 1A.
  • FIG. 2A is a side view of a catheter having an elongated body and an ultrasound assembly which is flush with the elongated body.
  • FIG. 2B is an axial cross section of the ultrasound assembly illustrated in FIG. 2A.
  • FIG. 2C is a lateral cross section of the ultrasound assembly illustrated in FIG. 2A.
  • FIG. 3A illustrates a catheter with a utility lumen and a second utility lumen.
  • FIG. 3B is an axial cross section of the ultrasound assembly illustrated in the catheter of FIG. 3A.
  • FIG. 4A is a side view of a catheter including a plurality of ultrasound assemblies.
  • FIG. 4B is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly included on a catheter with a plurality of utility lumens.
  • FIG. 4C is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly included on a catheter with a plurality of utility lumens.
  • FIG. 5A is a side view of a catheter including a balloon.
  • FIG. 5B is a cross section of a catheter with a balloon which include an ultrasound assembly.
  • FIG. 6A is a side view of a catheter with a balloon positioned distally relative to an ultrasound assembly.
  • FIG. 6B is a side view of a catheter with an ultrasound assembly positioned distally relative to a balloon.
  • FIG. 6C is a cross section of a catheter with an ultrasound assembly positioned at the distal end of the catheter.
  • FIG. 7A is a side view of a catheter with a media delivery port positioned between an ultrasound assembly and a balloon.
  • FIG. 7B is a side view of a catheter with an ultrasound assembly positioned between a media delivery port and a balloon.
  • FIG. 7C is a cross section of a catheter with an ultrasound assembly positioned at the distal end of the catheter.
  • FIG. 8A is a side view of a catheter including a media delivery port and an ultrasound assembly positioned between first and second balloons.
  • FIG. 8B is a side view of a catheter including a media delivery port and an ultrasound assembly positioned between first and second balloons.
  • FIG. 8C is a cross section of a balloon included on a catheter having a first and second balloon.
  • FIG. 9A illustrates an ultrasound assembly positioned adjacent to a tissue site and microbubbles delivered via a utility lumen.
  • FIG. 9B illustrates an ultrasound assembly positioned adjacent to a tissue site and a media delivered via a media delivery port.
  • FIG. 9C illustrates an ultrasound assembly positioned adjacent to a tissue site and a media delivered via a media delivery port while a guidewire is positioned in a utility lumen.
  • FIG. 9D illustrates a catheter including a balloon positioned adjacent to a tissue site.
  • FIG. 9E illustrates a catheter including a balloon expanded into contact with a tissue site.
  • FIG. 9F illustrates a catheter with an ultrasound assembly outside a balloon positioned at a tissue site.
  • FIG. 9G illustrates the balloon of FIG. 9F expanded into contact with a vessel so as to occlude the vessel.
  • FIG. 9H illustrates a catheter with an ultrasound assembly outside a first and second balloon positioned at a tissue site.
  • FIG. 9I illustrates the first and second balloon of FIG. 9H expanded into contact with a vessel so as to occlude the vessel.
  • FIG. 10A is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 10B is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 10C illustrates a support member with integral supports.
  • FIG. 10D illustrates a support member which is supported by an outer coating.
  • FIG. 11A is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly including two concentric ultrasound transducers in contact with one another.
  • FIG. 11B is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly including two separated and concentric ultrasound transducers.
  • FIG. 11C is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly including two ultrasound transducers where a chamber is defined between one of the ultrasound transducers and an elongated body.
  • FIG. 11D is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly including two longitudinally adjacent ultrasound transducers in physical contact with one another.
  • FIG. 11E is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly including two separated and longitudinally adjacent ultrasound transducers.
  • FIG. 11F is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly including two longitudinally adjacent ultrasound transducers with a single chamber positioned between both ultrasound transducers and an elongated body.
  • FIG. 11G is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly including two longitudinally adjacent ultrasound transducers with different chambers positioned between each ultrasound transducers and an elongated body.
  • FIG. 11H is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly including two longitudinally adjacent ultrasound transducers in contact with one another and having a single chamber positioned between each ultrasound transducers and an elongated body.
  • FIG. 12A is a cross section of a catheter which includes an ultrasound assembly module which is independent of a first catheter component and a second catheter component.
  • FIG. 12B illustrates the first and second catheter components coupled with the ultrasound assembly module.
  • FIG. 12C is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly which is integral with a catheter.
  • FIG. 13A is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly configured to radiate ultrasound energy in a radial direction.
  • the lines which drive the ultrasound transducer pass through a utility lumen in the catheter.
  • FIG. 13B is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly configured to radiate ultrasound energy in a radial direction.
  • the lines which drive the ultrasound transducer pass through line lumens in the catheter.
  • FIG. 13C is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly configured to longitudinally radiate ultrasound energy. The distal portion of one line travels proximally through the outer coating.
  • FIG. 13D is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly configured to longitudinally transmit ultrasound energy. The distal portion of one line travels proximally through a line lumen in the catheter.
  • FIG. 14A illustrates ultrasound transducers connected in parallel.
  • FIG. 14B illustrates ultrasound transducers connected in series.
  • FIG. 14C illustrates ultrasound transducers connected with a common line.
  • FIG. 15 illustrates a circuit for electrically coupling temperature sensors.
  • FIG. 16 illustrates a feedback control system for use with a catheter including an ultrasound assembly.
  • FIGS. 17 A-N illustrate pyrrole-based macrocyclic classes of light emitting drugs.
  • FIGS. 17 B- 2 illustrates possible texaphyrin derivation sites.
  • FIGS. 18 A-F illustrate the formulae of preferred light emitting drugs for use with media that includes microbubbles.
  • FIG. 19 illustrates a formula for a porphyrin group.
  • FIGS. 20 A-D illustrate the formulae of four preferred forms of the hydromonobenzoporphyrin derivatives of the green porphyrins illustrated in formulae 3 and 4 of FIG. 18.
  • FIGS. 21 A-B illustrate the formulae for specific examples of pyrrole-based macrocycle derivatives and xanthene derivatives which are preferred for inclusion in microbubbles to enhance rupture of the microbubbles upon activation.
  • FIGS. 22 A-I schematically summarize the synthesis of an oligonucleotide conjugate of a texaphyrin metal complex.
  • FIGS. 23 A-H illustrate the covalent coupling of texaphyrin metal complexes with amine, thiol, or hydroxy linked oligonucleotides.
  • FIGS. 24 A-F illustrate the synthesis of diformyl monoic acid and oligonucleotide conjugate.
  • FIGS. 25 A-J illustrate the synthesis of a texaphyrin based light activated drug.
  • FIG. 26 illustrates the formula for tin ethyl etiopurpurin (SnEt 2 ).
  • the present invention relates to a method and catheter for delivering a light activated drug to a tissue site and delivering ultrasound energy to the light activated drug within the tissue site. Since many light activated drugs are also activated by ultrasound energy, the delivery of ultrasound energy to the light activated drug activates the light activated drug within the tissue site. Similar to activation of a light activated drug by light, activation by ultrasound causes death of tissues within the tissue site. The tissue death is believed to result from the release of a singlet oxygen. Suitable tissue sites include, but are not limited to, atheroma, cancerous tumors, thrombi and potential restenosis sites. A potential restenosis site is a tissue site where restenosis is likely to occur such as the portion of vessels previously treated by balloon angioplasty. In contrast to light, ultrasound energy can be transmitted through opaque tissues. As a result, the ultrasound energy can be used to treat tissues which are deeper within a tissue site than could be treated via light activation.
  • Cavitation results when gas dissolved in a solution forms bubbles under certain types of acoustic vibration. Cavitation can also occur when small bubbles already present in the solution oscillate or repeatedly enlarge and contract to become bubbles. When the size of these cavitation bubbles reaches a size that cannot be maintained, they suddenly collapse and release various types of energy.
  • the various types of energy include, but are not limited to, mechanical energy, visible light, ultraviolet light and other types of electromagnetic radiation. Heat, plasma, magnetic fields, shock waves, free radicals, heat and other forms of energy are also thought to be generated locally.
  • the light activated drug is believed to be activated by at least one of the various forms of energy generated at the time of cavitation collapse.
  • the delivery of light activated drug to the tissue site can be through traditional systemic administration of a media including the light activated drug or can be performed through localized delivery of the media. Localized delivery can be achieved through injection into the tissue site or through other traditional localized delivery techniques.
  • a preferred delivery technique is using a catheter which includes a media delivery lumen coupled with a media delivery port. The catheter can be positioned such that the media delivery port is within the tissue site or is adjacent to the tissue site via traditional over-the-guidewire techniques. The media can then be locally delivered to the tissue site through the media delivery port.
  • the localized delivery of the light activated drug to the tissue sight serves to localize the light activated drug within the tissue site and can reduce the amount of light activated drug which concentrates in tissues outside the tissue site. Further, localized delivery of the light activated drug can serve to increase the concentration of the light activated drug within the tissue site above levels which would be achieved through systemic delivery of the light activated drug. Alternatively, the same concentration of light activated drug within the tissue site as would occur through systemic administration can be achieved by introducing smaller amounts of light activated drug into a patient's body.
  • Localized delivery of the light activated drug also permits treatment of tissue sites which do not have selective uptake of the light activated drug.
  • many light activated drugs such as the texaphyrins, are taken up by most tissues within the body and later localize within lipid rich tissues.
  • a non-lipid rich tissue site can be treated by delivering the ultrasound energy to the tissue site before the light activated drug has an opportunity to localize in lipid rich tissues.
  • Localized delivery is also advantageous when the tissue site is lipid rich such as in an atheroma or a tumor.
  • the localized delivery of the light activated drug combined with the inherent affinity of the light activated drug for tissue site can result in a high degree of localization of the light activated drug within lipid rich tissue sites.
  • the light activated drug can be coupled with a sight directing molecule to form a light activated drug conjugate.
  • the site directing molecule is chosen so the light activated drug conjugate specifically binds with the tissue site when the light activated drug conjugate is contacted with the tissue site under physiological conditions of temperature and pH.
  • the specific binding may result from specific electrostatic, hydrophobic, entropic, or other interactions between certain residues on the conjugate and specific residues on the tissue site.
  • the light activated drug includes an oligonucleotide acting as a site specific molecule coupled with a texaphyrin.
  • the oligonucleotide can have an affinity for a targeted site on a DNA strand.
  • the oligonucleotide can be designed to have complementary Watson-Crick base pairing with the targeted DNA site.
  • Activation of the light activated drug after the conjugate has bound the targeted DNA site can cause cleavage of the DNA strand at the targeted DNA site.
  • the activated drug conjugate can be used for cleavage of targeted DNA sites.
  • the light activated conjugate can be targeted to a site on viral DNA where activation of the light activated conjugate causes the virus to be killed.
  • the light activated conjugate can be targeted to oncogenes.
  • Other applications of targeted DNA cleavage include, but are not limited to, antisense applications, specific cleavage and subsequent recombination of DNA; destruction of viral DNA; construction of probes for controlling gene expression at the cellular level and for diagnosis; and cleavage of DNA in footprinting analyses, DNA sequencing, chromosome analysis, gene isolation, recombinant DNA manipulations, mapping of large genomes and chromosomes, in chemotherapy and in site directing mutagenesis.
  • the light activated drug includes a hormone.
  • the hormone may be targeted to a particular biological receptor which is localized at the tissue site.
  • the light activated drug can be included within several media suitable for delivery into the body.
  • Many light activated drugs are known to have low water solubilities of less than 100 mg/L.
  • achieving the desired concentration of light activated drug in an aqueous solution media for systemic delivery can often be difficult.
  • localized delivery of the light activated drug requires a lower concentration of light activated drug within the media.
  • the light activated drug can be included in an aqueous solution.
  • the media can also be an emulsion which includes a lipoid as a hydrophobic phase dispersed in a hydrophilic phase. These emulsions provide a media which is safe for delivery into the body with an effective concentration of light activated drug.
  • the media can also include microbubbles comprised from a substrate which forms a shell.
  • Suitable substrates for the microbubble include, but are not limited to, biocompatible polymers, albumins, lipids, sugars or other substances.
  • the light activated drug can be enclosed within the microbubble, coupled with the shell and/or distributed in the media outside the microbubble.
  • a preferred microbubble comprises a lipid substrate such as liposome. Systemic administration of liposomes with light activated drug has been shown to result in an increased accumulation and more prolonged retention of light activated drugs within cultured malignant cells and within tumors in vivo. Jori et al., Br. J.
  • Including a light activated drug with the microbubbles has numerous advantages over microbubbles without light activated drug. After administration of microbubbles to a patient, the microbubbles often must be ruptured to achieve their therapeutic effects.
  • One technique for rupturing microbubbles has been to expose the microbubbles to ultrasound energy. However, ultrasound energy of undesirably high intensity is frequently required to break the microbubbles. Further, the ultrasound energy frequently must be matched to the resonant frequency of the microbubbles. As a result, rupturing the microbubbles with ultrasound can present numerous challenges.
  • Activating a light activated drug within the microbubble and/or in the substrate of the microbubble can cause the microbubble to rupture.
  • Activation of the light activated drug is believed to cause a disturbance which disrupts the shell of the microbubble enough to cause the microbubble to rupture. This disruption occurs when the light activated drug is coupled with the shell of the microbubble or is entirely within the microbubble. This disruption is also believed to occur when light activated drug located the media outside the microbubbles is activated in proximity of the microbubble. Accordingly, including a sufficient concentration light activated drug in the media outside the microbubble and activating a portion of that light activated drug can also cause rupture of the microbubbles.
  • microbubbles can be ruptured by activating light activated drugs and without matching the ultrasound frequency to the resonant frequency of the microbubble.
  • a more efficient rupturing of microbubbles can be achieved by delivering a level of ultrasound energy which is appropriate to activate the light activated drug and which is matched to the resonant frequency of the microbubble.
  • the cavitation threshold can require an ultrasound intensity which is lower than the intensity required to rupture microbubbles without light activated drugs.
  • including light activated drug with microbubbles can reduce the intensity of ultrasound energy required to rupture the microbubble.
  • the threshold value of cavitation is also reduced in the proximity of many light activated drugs.
  • the light activated drug encourages cavitation in the proximity of the light activated drug.
  • the interior of the microbubbles may include a gas or may be devoid of gas.
  • a gas When a gas is present, the gas can occupy any portion of the microbubble's volume but preferably occupies 0.01-50% of the volume of the microbubble interior, more preferably 5-30% and most preferably 10-20%.
  • the volume of gas is less than 0.01% of the volume, cavitation can be hindered and when the volume of gas is greater than 50% the structural integrity of the microbubble shell can become too weak for the microbubble to be transported to the tissue site.
  • Suitable gasses for the interior of the microbubbles include, but are not limited to, biocompatible gasses such as air, nitrogen, carbon dioxide, oxygen, argon, fluorine, xenon, neon, helium, or combinations thereof.
  • biocompatible gasses such as air, nitrogen, carbon dioxide, oxygen, argon, fluorine, xenon, neon, helium, or combinations thereof.
  • the presence of tiny bubbles is known to reduce the cavitation threshold.
  • the presence of an appropriately sized gas bubble in the microbubble can enhance cavitation in the proximity of the light activated drug.
  • the microbubbles are preferably 0.01-100 ⁇ m in diameter. This size microbubble reduces excretion of the microbubble outside the body and also reduces interference of the microbubble with the flow of fluids within the body of the patient. Further, the microbubbles preferably have a shell thickness of 0.001-50 ⁇ m, 0.01-5 ⁇ m and 0.1-0.5 ⁇ m. This thickness provides the shells with sufficient thickness that the microbubble can withstand enough of the forces within the vasculature of a patient to be transported through at least a portion of the patient's vasculature. Similarly, the thickness can permit the microbubbles to be transported through a lumen in an apparatus such as a catheter. However, this thickness is also sufficiently thin that alteration of the ultrasound activated substance upon activation is sufficient to disrupt the shell of the microbubble and cause the microbubble to rupture.
  • Activating the light activated drug to rupture microbubbles can cause the light activated drug to be released from the microbubble so the light activated drug can penetrate the tissue near the site of rupture. Further exposure of the light activated drug to ultrasound can activate the light activated drug within the tissue and cause death of the tissue as described above.
  • the microbubble can include a therapeutic in addition to the light activated drug. Activation of the light activated drug can serve to rupture the microbubble and release the therapeutic from the microbubble. As a result, the therapeutic is released in proximity to a tissue site by rupturing the microbubble in proximity to the tissue site. This is advantageous when the therapeutic can be detrimental when administered systemically.
  • a therapeutic such as cisplatin is known to kill cancerous tissues but is also known to kill other tissues throughout the body. As a result, systemic administration of cisplatin can be detrimental.
  • microbubbles can serve to protect tissues from the therapeutic agent until the therapeutic agent is released from the carrier. For instance, when the therapeutic is enclosed within the interior of the microbubble, contact between the therapeutic agent and tissues outside the carrier is reduced. As a result, the carrier increases protection of tissues outside the carrier are protected from the therapeutic agent until the microbubble is ruptured and the therapeutic released.
  • the therapeutics may be encapsulated in the microbubbles, included in the shell of the microbubbles or in the media outside the microbubbles.
  • Therapeutic as used herein, means an agent having beneficial effect on the patient.
  • Examples of therapeutics which can be included with the microbubbles include, but are not limited to, hormone products such as, vasopressin and oxytocin and their derivatives, glucagon and thyroid agents as iodine products and anti-thyroid agents; cardiovascular products as chelating agents and mercurial diuretics and cardiac glycosides; respiratory products as xanthine derivatives (theophylline & aminophylline); anti-infectives as aminoglycosides, antifungals (amphotericin), penicillin and cephalosporin antibiotics, antiviral agents as Zidovudine, Ribavirin, Amantadine, Vidarabine, and Acyclovir, anti-helmintics, antimalarials, and antituberculous drugs; biologicals as immune serums, antitoxins and antivenins, rabies prophylaxis products, bacterial vaccines, viral vaccines, toxoids; antineoplastics asnitrosureas, nitrogen mustards, antimetabolites
  • thrombolytic agents such as urokinase
  • coagulants such as thrombin
  • antineoplastic agents such as platinum compounds (e.g., spiroplatin, cisplatin, and carboplatin), methotrexate, adriamycin, taxol, mitomycin, ansamitocin, bleomycin, cytosine arabinoside, arabinosyl adsnine, mercaptopolylysine, vincristine, busulfan, chlorambucil, melphalan (e.g., PAM, L-PAM or phenylalanine mustard), mercaptopurine, mitotane, procarbazine hydrochloride dactinomycin (actinomycin D), daunorubicinhydrochloride, doxorubicin hydrochloride, mitomycin, plicamycin (mithramycin), aminoglutethimide
  • platinum compounds e.g., spiroplatin
  • the therapeutic is a monoclonal antibody, such as a monoclonal antibody capable of binding to melanoma antigen.
  • Other preferred therapeutics include genetic material such as nucleic acids, RNA, and DNA, of either natural or synthetic origin, including recombinant RNA and DNA and antisense RNA and DNA.
  • Types of genetic material that may be used include, for example, genes carried on expression vectors such as plasmids, phagemids, cosmids, yeast artificial chromosomes (YACs), and defective or “helper” viruses, antigene nucleic acids, both single and double stranded RNA and DNA and analogs thereof, such asphosphorothioate and phosphorodithioate oligodeoxynucleotides.
  • the genetic material may be combined, for example, with proteins or other polymers.
  • Examples of genetic therapeutics that may be included in the microbubbles include DNA encoding at least a portion of an HLAgene, DNA encoding at least a portion of dystrophin, DNA encoding at least a portion of CFTR, DNA encoding at least a portion of IL-2, DNA encoding at least a portion of TNF, an antisense oligonucleotide capable of binding the DNA encoding at least a portion of Ras.
  • DNA encoding certain proteins may be used in the treatment of many different types of diseases.
  • adenosine deaminase may be provided to treat ADA deficiency
  • tumor necrosis factor and/or interleukin-2 may be provided to treat advanced cancers
  • HDL receptor may be provided to treat liver disease
  • thymidine kinase may be provided to treat ovarian cancer, brain tumors, or HIV infection
  • HLA-B7 may be provided to treat malignant melanoma
  • interleukin-2 may be provided to treat neuroblastoma, malignant melanoma, or kidney cancer
  • interleukin-4 may be provided to treat cancer
  • HIV env may be provided to treat HIV infection
  • antisense ras/p53 may be provided to treat lung cancer
  • Factor VIII may be provided to treat Hemophilia B. See, for example, Science 258, 744-746.
  • more than one therapeutic may be included in the media.
  • a single microbubble may contain more than one therapeutic or microbubbles containing different therapeutics may be co-administered.
  • a monoclonal antibody capable of binding to melanoma antigen and an oligonucleotide encoding at least a portion of IL-2 may be administered in a single microbubble.
  • the phrase “at least a portion of,” as used herein, means that the entire gene need not be represented by the oligonucleotide, so long as the portion of the gene represented provides an effective block to gene expression.
  • microbubbles including a therapeutic can be administered before, after, during or intermittently with the administration of microbubbles without a therapeutic.
  • microbubbles without a therapeutic and microbubbles including a coagulant such as thrombin can be administered to a patient having liver cancer.
  • Activating the light activated drug included with the microbubbles serves to rupture the microbubbles and release the light activated drug and thrombin from the microbubbles. Further activation of the light activated drug can cause tissue death and the thrombin can cause coagulation in and around the damaged tissues.
  • Prodrugs may be included in the microbubbles, and are included within the ambit of the term therapeutic, as used herein.
  • Prodrugs are well known in the art and include inactive drug precursors which, when exposed to high temperature, metabolizing enzymes, cavitation and/or pressure, in the presence of oxygen or otherwise, or when released from the microbubbles, will form active drugs.
  • Such prodrugs can be activated via the application of ultrasound to the prodrug-containing microbubbles with the resultant cavitation, heating, pressure, and/or release from the microbubbles.
  • Suitable prodrugs will be apparent to those skilled in the art, and are described, for example, in Sinkula et al., J. Pharm. Sci.
  • Prodrugs may comprise inactive forms of the active drugs wherein a chemical group is present on the prodrug which renders it inactive and/or confers solubility or some other property to the drug.
  • the prodrugs are generally inactive, but once the chemical group has been cleaved from the prodrug, by heat, cavitation, pressure, and/or by enzymes in the surrounding environment or otherwise, the active drug is generated.
  • prodrugs are well described in the art, and comprise a wide variety of drugs bound to chemical groups through bonds such as esters to short, medium or long chain aliphatic carbonates, hemiesters of organic phosphate, pyrophosphate, sulfate, amides, amino acids, azo bonds, carbamate, phosphamide, glucosiduronate, N-acetylglucosamine and beta-glucoside.
  • drugs with the parent molecule and the reversible modification or linkage are as follows: convallatoxin with ketals, hydantoin with alkyl esters, chlorphenesin with glycine or alanins esters, acetaminophen with caffeine complex, acetylsalicylic acid with THAM salt, acetylsalicylic acid with acetamidophenyl ester, naloxone with sulfateester, 15-methylprostaglandin F sub 2 with methyl ester, procaine with polyethylene glycol, erythromycin with alkyl esters, clindamycin with alkylesters or phosphate esters, tetracycline with betains salts, 7-acylaminocephalosporins with ring-substituted acyloxybenzyl esters, nandrolone with phenylproprionate decanoate esters, estradiol with enol
  • Prodrugs may also be designed as reversible drug derivatives and utilized as modifiers to enhance drug transport to site-specific tissues.
  • parent molecules with reversible modifications or linkages to influence transport to a site specific tissue and for enhanced therapeutic effect include isocyanate with haloalkyl nitrosurea, testosterone with propionateester, methotrexate (3-5′-dichloromethotrexate) with dialkyl esters, cytosine arabinoside with 5′-acylate, nitrogen mustard (2,2′-dichloro-N-methyldiethylamine), nitrogen mustard with aminomethyltetracycline, nitrogen mustard with cholesterol or estradiol ordehydroepiandrosterone esters and nitrogen mustard with azobenzene.
  • a particular chemical group to modify a given drug may be selected to influence the partitioning of the drug into either the shell or the interior of the microbubbles.
  • the bond selected to link the chemical group to the drug may be selected to have the desired rate of metabolism, e.g., hydrolysis in the case of ester bonds in the presence of serum esterases after release from the microbubbles.
  • the particular chemical group may be selected to influence the biodistribution of the drug employed in the microbubbles, e.g., N,N-bis(2-chloroethyl)-phosphorodiamidicacid with cyclic phosphoramide for ovarian adenocarcinoma.
  • the prodrugs employed within the microbubbles may be designed to contain reversible derivatives which are utilized as modifiers of duration of activity to provide, prolong or depot action effects.
  • nicotinic acid may be modified with dextran and carboxymethlydextran esters, streptomycin with alginic acid salt, dihydrostreptomycin with pamoate salt, cytarabine (ara-C) with 5′-adamantoats ester, ara-adenosine (ara-A) with 5-palmirate and 5′-benzoate esters, amphotericin B with methyl esters, testosterone with 17-beta-alkyl esters, estradiol with formate ester, prostaglandin with 2-(4-imidazolyl) ethylamine salt, dopamine with amino acid amides, chloramphenicol with mono- and bis(trimethylsilyl) ethers, and cycloguanil with pamoate salt.
  • a depot or reservoir of long-acting drug may be released in vivo from the prodrug bearing microbubbles.
  • compounds which are generally thermally labile may be utilized to create toxic free radical compounds.
  • Compounds with azolinkages, peroxides and disulfide linkages which decompose with high temperature are preferred.
  • azo, peroxide or disulfide bond containing compounds are activated by cavitation and/or increased heating caused by the interaction of ultra with the microbubbles to create cascades of free radicals from these prodrugs entrapped therein.
  • a wide variety of drugs or chemicals may constitute these prodrugs, such as azo compounds, the general structure of such compounds being R—N ⁇ N—R, wherein R is a hydrocarbon chain, where the double bond between the two nitrogen atoms may react to create free radical products in vivo.
  • Exemplary drugs or compounds which may be used to create free radical products include azo containing compounds such as azobenzene,2,2′-azobisisobutyronitrile, azodicarbonamide, azolitmin, azomycin, azosemide, azosulfamide, azoxybenzene, aztreonam, sudan II, sulfachrysoidine, sulfamidochrysoidine and sulfasalazine, compounds containing disulfide bonds such as sulbentine, thiamine disulfide, thiolutin, thiram, compounds containing peroxides such as hydrogen peroxide and benzoylperoxide, 2,2′-azobisisobutyronitrile, 2,2′-azobis(2-amidopropane) dihydrochloride, and 2,2′-azobis(2,4-dimethylvaleronitrile).
  • azo containing compounds such as azobenzene,2,2′-azo
  • a microbubble having oxygen gas on its interior should create extensive free radicals with cavitation.
  • metal ions from the transition series especially manganese, iron and copper can increase the rate of formation of reactive oxygen intermediates from oxygen.
  • the formation of free radicals in vivo can be increased.
  • These metal ions may be incorporated into the microbubbles as freesalts, as complexes, e.g., with EDTA, DTPA, DOTA or desferrioxamine, or asoxides of the metal ions.
  • derivatized complexes of the metal ions may be bound to lipid head groups, or lipophilic complexes of the ions may be incorporated into a lipid bilayer, for example.
  • an acylated chemical group may be bound to a drug via an ester linkage which would readily cleave in vivo by enzymatic action in serum.
  • the acylated prodrug can be included in the microbubble. When the microbubble is ruptured, the prodrug will then be exposed to the serum.
  • the ester linkage is then cleaved by esterases in the serum, thereby generating the drug.
  • ultrasound may be utilized not only to activate the light activated drug so as to burst the gas-filled liposome, but also to cause thermal effects which may increase the rate of the chemical cleavage and the release of the active drug from the prodrug.
  • the microbubbles may also be designed so that there is a symmetric or an asymmetric distribution of the therapeutic both inside and outside of the microbubble.
  • the particular chemical structure of the therapeutics may be selected or modified to achieve desired solubility such that the therapeutic may either be encapsulated within the interior of the microbubble or couple with the shell of the microbubble.
  • the shell-bound therapeutic may bear one or more acyl chains such that, when the microbubble is popped or heated or ruptured via cavitation, the acylated therapeutic may then leave the surface and/or the therapeutic may be cleaved from the acyl chains chemical group.
  • other therapeutics may be formulated with a hydrophobic group which is aromatic or sterol in structure to incorporate into the surface of the microbubble.
  • the liposomes can be “fast breaking”.
  • fast breaking liposomes the light activated drug-liposome combination is stable in vitro but, when administered in vivo, the light activated drug is rapidly released into the bloodstream where it can associate with serum lipoproteins.
  • the localized delivery of liposomes combined with the fast breaking nature of the liposomes can result in localization of the light activated drug and/or the therapeutic in the tissues near the catheter.
  • the fast breaking liposomes can prevent the liposomes from leaving the vicinity of the catheter intact and then concentrating in non-targeted tissues such as the liver. Delivery of ultrasound energy from the catheter can also serve to break apart the liposomes after they have been delivered from the catheter.
  • a catheter for locally delivering a media including a light activated drug includes an elongated body with at least one utility lumen extending through the elongated body.
  • the utility lumens can be used to deliver the media including the light activated drug locally to a tissue site and/or to receive a guidewire so the catheter can be guided to the tissue site.
  • the ultrasound assembly can include an ultrasound transducer designed to transmit ultrasound energy which activates the light activated drug.
  • a support member can support the ultrasound transducer adjacent to an outer surface of the elongated body so as to define a chamber between the ultrasound transducer and the elongated body.
  • the chamber can be filled with a material which creates a low acoustic impedance to reduce the exposure of at least one utility lumen within the elongated body to ultrasound energy delivered from the ultrasound transducer.
  • the chamber can be filled with a material which absorbs, reflects or prevents transmission of ultrasound energy through the chamber.
  • the chamber can be evacuated to reduce transmission of ultrasound energy through the chamber. Reducing the exposure of at least one lumen to the ultrasound energy reduces exposure of media delivered through the at least one lumen to the ultrasound energy.
  • the effect of the ultrasound energy on the light activated drug is reduced until the light activated drug has been delivered out of the catheter.
  • ultrasound energy is known to rupture microbubbles.
  • the chamber reduces the opportunity for the ultrasound energy to rupture the microbubbles within the catheter.
  • the support member can have ends which extend beyond the ultrasound member.
  • the chamber can be positioned adjacent to the entire longitudinal length of the ultrasound transducer and can extend beyond the ends of the ultrasound transducer. This configuration maximizes the portion of the ultrasound transducer which is adjacent to the chamber. Increasing the portion of ultrasound transducer adjacent to the chamber can reduce the amount of ultrasound energy transmitted to the utility lumens.
  • the ultrasound assembly can include an outer coating over the ultrasound transducer. Temperature sensors can be positioned in the outer coating adjacent to ultrasound transducer. The temperature sensors feed back information regarding the temperature adjacent to the ultrasound transducers where the thermal energy has a reduced opportunity to dissipate. As a result, the temperature sensors provide a measure of the temperature on the exterior surface of the transducer.
  • FIGS. 1 A- 1 B illustrates a catheter 10 for delivering a media including a light activated drug to a tissue site.
  • the catheter 10 includes an ultrasound assembly 12 for delivering ultrasound energy to light activated drug within the tissue site.
  • the catheter 10 includes an elongated body 14 with a utility lumen 16 extending through the elongated body 14 .
  • the utility lumen 16 can receive a guidewire (not shown) so the catheter 10 can be threaded along the guidewire.
  • the utility lumen 16 can also be used for the delivering media which include a light activated drug.
  • a fiber optic can also be positioned in the utility lumen 16 to provide a view of the tissue site or to provide light to the tissue site. As a result, the catheter can also be used as an endoscope.
  • the ultrasound assembly 12 can also include an outer coating 18 .
  • Suitable outer coatings 18 include, but are not limited to, polyimide, parylene and polyester.
  • An ultrasound transducer 20 is positioned within the outer coating 18 .
  • Suitable ultrasound transducers 20 include, but are not limited to, PZT-4D, PZT-4, PZT-8 and cylindrically shaped piezoceramics. When the ultrasound transducer 20 has a cylindrical shape, the ultrasound transducer 20 can encircle the elongated body 14 as illustrated in FIG. 1C.
  • One or more temperature sensors 22 can be positioned in the outer coating 18 .
  • the temperature sensors 22 can be positioned adjacent to the ultrasound transducer 20 to provide feedback regarding the temperature adjacent to the ultrasound transducer 20 .
  • the temperature sensors can be in electrical communication with an electrical coupling 24 .
  • the electrical coupling 24 can be coupled with a feedback control system (not shown) which adjusts the level of the ultrasound energy delivered from the ultrasound transducer 20 in response to the temperature
  • the catheter 10 can include a perfusion lumen 25 .
  • the perfusion lumen 25 allows fluid to flow from outside the catheter into the utility lumen 16 . Once a guidewire has been removed from the utility lumen 16 , fluid flow which is obstructed by the ultrasound assembly can continue through the perfusion lumen 25 and the utility lumen.
  • the ultrasound assembly 12 can be flush with the elongated body 14 .
  • the ultrasound transducer 20 and the temperature sensors 22 can be positioned within the elongated body 14 . This configuration of elongated body 14 and ultrasound transducer 20 can eliminate the need for the outer coating 18 illustrated in FIGS. 1 A- 1 C.
  • the catheter 10 can also include a media delivery port 26 , a media inlet port 28 and a second utility lumen 16 A.
  • the media inlet port 28 is designed to be coupled with a media source (not shown).
  • Media can be transported from the media source and through the media delivery port 26 via the second utility lumen 16 A.
  • a guidewire can be left within the utility lumen 16 while media is delivered via the second utility lumen 16 A.
  • FIG. 4A illustrates a catheter 10 including a plurality of ultrasound assemblies 12 .
  • FIGS. 4 B- 4 C are cross sections of a catheter 10 with a second utility lumen 16 A coupled with the media delivery ports 26 .
  • the second utility lumen 16 A can also be coupled with the media inlet port 28 illustrated in FIG. 4A.
  • the media inlet port 28 is designed to be coupled with a media source (not shown). Media can be transported from the media source and through the media delivery ports 26 via the second utility lumen 16 A.
  • the catheter 10 can include a balloon 30 as illustrated in FIG. 5A.
  • the balloon 30 can be constructed from an impermeable material or a permeable membrane or a selectively permeable membrane which allows certain media to flow through the membrane while preventing other media from flowing through the membrane.
  • Suitable membranous materials for the balloon 30 include, but are not limited to cellulose, cellulose acetate, polyvinylchloride, polyolefin, polyurethane and polysulfone.
  • the membrane pore sizes are preferably 5 A-2 ⁇ m, more preferably 50 A-900 A and most preferably 100 A-300 A in diameter.
  • an ultrasound assembly 12 , a first media delivery port 26 A and a second media delivery port 26 B can be positioned within the balloon 30 .
  • the first and second media delivery ports 26 A, 26 B are coupled with a second utility lumen 16 A and third utility lumen 16 B.
  • the second and third utility lumens 16 A, 16 B can be coupled with the same media inlet port 28 or with independent media inlet ports 28 .
  • different media can be delivered via the second and third media delivery ports 26 A, 26 B.
  • a medication media can be delivered via the third utility lumen 16 B and an expansion media can be delivered via the second utility lumen 16 A.
  • the medication media can include drugs or other medicaments which can provide a therapeutic effect.
  • the expansion media can serve to expand the balloon 30 or wet the membrane comprising the balloon 30 . Wetting the membrane comprising the balloon 30 can cause a minimally permeable membrane to become permeable.
  • the ultrasound assembly 12 can be positioned outside the balloon 30 as illustrated in FIGS. 6 A- 6 C.
  • FIG. 6A the balloon 30 is positioned distally of the ultrasound assembly 12 and in FIG. 6B the ultrasound assembly 12 is positioned distally of the balloon 30 .
  • FIG. 6C is a cross section a catheter 10 with an ultrasound assembly 12 positioned outside the balloon 30 .
  • the catheter includes a second utility lumen 16 A coupled with a first media delivery port 26 A.
  • the second utility lumen 16 A can be used to deliver an expansion media and/or a medication media to the balloon 30 .
  • the balloon 30 is constructed from a permeable membrane, the medication media and/or the expansion media can pass through the balloon 30 .
  • the balloon 30 when the balloon 30 is constructed from a selectively permeable membrane, particular components of the medication media and/or the expansion media can pass through the balloon 30 . Pressure can be used to drive the media or components of the media across the balloon 30 . Other means such as phoresis can also be used to drive the media or components of the media across the balloon 30 .
  • the ultrasound assembly 12 may be positioned at the distal end of the catheter 10 .
  • the second utility lumen 16 A can be used to deliver an expansion media and/or a medication media to the balloon 30 .
  • the utility lumen 16 can be used to deliver a medication media as well as to guide the catheter 10 along a guidewire.
  • the catheter 10 can include a second media delivery port 26 B positioned outside the balloon.
  • the ultrasound assembly 12 and the second media delivery port 26 B are positioned distally relative to a balloon 30 , however, the balloon 30 can be positioned distally relative to the ultrasound assembly 12 and the second media delivery port 26 B.
  • the ultrasound assembly 12 is positioned distally of the second media delivery port 26 B and in FIG. 7B the second media delivery port 26 B is positioned distally of the ultrasound assembly 12 .
  • FIG. 7C is a cross section of the catheter 10 illustrated in FIG. 7A.
  • the catheter 10 includes first and second media delivery ports 26 A, 26 B coupled with a second utility lumen 16 A and third utility lumen 16 B.
  • the second and third utility lumens 16 A, 16 B can be coupled with independent media inlet ports 28 (not shown).
  • the second utility lumen 16 A can be used to deliver an expansion media and/or a medication media to the balloon 30 while the third utility lumen 16 B can be used to deliver a medication media through the second media delivery port 26 B.
  • the catheter 10 can include a first balloon 30 A and a second balloon 30 B.
  • the ultrasound assembly 12 can be positioned between the first and second balloons 30 A, 30 B.
  • a second media delivery port 26 B can optionally be positioned between the first and second balloons 30 A, 30 B.
  • the second media delivery port 26 B is positioned distally relative to the ultrasound assembly and in FIG. 8B the ultrasound assembly is positioned distally relative to the second media delivery port 26 B.
  • FIG. 8C is a cross section of the first balloon 30 A illustrated in FIG. 8B.
  • the catheter includes a second, third and fourth utility lumens 16 A, 16 B, 16 C.
  • the second utility lumen 16 A is coupled with a first media delivery port 26 A within the first balloon.
  • the third utility lumen 16 B is coupled with the second media delivery port 26 B and the fourth utility lumen 16 C is coupled with a third media delivery port 26 C in the second balloon 30 B (not shown).
  • the second and fourth utility lumens 16 A, 16 C can be used to deliver expansion media and/or medication media to the first and second balloon 30 A, 30 B.
  • the second and fourth utility lumens 16 A, 16 C can be coupled with the same media inlet port or with independent media inlet ports (not shown).
  • the third utility lumen 16 B can be coupled with an independent media inlet port and can be used to deliver a medication media via the second media delivery port 26 B.
  • FIGS. 9 A- 9 I illustrate operation of various embodiments of catheters 10 for delivering ultrasound energy to a light activated drug within a tissue site.
  • FIGS. 9 A- 9 I illustrate the tissue site 32 as an atheroma in a vessel 34 , however, it is contemplated that the catheter 10 can be used with other tissue sites 32 such as a tumor and that the catheter 10 can be positioned within the vasculature of the tumor.
  • the catheter 10 is illustrated as being within a vessel 34 .
  • the catheter 10 can be positioned within the vessel 34 by applying conventional over-the-guidewire techniques and can be verified by including radiopaque markers upon the catheter 10 .
  • the catheter 10 is positioned so the ultrasound assembly 12 is adjacent to a tissue site 32 within a vessel 34 .
  • the guidewire is removed from the utility lumen 16 and media can be delivered via the utility lumen 16 as illustrated by the arrows 36 .
  • the media includes microbubbles 38 but can alternatively be an emulsion.
  • the media is delivered to the tissue site 32 via the utility lumen 16 and ultrasound energy 40 is delivered from the ultrasound assembly 12 .
  • Suitable periods for delivering the ultrasound energy include., but are not limited to, 1 minute to three hours, 2 minutes to one hour and 10-30 minutes.
  • Suitable intensities for the ultrasound energy include, but are not limited to, 0.1-1000 W/cm 2 , 1-100 W/cm 2 and 10-50 W/cm 2 .
  • Suitable frequencies for the ultrasound energy include, but are not lmited to, 10 kHz-100 MHz and 10 kHz-50 MHz but is preferably 20 kHz-10 MHz.
  • Suitable ultrasound energies also include, but are not limited to 0.02 to 10 w/cm at a frequency of about 20 KHz to about 10 MHz and more preferably about 0.3 W/cm 2 at a frequency of about 1.3 MHz.
  • the ultrasound energy can be intermittently switched between a first and second frequency to increase the efficiency of microbubble rupture and to increase activation of the light activated drug.
  • the ultrasound energy can be switched between about 100 kHz and about 270 kHz in short pulses of approximately 0.001-10 seconds duration.
  • the ultrasound energy can be switched between first and second intensities.
  • the first and second frequencies can be provided by different ultrasound transducers.
  • the first and second intensities can be provided by different ultrasound transducers.
  • each transducer can simultaneously transmit ultrasound energy with different intensity and/or frequency.
  • the delivery of ultrasound energy 40 can be before, after, during or intermittently with the delivery of the microbubbles 38 .
  • the microbubbles 38 can be “fast breaking” so they rupture upon exiting the utility lumen and being exposed to the vessel 34 .
  • the ultrasound energy from the ultrasound assembly 12 can cause the microbubbles 38 within the delivered media to rupture.
  • the ultrasound assembly can be designed to reduce the exposure of media within the catheter 10 to the ultrasound energy from the ultrasound assembly 12 . When the catheter 10 is so designed, the number of microbubbles 38 which rupture within the catheter is reduced and the number of microbubbles 38 which rupture outside the catheter is increased.
  • Delivery of the ultrasound energy before delivery of the light activated drug can enhance absorption of the light activated drug into the tissue site.
  • Delivery of the ultrasound energy a pre-determined time after delivery of the light activated drug can provide the light activated drug time to penetrate the tissue site.
  • the pre-determined time can be of sufficient duration that at least a portion of the light activated drug penetrates into the tissue site.
  • the pre-determined time can also be of sufficient duration that the light activated drug localizes within the lipid rich tissue of the atheroma.
  • Sufficient time between delivery of the media and the ultrasound energy include but are not limited to, 1 minute to 48 hours, 1 minute to 3 hours, 1 to 15 minutes and 1 to 2 minutes.
  • ultrasound energy 40 is delivered from the ultrasound transducer 20 and a media is delivered through the media delivery port 26 as illustrated by the arrows 36 .
  • the delivery of ultrasound energy 40 can be before, after, during or intermittently with the delivery of the media via the media delivery port 26 .
  • the guidewire 104 can remain in the utility lumen 16 during the delivery of the media via the media delivery ports 26 .
  • the ultrasound assembly can be designed to reduce the transmission of the ultrasound energy into the utility lumen. Because the transmission of ultrasound energy 40 into the utility lumen 16 is reduced, the change in the frequency of the ultrasound transducer 20 which is due to the presence of the guidewire in the utility lumen 16 is also reduced.
  • a catheter 10 including a balloon 30 is positioned with the balloon adjacent to the tissue site 32 .
  • the balloon 30 is expanded into contact with the tissue site 32 .
  • the catheter 10 can include a perfusion lumen which permits a continuous flow of fluid from the vessel through the utility lumen during the partial or full obstruction of the vessel by the balloon.
  • a media can be delivered to the tissue site 32 via the balloon 30 .
  • the media can serve to wet the membrane or can include a drug or other medicament which provides a therapeutic effect.
  • Ultrasound energy 40 can be delivered from the ultrasound assembly 12 before, after, during or intermittently with the delivery of the media.
  • the ultrasound energy 40 can serve to drive the media across the membrane via phonophoresis or can enhance the therapeutic effect of the media.
  • FIG. 9F a catheter 10 with an ultrasound assembly 12 outside a balloon 30 is positioned at the tissue site 32 so the ultrasound assembly 12 is adjacent to the tissue site 32 .
  • a fluid within the vessel flows past the balloon as indicated by the arrow 42 .
  • FIG. 9G the balloon 30 is expanded into contact with the vessel 34 .
  • the balloon 30 can be constructed from an impermeable material so the vessel 34 is occluded. As a result, the fluid flow through the vessel 34 is reduced or stopped.
  • a medication media is delivered through the utility lumen 16 and ultrasound energy 40 is delivered from the ultrasound assembly 12 .
  • the catheter 10 including a media delivery port 26 outside of the balloon 30 (i.e. FIGS.
  • the medication media can be delivered via the media delivery port 26 . Further, a first medication media can be delivered via the media delivery port 26 while a second medication media can be delivered via the utility lumen 16 or while a guidewire is positioned within the utility lumen 16 .
  • the ultrasound energy 40 can be delivered from the ultrasound assembly 12 before, after, during or intermittently with the delivery of the media.
  • the occlusion of the vessel 34 before the delivery of the media can serve to prevent the media from being swept from the tissue site 32 by the fluid flow.
  • the balloon 30 illustrated in FIGS. 9 F- 9 G is positioned proximally relative to the ultrasound assembly 12 , the fluid flow through the vessel 34 can also be reduced by expanding a single balloon 30 which is positioned distally relative to the ultrasound assembly 12 .
  • FIG. 9H a catheter 10 including a first balloon 30 A and a second balloon 30 B is positioned at a tissue site 32 so the ultrasound assembly 12 is positioned adjacent to the tissue site 32 .
  • a fluid within the vessel 34 flows past the balloon 30 as indicated by the arrow 42 .
  • the first and second balloons 30 A, 30 B are expanded into contact with the vessel 34 .
  • the first and second balloons 30 A, 30 B can be constructed from an impermeable material so the vessel 34 is occluded proximally and distally of the ultrasound assembly 12 .
  • a medication media is delivered through the media delivery port 26 and ultrasound energy 40 is delivered from the ultrasound assembly 12 .
  • the ultrasound energy 40 can be delivered from the ultrasound assembly 12 before, after, during or intermittently with the delivery of the media.
  • the occlusion of the vessel 34 before the delivery of the media can serve to prevent the media from being swept from the tissue site 32 by the fluid flow.
  • the media can be systemically delivered.
  • the catheter 10 is positioned adjacent to the tissue site before, after or during the systemic administration of the media.
  • the ultrasound energy can be delivered after the microbubbles have had sufficient time to reach the desired tissue site in sufficient concentrations.
  • a level of ultrasound which ruptures the microbubbles is then delivered from the ultrasound assembly. After rupture of the microbubbles, the delivery of ultrasound energy can be stopped to provide the light activated drug or other therapeutic time to penetrate the tissue site.
  • the delivery of the ultrasound energy can also be continuous to maximize the number of microbubbles which are burst.
  • the media is systemically delivered and the light activated drug is included in media which does' not require an ultrasound activated release
  • the behavior of the light activated drug within the patient must be taken into consideration.
  • many light drugs such as the macrocycles, initially disperse throughout the body and where they are taken up by most tissues. After a period of time, usually between 3 and 48 hours, the drug clears from most normal tissue and is retained to a greater degree in lipid rich regions such as the liver, kidney, tumor and atheroma.
  • the tissue site is not a lipid rich region
  • the ultrasound energy should be delivered to the tissue site within 3 to 48 hours of systemically administering the media.
  • improved results can be achieved by waiting 3 to 48 hours after systemic administration of the media before delivering the ultrasound energy.
  • FIG. 10A provides a cross section of an ultrasound assembly which reduces transmission of ultrasound energy from the ultrasound transducer into the catheter.
  • the ultrasound assembly 12 includes a support member 44 .
  • Suitable support members 44 include, but are not limited to, polyimide, polyester and nylon.
  • the support member 44 can be attached to the ultrasound transducer 20 .
  • Suitable means for attaching the ultrasound transducer 20 to the support member 44 include, but are not limited to, adhesive bonding and thermal bonding.
  • the support member 44 supports the ultrasound transducer 20 at an external surface 46 of the elongated body 14 such that a chamber 48 is defined between the ultrasound transducer 20 and the external surface 46 of the elongated body 14 .
  • the chamber 48 preferably has a height from 0.25-10 ⁇ m, more preferably from 0.50-5 ⁇ m and most preferably from 0.0-1.5 ⁇ m.
  • the support member 44 can be supported by supports 50 positioned at the ends 52 of the support member 44 as illustrated in FIG. 10A.
  • the supports 50 can be integral with the support member 44 as illustrated in FIG. 10C.
  • the outer coating 18 can serve as the supports as illustrated in FIG. 10D.
  • the ends 52 of the support member 44 can extend beyond the ends 54 of the ultrasound transducer 20 .
  • the supports 50 can be positioned beyond the ends 54 of the ultrasound transducer 20 .
  • the chamber 48 can extend along the longitudinal length 56 of the ultrasound transducer 20 , maximizing the portion of the ultrasound transducer 20 which is adjacent to the chamber 48 .
  • the chamber 48 can be filled with a medium which absorbs ultrasound energy or which prevents transmission of ultrasound energy.
  • Suitable gaseous media for filling the chamber 48 include, but are not limited to, helium, argon, air and nitrogen.
  • Suitable solid media for filling the chamber 48 include, but are not limited to, silicon and rubber.
  • the chamber 48 can also be evacuated. Suitable pressures for an evacuated chamber 48 include, but are not limited to, negative pressures to ⁇ 760 mm Hg.
  • the ultrasound assembly can include a second ultrasound transducer 20 A as illustrated in FIGS. 11 A- 11 H.
  • a second ultrasound transducer 20 A as illustrated in FIGS. 11 A- 11 H.
  • FIGS. 11 A- 11 C one ultrasound transducer encircles the other and in FIGS. 11 D- 11 H the ultrasound transducers are longitudinally adjacent to one another.
  • the ultrasound transducers 20 , 20 A can be in contact with one another as illustrated in FIGS. 11A, 11E and 11 H or separated from one another as illustrated in FIGS. 11 B- 11 D, 11 F and 11 G.
  • a single chamber 54 can be defined between the ultrasound transducers 20 , 20 A and the external surface 46 of the elongated body 14 as illustrated in FIGS.
  • 11C, 11F and 11 G or a different chamber can be defined between each of the ultrasound transducers 20 , 20 A and the external surface 46 .
  • the ultrasound transducers 20 , 20 A in FIGS. 11 A- 11 C are illustrated as having the same longitudinal length, the longitudinal length may be different.
  • the different temperature sensors can be positioned adjacent to different ultrasound transducers 20 , 20 A.
  • the temperature adjacent to different ultrasound transducers 20 , 20 A can be detected and the level of ultrasound energy produced by each ultrasound transducer adjusted in response to the detected temperature.
  • the transducers 20 , 20 A may be constructed from the same or different materials. Both transducers 20 , 20 A may be configured to radiate ultrasound energy in the same direction. Further, one transducer may be configured to transmit ultrasound energy in a radial direction and the other in a longitudinal direction in order to increase the angular spectrum over which ultrasound energy can be simultaneously transmitted. The ultrasound transducers can be configured to transmit ultrasound energy having the same or different characteristics. The transmission of ultrasound energy with different characteristics allows the same ultrasound assemblies to be used to perform different functions.
  • one ultrasound transducer can transmit a frequency which is appropriate for activating a light activated drug while the second ultrasound transducer transmits a frequency appropriate for enhancing penetration of a therapeutic agent into the treatment site.
  • the transducers can be operated independently or simultaneously. When the transducers are operated simultaneously, the ultrasound assembly produces a waveform which is more complex than a single ultrasound transducer. More complex waveforms can provide advantages such as more efficient rupture of microbubbles. It is also contemplated that the ultrasound assembly can include three or more ultrasound transducers arranged similar to the transducers illustrated in FIGS. 11 A- 11 H.
  • the ultrasound assembly 12 can be a separate module 58 as illustrated in FIGS. 12 A- 12 B.
  • the catheter 10 includes a first catheter component 60 a second catheter component 62 and an ultrasound assembly module 58 .
  • the first and second catheter components 60 , 62 include component ends 64 which are complementary to the ultrasound assembly module ends 66 .
  • the component ends 64 can be coupled with the ultrasound assembly module ends 66 as illustrated in FIG. 12B. Suitable means for coupling the component ends 64 and the ultrasound assembly module ends 66 include, but are not limited to, adhesive, mechanical and thermal methods.
  • the ultrasound assembly 12 can be integral with the catheter 10 as illustrated in FIG. 12C.
  • the outer coating 18 can have a diameter which is larger than the diameter of the elongated body 14 as illustrated in FIG. 10A or can be flush with the external surface 46 of the elongated body 14 as illustrated in FIGS. 12 A- 12 C.
  • the ultrasound assembly 12 can be electrically coupled to produce radial vibrations of the ultrasound transducer 20 as illustrated in FIGS. 13 A- 13 B.
  • a first line 68 is coupled with an outer surface 70 of the ultrasound transducer 20 while a second line 72 is coupled with an inner surface 74 of the ultrasound transducer 20 .
  • the first and second lines 68 , 72 can pass proximally through the utility lumen 16 as illustrated in FIG. 13A.
  • the first and second lines 68 , 72 can pass proximally through line lumens 76 within the catheter 10 as illustrated in FIG. 13B.
  • Suitable lines for the ultrasound transducer 20 include, but are not limited to, copper, gold and aluminum.
  • Suitable frequencies for the ultrasound energy delivered by the ultrasound transducer 20 include, but are not limited to, 20 KHz to 2 MHz.
  • the ultrasound assembly 12 can be electrically coupled to produce longitudinal vibrations of the ultrasound transducer 20 as illustrated in FIGS. 13 C- 13 D.
  • a first line 68 is coupled with a first end 78 of the ultrasound transducer 20 while a second line 72 is coupled with a second end 80 of the ultrasound transducer 20 .
  • the distal portion 82 of the second line 72 can pass through the outer coating 18 as illustrated in FIG. 13C.
  • the distal portion 82 of the second line 72 can pass through line lumens 76 in the catheter 10 as illustrated in FIG. 13D.
  • the first and second lines 68 , 72 can pass proximally through the utility lumen 16 .
  • the catheter 10 can include a plurality of ultrasound assemblies.
  • each ultrasound transducer 20 can each be individually powered.
  • the elongated body 14 includes N ultrasound transducers 20
  • the elongated body 14 must include 2N lines to individually power N ultrasound transducers 20 .
  • the individual ultrasound transducers 20 can also be electrically coupled in serial or in parallel as illustrated in FIGS. 14 A- 14 B. These arrangements permit maximum flexibility as they require only 2 lines.
  • Each of the ultrasound transducers 20 receive power simultaneously whether the ultrasound transducers 20 are in series or in parallel.
  • ultrasound transducers 20 When the ultrasound transducers 20 are in series, less current is required to produce the same power from each ultrasound transducer 20 than when the ultrasound transducers 20 are connected in parallel. The reduced current allows smaller lines to be used to provide power to the ultrasound transducers 20 and accordingly increases the flexibility of the elongated body 14 . When the ultrasound transducers 20 are connected in parallel, an ultrasound transducer 20 can break down and the remaining ultrasound transducers 20 will continue to operate.
  • a common line 84 can provide power to each ultrasound transducer 20 while each ultrasound transducer 20 has its own return line 86 .
  • a particular ultrasound transducer 20 can be individually activated by closing a switch 88 to complete a circuit between the common line 84 and the particular ultrasound transducer's 20 return line 86 .
  • the amount of power supplied to the ultrasound transducer 20 can be adjusted with the corresponding potentiometer 90 . Accordingly, an catheter 10 with N ultrasound transducers 20 requires only N+1 lines and still permits independent control of the ultrasound transducers 20 . This reduced number of lines increases the flexibility of the catheter 10 .
  • the individual return lines 86 can have diameters which are smaller than the common line 84 diameter.
  • the diameter of the individual return lines 86 can be the square root of N times smaller than the diameter of the common line 84 .
  • the ultrasound assembly 12 can include at least one temperature sensor 22 .
  • Suitable temperature sensors 22 include, but are not limited to, thermistors, thermocouples, resistance temperature detectors (RTD)s, and fiber optic temperature sensors 22 which use thermalchromic liquid crystals.
  • Suitable temperature sensor geometries include, but are not limited to, a point, patch, stripe and a band encircling the ultrasound transducer 20 .
  • the temperature sensors 22 can be electrically connected as illustrated in FIG. 15. Each temperature sensor 22 can be coupled with a common line 84 and then include its own return line 86 . Accordingly, N+1 lines can be used to independently sense the temperature at the temperature sensors 22 when N temperature sensors 22 are employed.
  • a suitable common line 84 can be constructed from Constantine and suitable return lines 86 can be constructed from copper.
  • the temperature at a particular temperature sensor 22 can be determined by closing a switch 88 to complete a circuit between the thermocouple's return line 86 and the common line 84 .
  • the temperature sensors 22 are thermocouples, the temperature can be calculated from the voltage in the circuit.
  • the individual return lines 86 can have diameters which are smaller than the common line 84 diameter.
  • Each temperature sensor 22 can also be independently electrically coupled. Employing N independently electrically coupled temperature sensors 22 requires 2N lines to pass the length of the catheter 10 .
  • the catheter 10 flexibility can also be improved by using fiber optic based temperature sensors 22 .
  • the flexibility can be improved because only N fiber optics need to be employed sense the temperature at N temperature sensors 22 .
  • the catheter 10 can be coupled with a feedback control system as illustrated in FIG. 16.
  • the temperature at each temperature sensor 22 is monitored and the output power of an energy source adjusted accordingly.
  • the physician can, if desired, override the closed or open loop system.
  • the feedback control system includes an energy source 92 , power circuits 94 and a power calculation device 96 coupled with each ultrasound transducer 20 .
  • a temperature measurement device 98 is coupled with the temperature sensors 22 on the catheter 10 .
  • a processing unit 100 is coupled with the power calculation device 96 , the power circuits 94 and a user interface and display 102 .
  • the temperature at each temperature sensor 22 is determined at the temperature measurement device 98 .
  • the processing unit 100 receives signals indicating the determined temperatures from the temperature measurement device 98 .
  • the determined temperatures can then be displayed to the user at the user interface and display 102 .
  • the processing unit 100 includes logic for generating a temperature control signal.
  • the temperature control signal is proportional to the difference between the measured temperature and a desired temperature.
  • the desired temperature can be determined by the user.
  • the user can set the predetermined temperature at the user interface and display 102 .
  • the temperature control signal is received by the power circuits 94 .
  • the power circuits 94 adjust the power level of the energy supplied to the ultrasound transducers 20 from the energy source 92 . For instance, when the temperature control signal is above a particular level, the power supplied to a particular ultrasound transducer 20 is reduced in proportion to the magnitude of the temperature control signal. Similarly, when the temperature control signal is below a particular level, the power supplied to a particular ultrasound transducer 20 is increased in proportion to the magnitude of the temperature control signal.
  • the processing unit 100 monitors the temperature sensors 22 and produces another temperature control signal which is received by the power circuits 94 .
  • the processing unit 100 can also include safety control logic.
  • the safety control logic detects when the temperature at a temperature sensor 22 has exceeded a safety threshold.
  • the processing unit 100 can then provide a temperature control signal which causes the power circuits 94 to stop the delivery of energy from the energy source 92 to the ultrasound transducers 20 .
  • the processing unit 100 also receives a power signal from the power calculation device 96 .
  • the power signal can be used to determine the power being received by each ultrasound transducer 20 .
  • the determined power can then be displayed to the user on the user interface and display 102 .
  • the feedback control system can maintain the tissue adjacent to the ultrasound transducers 20 within a desired temperature range for a selected period of time.
  • the ultrasound transducers 20 can be electrically connected so each ultrasound transducer 20 can generate an independent output. The output maintains a selected energy at each ultrasound transducer 20 for a selected length of time.
  • the processing unit 100 can be a digital or analog controller, or a computer with software. When the processing unit 100 is a computer it can include a CPU coupled through a system bus.
  • the user interface and display 102 can be a mouse, keyboard, a disk drive, or other non-volatile memory systems, a display monitor, and other peripherals, as are known in the art. Also coupled to the bus is a program memory and a data memory.
  • a profile of the power delivered to each ultrasound transducer 20 can be incorporated in the processing unit 100 and a preset amount of energy to be delivered may also be profiled. The power delivered to each ultrasound transducer 20 can then be adjusted according to the profiles.
  • Suitable light activated drugs include, but are not limited to, fluorescein, merocyanin.
  • preferred light activated drugs' include xanthene and its derivatives and the photoreactive pyrrole-derived macrocycles and their derivatives due to a reduced toxicity and an increased biological affinity.
  • Suitable photoreactive pyrrole-derived macrocycles include, but are not limited to, naturally occurring or synthetic porphyrins, naturally occurring or synthetic chlorins, naturally occurring or synthetic bacteriochlorins, synthetic isobateriochlorins, phthalocyanines, naphtalocyanines, and expanded pyrrole-based macrocyclic systems such as porphycenes, sapphyrins, and texaphyrins. Examples of suitable pyrrole-based macrocyclic classes are illustrated in FIGS. 17 A-N.
  • FIGS. 17 B- 2 illustrates a formula for the derivatives of texaphyrin: where M is H, CH 3 , a divalent metal cation selected from the group consisting of Ca(II), Mn(II), Co(II), Ni(II), Zn(II), Cd(II), Hg(II), Fe(II), Sm(II), and UO(II) or a trivalent metal cation selected from the group consisting of Mn(III), Co(III), Ni(III), Fe(III), Ho(III), Ce(III), Y(III), In(III), Pr(III), Nd(III), Sm(III), Eu(III), Gd(III), Tb(III), Dy(III), Er(III), Tm(III), Yb(III), Lu(III), La(III), and U(Mn(II), Mn(II), Co(II), Ni(II), Zn(II), Cd(II), Hg(II), Fe
  • Preferred metals include Lu(III), Dy(III), Eu(III), or Gd(III).
  • M may be H or CH 3 in a non-metalated form of texaphyrin.
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 and R 6 can independently be hydrogen, hydroxyl, alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxy, hydroxyalkoxy, saccharide, carboxyalkyl, carboxyamidealkyl, a site-directing molecule, or a linker to a site-directing molecule where at least one of R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 and R 6 is hydroxyl, hydroxyalkoxy, saccharide, alkoxy, carboxyalkyl, carboxyamidealkyl, hydroxyalkyl, a site-directing molecule or a couple to a site-directing molecule; and N is an integer less than or equal to 2.
  • a preferred paramagnetic metal complex is the Gd(III) complex of 4,5-diethyl-10,23-dimethyl-9,24-bis(3-hydroxypropyl)-16,17-bis[2-(2-methoxyethoxy)ethoxy]ethoxy-13,20,25,26,27-pentaazapentacyclo [20.2.1 3,6 .1 8,11 .0 14,19 ]heptacosa-1,3,5,7,9,11 (27),12,14(19),15,17,20,22(25),23-tridecaene (“GdT2BET”) and a preferred diamagnetic metal complex is the Lu(III) complex of 4,5-diethyl-10,23dimethyl-9,24-bis(3-hydroxypropyl)-16,17-bis[2-[2-(2-methoxyethoxy)ethoxy]ethoxy]-13,20,25,26,27-pentaazapentacyclo[20.2.1.1 3,6 .
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 and R 6 may also independently be amino, carboxy, carboxamide, ester, amide sulfonato, aminoalkyl, sulfonatoalkyl, amidealkyl, aryl, etheramide or equivalent formulae conferring the desired properties.
  • at least one of R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 and R 6 is a site-directing molecule or is a couple to a site-directing molecule.
  • R groups on the benzene ring portion of the molecule such as oligonucleotides, one skilled in the art would realize that derivatization at one position on the benzene potion is more preferred.
  • Hydroxyalkyl means alkyl groups having hydroxyl groups attached.
  • Alkoxy means alkyl groups attached to an oxygen.
  • Hydroxyalkoxy means alkyl groups having ether or ester linkages, hydroxyl groups, substituted hydroxyl groups, carboxyl groups, substituted carboxyl groups or the like.
  • Saccharide includes oxidized, reduced or substituted saccharide; hexoses such as D-glucose, D-mannose or D-galactose; pentoses such as D-ribose or D-arabinose; ketoses such as D-ribulose or D-fructose; disaccharides such as sucrose, lactose, or maltose; derivatives such as acetals, amines, and phosphorylated sugars; oligosacchrides, as well as open chain forms of various sugars, and the like.
  • amine-derivatized sugars are galactosamine, glucosamine, and sialic acid.
  • Carboxyamidealkyl means alkyl groups with secondary or tertiary amide linkages or the like.
  • Carboxyalkyl means alkyl groups having hydroxyl groups, carboxyl or amide substituted ethers, ester linkages, tertiary amide linkages removed from the ether or the like.
  • hydroxyalkoxy may be alkyl having independently hydroxy substituents and ether branches or may be C (n ⁇ x) H ((2n+1) ⁇ 2x) O x O y or OC (n ⁇ x) H ((2n+1) ⁇ 2x )O x O y where n is a positive integer from 1 to 10, x is zero or a positive integer less than or equal to n, and y is zero or a positive integer less than or equal to ((2n+1) ⁇ 2x).
  • the hydroxyalkoxy or saccharide may be C n H ((2n+1) ⁇ q) O y R a q , OC n H ((2n+1) ⁇ q)O y R a q or (CH 2 ) n CO 2 R a where n is a positive integer from 1 to 10, y is zero or a positive integer less than ((2n+1) ⁇ q), q is zero or a positive integer less than or equal to 2n+1, and R a is independently H, alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, saccharide, C (m ⁇ w) H ((2m+1) ⁇ 2w) O w O z , O 2 CC (m ⁇ w) H ((2m+1) ⁇ 2w) O w O z or N(R)OCC (m ⁇ w) H ((2m+1) ⁇ 2w) O w O z .
  • m is a positive integer from 1 to 10
  • w is zero or a positive integer less than or equal to m
  • z is zero or a positive integer less than or equal to ((2 m+1) ⁇ 2w)
  • R is H, alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, or C m H ((2m+1) ⁇ r) O Z R b r
  • m is a positive integer from 1 to 10
  • z is zero or a positive integer less than ((2m+1) ⁇ r)
  • r is zero or a positive integer less than or equal to 2m+1
  • Rb is independently H, alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, or saccharide.
  • Carboxyamidealkyl may be alkyl having secondary or tertiary amide linkages or (CH 2 ) n CONHR a , O(CH 2 ) n CONHR a , (CH 2 ) n CON(R a )2, or O(CH 2 ) n CON(R 1 )2 where n is a positive integer from 1 to 10, and R is independently H, alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, saccharide, C (m ⁇ w) H ((2n+1) ⁇ 2w) O w O z , O 2 CC (m ⁇ w) H ((2m+1) ⁇ 2w) O w O z , N(R)OCC (m ⁇ w) H ((2m+1) ⁇ 2w) O w O z , or a site-directing molecule.
  • m is a positive integer from 1 to 10
  • w is zero or a positive integer less than or equal to ((2M+1) ⁇ 2w)
  • R is H, alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, or C m H ((2m+1) ⁇ r) O z R b r .
  • m is a positive integer from 1 to 10
  • w is zero or a positive integer less than or equal to m
  • z is zero or a positive integer less than or equal to ((2M+1) r)
  • r is zero or a positive integer less than or equal to 2 m+1
  • Rb is independently H, alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, or saccharide.
  • R a is an oligonucleotide.
  • Carboxyalkyl may be alkyl having a carboxyl substituted ether, an amide substituted ether or a tertiary amide removed from an ether or C n H ((2n+1) ⁇ q) O y R c q or OC n H ((2n+1) ⁇ q) O y R c q where n is a positive integer from 1 to 10; y is zero or a positive integer less than ((2n+1) ⁇ q), q is zero or a positive integer less than or equal to 2n+1, and R c is (CH 2 ) n CO 2 R d , (CH 2 ) n COHR d , (CH 2 ) n CON(R d ) 2 or a site-directing molecule.
  • n is a positive integer from 1 to 10
  • Rd is independently H, alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, saccharide, C (m ⁇ w) H ((2m+1) ⁇ 2w) O w O z , O 2 CC (m-w) H ((2m+1) ⁇ 2w) O w O z or N(R)OCC (m ⁇ w) H ((2m+1) ⁇ 2w) O w O z .
  • m is a positive integer from 1 to 10
  • z is zero or a positive integer less than ((2m+1) ⁇ 2w)
  • R is H, alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, or C m H ((2m+1) ⁇ r) O z R b r .
  • m is a positive integer from 1 to 10
  • z is zero or a positive integer less than ((2m+1) ⁇ r)
  • r is zero or a positive integer less than or equal to 2M+1
  • R b is independently H, alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, or saccharide.
  • R c is an oligonucleotide.
  • Preferred pyrrole-based macrocycles include, but are not limited to the hydro-monobenzoporphyrins (the so-called “fi porphyrine” or “Gp” compounds) disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,920,143 and 4,883,790 which are incorporated herein by reference. Typically, these compounds are poorly water-soluble (less than 1 mg/ml) or water-insoluble. Gp is preferably selected from the group consisting of those compounds having one of the formulae A-F set forth in FIGS. 18 A-F, mixtures thereof, and the metalated and labeled forms thereof.
  • R 1 and R 2 can be independently selected from the group consisting of carbalkoxy (2-6C), alkyl (1-6C) sulfonyl, aryl (6-10C), sulfonyl, aryl (6-10C), cyano, and —CONR 5 CO— wherein R 5 is aryl (6-10C) or alkyl (1-6C).
  • each of R 1 and R 2 is carbalkoxy (2-6C).
  • R 3 can be independently carboxyalkyl (2-6C) or a salt, amide, ester or acylhydrazone thereof, or is alkyl (1-6C).
  • R 3 is —CH 2 CH 2 COOH or a salt, amide, ester or acylhydrazone thereof.
  • R 4 is —CHCH 2 ; —CHOR 4′ wherein R 4′ is H or alkyl (1-6C), optionally substituted with a hydrophilic substituent; —CHO; —COOR 4′ ; CH(OR 4′ )CH 3 ; CH(OR 4′ ) CH 2 OR 4′ ; —CH(SR 4′ )CH 3 ; —CHNR 4′ 2 )CH 3 ; —CH(CN)CH 3 ; —CH(COOR 4′ )CH 3 ; —CH(OOCR 4′ )CH 3 ; —CH(halo)CH 3 ; —CH(halo)CH 2 (halo); an organic group of ⁇ 12C resulting from direct or indirect derivatization of a vinyl group; or R 4 consists of 1-3 tetrapyrrole-type nuclei of the formula -L-P, wherein -L- is selected from the group consisting of
  • P is a second Gp, which is one of the formulae A-F (FIG. 18) but lacks R 4 , or another porphyrin group.
  • P is another porphyrin group
  • P preferably has the formula illustrated in FIG. 19: wherein each R is independently H or lower alkyl (1-4C); two of the four bonds shown as unoccupied on adjacent rings are joined to R 3 ; one of the remaining bonds shown as unoccupied is joined to R 4 ; and the other is joined to L; with the proviso that, if R 4 is —CHCH 2 , both R 3 groups cannot be carbalkoxyethyl.
  • the preparation and use of such compounds is disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,920,143 and 4,883,790, which are hereby incorporated by reference.
  • BPD's are light activated drugs that are designated as benzoporphyrin derivatives (“BPD's”).
  • BPD's are hydrolyzed forms, or partially hydrolyzed forms, of the rearranged products of formula A-C or formula A-D, where one or both of the protected carboxyl groups of R 3 are hydrolyzed.
  • Particularly preferred is the compound referred to as BPD-MA in FIGS. 20 A-D, which has two equally active regioisomers.
  • activating a light activated drug included in a microbubble can enhance rupture of the microbubble.
  • Preferred light activated drugs for including in a microbubble to enhance rupture of the microbubble include Hematporphyrin, Rose Bengal, Eosin Y, Erythrocin, Rhodamine B, and PHOTOFRIN.
  • the formulae for these preferred light activated drugs are illustrated in FIGS. 21 A-B where Rose Bengal, Eosin Y, Erythrocin and Rhodamine B are xanthene derivatives.
  • the light activated drug can be coupled with a site directing molecule to form a light activated drug conjugate.
  • Suitable site-directing molecules include, but are not limited to: polydeoxyribonucleotides, oligodeoxyribonucleotides, polyribonucleotide analogs, oligoribonucleotide analogs; polyamides including peptides having an affinity for a biological receptor and proteins such as antibodies; steroids and steroid derivatives; hormones such as estradiol or histamine; hormone mimics such as morphine and further macrocycles such as sapphyrins and rubyrins.
  • nucleotide refers to both naturally occurring and synthetic nucleotides, poly- and oligonucleotides and to analogs and derivatives thereof such as methylphosphonates, phosphotriesters, phosphorothioates, and phosphoramidates and the like. Deoxyribonucleotides and ribonucleotide analogs are contemplated as site-directing molecules.
  • the oligonucleotide may be derivatized at the bases, the sugars, the end of the chains, or at the phosphate groups of the backbone to promote in vivo stability. Modifications of the phosphate groups are preferred in one embodiment since phosphate linkages are sensitive to nuclease activity. Preferred derivatives are the methylphosphonates, phosphotriesters, phosphorothioates, and phosphoramidates. Additionally, the phosphate linkages may be completely substituted with non-phosphate linkages such as amide linkages. Appendages to the ends of the oligonucleotide chains also provide exonuclease resistance.
  • Sugar modifications may include alkyl groups attached to an oxygen of a ribose moiety in a ribonucleotide.
  • the alkyl group is preferably a methyl group and the methyl group is attached to the 2′ oxygen of the ribose.
  • Other alkyl groups may be ethyl or propyl.
  • a linker may be used to couple the light activated drug with the site directing molecule.
  • exemplary linkers include, but are not limited to, amides, amine, thioether, ether, or phosphate covalent bonds as described in the examples for attachment of oligonucleotides.
  • an oligonucleotide or other site-directing molecules is covalently bonded to a texaphyrin or other light activated drugs via a carbon-nitrogen, carbon-sulfur, or a carbon-oxygen bond.
  • the media can be an emulsion which includes a light activated drug.
  • the emulsions described below are suitable for delivery into a body since they avoid pharmaceutically undesirable organic solvents, solubilizers, oils or emulsifiers.
  • a wide range of light activated drug concentrations can be used in the emulsion. Suitable concentrations of light activated drug within the emulsion include, but are not limited to, approximately 0.01 to 1 gram/100 ml, preferably about 0.05 to about 0.5 gram/100 ml, and approximately 0.1 g/100 ml.
  • the emulsion includes a lipoid as a hydrophobic component dispersed in a hydrophilic phase.
  • the hydrophobic component of the emulsion comprises a pharmaceutically acceptable triglyceride, such as an oil or fat of a vegetable or animal nature, and preferably is selected from the group consisting of soybean oil, safflower oil, marine oil, black current seed oil, borage oil, palm kernel oil, cotton seed oil, corn oil, sunflower seed oil, olive oil or coconut oil. Physical mixtures of oils and/or interesterfied mixtures can be employed.
  • the preferred oils are medium chain length triglycerides having C 8 -C 10 chain length and more preferably saturated.
  • the preferred triglyceride is a distillate obtained from coconut oil.
  • the hydrophobic content of the emulsion is preferably approximately 5 to 50 g/100 ml, more preferably about 10 to about 30 g/100 ml and approximately 20 g/100 ml of the emulsion.
  • the emulsion can also contains a stabilizer such as phosphatides, soybean phospholipids, nonionic block copolymers of polyoxethylene and polyoxpropylene (e.g. poloxamers), synthetic or semi-synthetic phospholipids, and the like.
  • a stabilizer such as phosphatides, soybean phospholipids, nonionic block copolymers of polyoxethylene and polyoxpropylene (e.g. poloxamers), synthetic or semi-synthetic phospholipids, and the like.
  • the preferred stabilizer is purified egg yolk phospholipid.
  • the stabilizer is usually present in the composition in amounts of about 0.1 to about 10, and preferably about 0.3 to about 3 grams/100 ml, a typical example being about 1.5 grams/100 ml.
  • the emulsion can also include one or more bile acids salts as a costablizer.
  • the salts are pharmacologically acceptable salts of bile acids selected from the group of cholic acid, deoxycholic acid and gylcocholic acid, and preferably of cholic acid.
  • the salts are typically alkaline metal or alkaline earth metal salts and preferably sodium, potassium, calcium or magnesium salts, and most preferably, sodium salts. Mixtures of bile acid salts can be employed if desired.
  • the amount of bile acid salt employed is usually about 0.01 to about 1.0 and preferably about 0.05 to about 0.4 grams/100 ml, a typical example being about 0.2 grams/100 ml.
  • Suitable pH for the emulsion includes, but is not limited to approximately 7.5 to 9.5, and preferably approximately 8.5.
  • the pH can be adjusted to the desired value, if necessary, by adding a pharmaceutically acceptable base, such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, calcium hydroxide, magnesium hydroxide and ammonium hydroxide.
  • Water can be added to the emulsion to achieve the desired concentration of various components within the emulsion.
  • the emulsion can include auxiliary ingredients for regulating the osmotic pressure to make the emulsion isotonic with the blood.
  • Suitable auxiliary ingredients include, but are not limited to, auxiliary surfactants, isotonic agents, antioxidants, nutritive agents, trace elements and vitamins.
  • Suitable isotonic agents include, but are not limited to, glycerin, amino acids, such as alanine, histidine, glycine, and/or sugar alcohols, such as xylitol, sorbitol and/or mannitol.
  • Suitable concentrations for isotonic agents within the emulsion include, but are not limited to, approximately 0.2 to about 8.0 grams/100 ml and preferably about 0.4 to about 4 grams/100 ml and most preferably 1.5 to 2.5 gram/100 ml.
  • Antioxidants can be used to enhance the stability of the emulsion, a typical example being ⁇ -tocopherol. Suitable concentrations for the antioxidants include, but are not limited to approximately 0.005 to 0.5 grams/100 ml, approximately 0.02 to about 0.2 grams/100 ml and most preferably approximately 0.05 to 0.15 grams/100 ml.
  • the emulsions can also contain auxiliary solvents, such as an alcohol, such as ethyl alcohol or benzyl alcohol, with ethyl alcohol being preferred.
  • auxiliary solvents such as an alcohol, such as ethyl alcohol or benzyl alcohol, with ethyl alcohol being preferred.
  • alcohol such as ethyl alcohol or benzyl alcohol
  • ethyl alcohol is typically present in amounts of about 0.1 to about 4.0, and preferably about 0.2 to about 2 grams/100 ml, a typical example being about 1 gram/100 ml.
  • the ethanol is advantageous since it facilitates dissolution of poorly water-soluble light activated drugs and especially those that form crystals which may be very difficult to dissolve in the hydrophobic phase. Accordingly, the ethanol must be added directly to the hydrophobic phase during preparation to be effective. For maximum effectiveness, the ethanol should constitute about 5% to 15% by weight of the hydrophobic phase.
  • ethanol constitutes less than 5% by weight of the hydrophobic phase
  • dissolution of the light activated drug can become unacceptably slow.
  • the ethanol concentration exceeds 15%, large (>5 ⁇ m diameter) and poorly emulsified oil droplets can form in the emulsion.
  • the particles in the emulsion are preferably less than about 5.0 ⁇ m in diameter, more preferably less than 2.0 ⁇ m in diameter and most preferably less than 0.5 ⁇ m or below.
  • a typical emulsion is prepared using the following technique.
  • the triglyceride oil is heated to 50°-70° C. while sparging with nitrogen gas.
  • the required amounts of stabilizer (e.g. egg yolk phospholipids), bile acid salt, alcohol (e.g. ethanol), antioxidant (e.g. ⁇ -to-copherol) and light activated drug are added to the triglyceride while processing for about 5 to about 20 minutes with a high speed blender or overhead mixer to ensure complete dissolution or uniform suspension.
  • the required amounts of water and isotonic agent e.g. -glycerin
  • the aqueous phase is transferred into the prepared hydrophobic phase and high speed blending is continued for another 5 to 10 minutes to produce a uniform but coarse preemulsion (or premix).
  • This premix is then transferred to a conventional high pressure homogenizer (APV Gaulin) for emulsification at about 8,000-10,000 psi.
  • AAV Gaulin conventional high pressure homogenizer
  • the diameter of the dispersed oil droplets in the finished emulsion will be less than 5 ⁇ m, with a large proportion less than 1 ⁇ m.
  • the mean diameter of these oil droplets will be less than 1 ⁇ m, preferably from 0.2 to 0.5 ⁇ m.
  • the emulsion product is then filled into borosilicate (Type 1) glass vials which are stoppered, capped and terminally heat sterilized in a rotating steam autoclave at about 121° C.
  • emulsions can withstanding autoclaving as well as freezing at about 0° to ⁇ 20° C. Such can be stored for a relatively long time with minimal physical and chemical breakdown, i.e. at least 12-18 months at 4°-8° C.
  • the vehicle composition employed is chemically inert with respect to the incorporated pharmacologically active light activated drug.
  • the emulsions can exhibit very low toxicity following intravenous administration and exhibit no venous irritation and no pain on injection.
  • the emulsions exhibit minimal physical and chemical changes (e.e. formation of non-emulsified surface oil) during controlled shake-testing on a horizontal platform.
  • the oil-in-water emulsions promote desirable pharmacoldnetics and tissue distribution of the light activated drug in vivo.
  • the light activated drug can also be delivered to the body in a media which includes microbubbles.
  • Suitable substrates for the microbubble include, but are not limited to, biocompatible polymers, albumins, lipids, sugars or other substances.
  • U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,701,899 and 5,578,291 teaches a method for synthesizing microbubbles with a sugar and protein substrate and is incorporated herein by reference.
  • U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,665,383 and 5,665,382 teaches a method for synthesizing microbubbles with a polymeric substrate and is incorporated herein by reference.
  • 5,626,833 and 5,798,091 teach methods for synthesizing microbubbles with a surfactant substrate and are incorporated herein by reference.
  • a preferred microbubble has a lipid substrate.
  • U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,772,929 teaches methods for synthesizing microbubbles with a lipid substrate.
  • U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,776,429, 5,715,824 and 5,770,222 teach preferred methods for synthesizing microbubbles with a lipid substrate and a gas interior and are incorporated herein by reference.
  • Suitable microbubbles with a lipid substrate can be liposomes.
  • the liposomes can be unilamellar vesicles having a single membrane bilayer or multilamellar vesicles having multiple membrane bilayers, each bilayer being separated from the next by an aqueous layer.
  • a liposome bilayer is composed of two lipid monolayers having a hydrophobic “tail” region and a hydrophilic “head” region.
  • the formula of the membrane bilayer is such that the hydrophobic (nonpolar) “tails” of the lipid monolayers orient themselves towards the center of the bilayer, while the hydrophilic “heads” orient themselves toward the aqueous phase. Either unilamellar or multilamellar or other types of liposomes may be used.
  • a hydrophilic light activated drug can be entrapped in the aqueous phase of the liposome before the drug is delivered into the patient.
  • the light activated drug may associate with the lipid bilayer. Liposomes may be used to help “target” the light activated drug to an active site or to solubilize hydrophobic light activated drugs.
  • Light activated drugs are typically hydrophobic and form stable drug-lipid complexes.
  • light activated drugs have low solubility in water at physiological pH's, but are also insoluble in (1) pharmaceutically acceptable aqueous-organic co-solvents, (2) aqueous polymeric solutions and (3) surfactant/micellar solutions.
  • such light activated drugs can still be “solubilized” in a form suitable for delivery into a body by using a liposome composition.
  • a light activated drug BPD-MA See Formula A of FIG. 20
  • BPD-MA can be “solubilized” at a concentration of about 2.0 mg/ml in aqueous solution using an appropriate mixture of phospholipids to form encapsulating liposomes.
  • the light activated drug can be included in many different types of liposomes, the following description discloses particular liposome compositions and methods for making the liposomes which are known to be “fast breaking”.
  • fast breaking liposomes the light activated drug-liposome combination is stable in vitro but, when administered in vivo, the light activated drug is rapidly released into the bloodstream where it can associate with serum lipoproteins.
  • the localized delivery of liposomes combined with the fast breaking nature of the liposomes can result in localization of the light activated drug in the tissues near the catheter.
  • the fast breaking liposomes can prevent the liposomes from leaving the vicinity of the catheter intact and then concentrating in non-targeted tissues such as the liver. Delivery of ultrasound energy from the catheter can also serve to break apart the liposomes after they have been delivered from the catheter.
  • Liposomes are typically formed spontaneously by adding water to a dry lipid film.
  • Liposomes which include light activated drugs can include a mixture of the commonly encountered lipids dimyristoyl phosphatidyl choline (“DMPC”) and egg phosphatidyl glycerol (“EPG”).
  • DMPC dimyristoyl phosphatidyl choline
  • EPG egg phosphatidyl glycerol
  • phospholipids in addition to DMPC and EPG, may also be present.
  • additional phospholipids that may also be incorporated into the liposomes include phosphatidyl cholines (PCS), including mixtures of dipalmitoyl phosphatidyl choline (DPPC) and distearoyl phosphatidyl choline (DSPC).
  • PCS phosphatidyl cholines
  • DPPC dipalmitoyl phosphatidyl choline
  • DSPC distearoyl phosphatidyl choline
  • suitable phosphatidyl glycerols include dimyristoyl phosphatidyl glycerol (DMPG), DLPG and the like.
  • lipids include phosphatidyl ethanolamines (PEs), phosphatidic acids (PAs), phosphatidyl serines, and phosphatidyl inositols.
  • PEs phosphatidyl ethanolamines
  • PAs phosphatidic acids
  • serines phosphatidyl serines
  • phosphatidyl inositols phosphatidyl inositols
  • the molar ratio of the light activated drug to the DMPC/EPG phospholipid mixture can be as low as 1:7.0 or may contain a higher proportion of phospholipid, such as 1:7.5. Preferably, this molar ratio is 1:8 or more phospholipid, such as 1:10, 1:15, or 1:20. This molar ratio depends upon the exact light activated drug being used, but will assure the presence of a sufficient number of DMPC and EPG lipid molecules to form a stable complex with many light activated drugs. When the number of lipid molecules is not sufficient to form a stable complex, the lipophilic phase of the lipid bilayer becomes saturated with light activated drug molecules. Then, any slight change in the process conditions can force some of the previously encapsulated light activated drug to leak out of the vesicle, onto the surface of the lipid bilayer, or even out into the aqueous phase.
  • the concentration of light activated drug is high enough, it can actually precipitate out from the aqueous layer and promote aggregation of the liposomes.
  • the more unencapsulated light activated drug that is present the higher the degree of aggregation.
  • the more aggregation the larger the mean particle size will be, and the more difficult aseptic or sterile filtration will be.
  • small changes in the molar ratio can be important in achieving proper filterability of the liposome composition.
  • a molar ratio of 1.05:3:5 BPD-MA:EPG:DMPC may provide marginally acceptable filterability in small batches of up to 500 ml.
  • a higher molar ratio of phospholipid provides more assurance of reliable aseptic filterability.
  • the substantial potency losses that are common in scale-up batches, due at least in part to filterability problems, can thus be avoided.
  • cryoprotective agent known to be useful in the art of preparing freeze-dried formulations, such as di- or polysaccharides or other bulking agents such as lysine, may be used.
  • isotonic agents typically added to maintain isomolarity with body fluids may be used.
  • a di-saccharide or polysaccharide is used and functions both as a cryoprotective agent and as an isotonic agent.
  • the particular combination of the phospholipids, DMPC and EPG, and a disaccharide or polysaccharide form a liposomal composition having liposomes of a particularly narrow particle size distribution.
  • a disaccharide or polysaccharide provides instantaneous hydration and the large surface area for depositing a thin film of the drug-phospholipid complex. This thin film provides for faster hydration so that, when the liposome is initially formed by adding the aqueous phase, the liposomes formed are of a smaller and more uniform particle size. This provides significant advantages in terms of manufacturing ease.
  • a saccharide when present in the composition, it is added after dry lipid film formation, as a part of the aqueous solution used in hydration.
  • a saccharide is added to the dry lipid film during hydration.
  • Disaccharides or polysaccharides are preferred to monosaccharides for this purpose.
  • about 9-10% of a disaccharide can be used without generating an unacceptable osmotic pressure.
  • the higher amount of disaccharide provides for a larger surface area, which results in smaller particle sizes being formed during hydration of the lipid film.
  • the preferred liposomal composition comprises a disaccharide or polysaccharide, in addition to the light activated drug and the mixture of DMPC and EPG phospholipids.
  • the disaccharide or polysaccharide is preferably chosen from among the group consisting of lactose, trehalose, maltose, maltotriose, palatinose, lactulose or sucrose, with lactose or trehalose being preferred.
  • the liposomes comprise lactose or trehalose.
  • the disaccharide or polysaccharide is formulated in a preferred ratio of about 10-20 saccharide to 0.5-6.0 DMPC/EPG phospholipid mixture, respectively, even more preferably at a ratio from about 10 to 1.5-4.0.
  • a preferred but not limiting formulation is lactose or trehalose and a mixture of DMPC and EPG in a concentration ratio of about 10 to 0.94-1.88 to about 0.65-1.30, respectively.
  • the presence of the disaccharide or polysaccharide in the composition not only tends to yield liposomes having extremely small and narrow particle size ranges, but also provides a liposome composition in which light activated drugs, in a particular, may be stably incorporated in an efficient manner, i.e., with an encapsulation efficiency approaching 80-100%.
  • liposomes made with a saccharide typically exhibit improved physical and chemical stability, such that they can retain an incorporated light activated drug without leakage upon prolonged storage, either as a reconstituted liposomal or as a cryodesiccated powder.
  • antioxidants e.g., butylated hydroxytoluene, alphatocopherol and ascorbyl palmitate
  • pH buggering agents e.g., phosphates, glycine, and the like.
  • Liposomes containing a light activated drug may be prepared by combining the light activated drug and the DMPC and EPG phospholipids (and any other optional phospholipids or excipients, such as antioxidants) in the presence of an organic solvent.
  • Suitable organic solvents include any volatile organic solvent, such as diethyl ether, acetone, methylene chloride, chloroform, piperidine, piperidine-water mixtures, methanol, tert-butanol, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, and mixtures thereof.
  • the organic solvent is water-immiscible, such as methylene chloride, but water immiscibility is not required.
  • the solvent chosen should not only be able to dissolve all of the components of the lipid film, but should also not react with, or otherwise deleteriously affect, these components to any significant degree.
  • the organic solvent is then removed from the resulting solution to form a dry lipid film by any known laboratory technique that is not deleterious to the dry lipid film and the light activated drug.
  • the solvent is removed by placing the solution under a vacuum until the organic solvent is evaporated.
  • the solid residue is the dry lipid film.
  • the thickness of the lipid film is not critical, but usually varies from about 30 to about 45 mg/cm 2 , depending upon the amount of solid residual and the total area of the glass wall of the flask.
  • the film may be stored for an extended period of time, preferably not more than 4 to 21 days, prior to hydration. While the temperature during a lipid film storage period is also not an important factor, it is preferably below room temperature, most preferably in the range from about ⁇ 20 to about 4° C.
  • the dry lipid film is then dispersed in an aqueous solution, preferably containing a disaccharide or polysaccharide, and homogenized to form the desired particle size.
  • aqueous solutions used during the hydration step include sterile water; a calcium- and magnesium-free, phosphate-buffered (pH 7.2-7.4) sodium chloride solution; a 9.75% w/v lactose solution; a lactose-saline solution; 5% dextrose solution; or any other physiologically acceptable aqueous solution of one or more electrolytes.
  • the aqueous solution is sterile.
  • the volume of aqueous solution used during hydration can vary greatly, but should not be so great as about 98% nor so small as about 30-40%. A typical range of useful volumes would be from about 75% to about 95%, preferably about 85% to about 90%.
  • the therapeutically effective amount can vary widely, depending on the tissue to be treated and whether it is coupled to a target-specific ligand, such as an antibody or an immunologically active fragment. It should be noted that the various parameters used for selective photodynamic therapy are interrelated. Therefore, the therapeutically effective amount should also be adjusted with respect to other parameters, for example, fluence, irradiance, duration of the light used in photodynamic therapy, and the time interval between administration of the light activated drug and the therapeutic irradiation. Generally, all of these parameters are adjusted to produce significant damage to tissue deemed undesirable, such as neovascular or tumor tissue, without significant damage to the surrounding tissue, or to enable the observation of such undesirable tissue without significant damage to the surrounding tissue.
  • the therapeutically effective amount is such to produce a dose of light activated drug within a range of from about 0.1 to about 20 mg/kg, preferably from about 0.15-2.0 mg/kg and, even more preferably, from about 0.25 to about 0.75 mg/kg.
  • the w/v concentration of the light activated drug in the composition ranges from about 0.1 to about 8.0-10.0 g/L. Most preferably, the concentration is about 2.0 to 2.5 g/L.
  • the hydration step should take place at a temperature that does not exceed about 30° C., preferably below the glass transition temperature of the light activated drug-phospholipid complex formed, even more preferably at room temperature or lower, e.g., 15°-20° C.
  • the glass transition temperature of the light activated drug-lipid complex can be measure by using a differential scanning microcalorimeter.
  • the usual thickness of a lipid bilayer in the “solid” gel state decreases in the transition to the “liquid” crystalline state to about 37 A, thus shrinking the entrapped volume available for the light activated drugs to occupy.
  • the smaller “room” is not capable of containing as great a volume of light activated drug, which can then be squeezed out of the saturated lipid bilayer interstices. Any two or more liposomes exuding light activated drug may aggregate together, introducing further difficulties with respect to particle size reduction and ease of sterile filtration.
  • the use of higher hydration temperatures such as, for example, about 35° to 45° C., can also result in losses of light activated drug potency as the light activated drug either precipitates or aggregates during aseptic filtration.
  • the particle sizes of the coarse liposomes first formed in hydration are then homogenized to a more uniform size, reduced to a smaller size range, or both, to about 150 to 300 nm, preferably also at a temperature that does not exceed about 30° C., preferably below the glass transition temperature of the light activated drug-phospholipid complex formed in the hydration step, and even more preferably below room temperature of about 25° C.
  • Various high-speed agitation devices may be used during the homogenization step, such as a MicrofluidizerTM model 110F; a sonicator; a high-shear mixer; a homogenizer; or a standard laboratory shaker.
  • the homogenization temperature should be at room temperature or lower, e.g., 15°-20° C.
  • the relative filterability of the liposome composition may improve initially due to increased fluidity as expected, but then, unexpectedly, tends to decrease with continuing agitation due to increasing particle size.
  • a high pressure device such as MicrofluidizerTM is used for agitation.
  • a high pressure device such as MicrofluidizerTM is used for agitation.
  • microfluidization a great amount of heat is generated during the short-period of time during which the fluid passes through a high pressure interaction chamber.
  • two streams of fluid at a high speed collide with each other at a 90° angle.
  • the fluidity of the membrane increases, which initially makes particle size reduction easier, as expected.
  • filterability can increase by as much as four times with the initial few passes through a MicrofluidizerTM device.
  • the increase in the fluidity of the bilayer membrane promotes particle size reduction, which makes filtration of the final composition easier. In the initial several passes, this increased fluidity mechanism advantageously dominates the process.
  • the homogenization temperature is cooled down to and maintained at a temperature no greater than room temperature after the composition passes through the zone of maximum agitation, e.g., the interaction chamber of a MicrofluidizerTM device.
  • An appropriate cooling system can easily be provided for any standard agitation device in which homogenization is to take place, e.g., a MicrofluidizerTM, such as by circulating cold water into an appropriate cooling jacket around the mixing chamber or other zone of maximum turbulence. While the pressure used in such high pressure devices is not critical, pressures from about 10,000 to about 16,000 psi are not uncommon.
  • the compositions are preferably aseptically filtered through a filter having an extremely small pore size, i.e., 0.22 ⁇ m.
  • Filter pressures used during sterile filtration can vary widely, depending on the volume of the composition, the density, the temperature, the type of filter, the filter pore size, and the particle size of the liposomes.
  • a typical set of filtration conditions would be as follows: filtration pressure of 15-25 psi; filtration load of 0.8 to 1.5 ml/cm 2 ; and filtration temperature of about 25° C.
  • the liposome composition may be freeze-dried for long-term storage if desired.
  • BPD-MA a preferred light activated drug
  • the composition may be packed in vials for subsequent reconstitution with a suitable aqueous solution, such as sterile water or sterile water containing a saccharide and/or other suitable excipients, prior to administration, for example, by injection.
  • liposomes that are to be freeze-dried are formed upon the addition of an aqueous vehicle contain a disaccharide or polysaccharide during hydration.
  • the composition is then collected, placed into vials, freeze-dried, and stored, ideally under refrigeration.
  • the freeze-dried composition can then be reconstituted by simply adding water for injection just prior to administration.
  • the liposomal composition provides liposomes of a sufficiently small and narrow particle size that the aseptic filtration of the composition through a 0.22 ⁇ m hydrophilic filter can be accomplished efficiently and with large volumes of 500 ml to a liter or more without significant clogging of the filter.
  • a particularly preferred particle size range is below about 300 run, more preferably below from about 250 nm. Most preferably, the particle size is below about 220 nm.
  • the concentration of the light activated drugs in the liposome depends upon the nature of the light activated drug used.
  • the light activated drug is generally incorporated in the liposomes at a concentration of about 0.10% up to 0.5% w/v. If freeze-dried and reconstituted, this would typically yield a reconstituted solution of up to about 5.0 mg/ml light activated drug.
  • the light activated drugs incorporated into liposomes may be used along with, or may be labeled with, a radioisotope or other detecting means. If this is the case, the detection means depends on the nature of the label. Scintigraphic labels such as technetium or indium can be detected using ex vivo scanners. Specific fluorescent labels can also be used but, like detection based on fluorescence of the light activated drugs themselves, these labels can require prior irradiation.
  • Example 1 describes the synthesis of a preferred texaphyrin derivative.
  • Examples 2-4 describe different light activated drugs conjugated with oligonucleotides as site directing molecules.
  • Examples 5 and 6 describes a synthesis of an emulsion including a light activated drug.
  • Example 7 describes preparation of microbubbles which include a light activated drug.
  • Lutetium(III) acetate hydrate can be purchased from Strem Chemicals, Inc. (Newburyport, Mass.), gadolinium(III) acetate tetrahydrate can be purchased from Aesar/Johnson Matthey (Ward Hill, Mass.) and LZY-54 zeolite can be purchased from UOP (Des Plaines, III.). Acetone, glacial acetic acid, methanol, ethanol, isopropyl alcohol, and n-heptanes can be purchased from J. T. Baker (Phillipsburg, N.J.). Triethylamine and Amberlite 904 anion exchange resin can be purchased from Aldrich (Milwaukee, Wisc.). All chemicals should be ACS grade and used without further purification.
  • FIGS. 22 A-I illustrate the synthesis of the gadolinium (III) complex of 4,5-diethyl-10,23-dimethyl-9,24-bis(3-hydroxypropyl)-16,17-bis[2-[2-(2-methoxyethoxy) ethoxy]ethoxy]-pentaazapentacyclo [20.2.1.1 3,6 .I 8, 11 .0 14,19 ]heptacosa-1,3,5,7,9,11(27),12,14,16,18,20,22(25),23-tridecaene which is illustrated as Formula I of FIG. 22.
  • Forma E The critical intermediate 1,2-bis[2-[2-(2-methoxyethoxy)ethoxy)ethoxy]-4,5-dinitrobenzene (Formula E) can be prepared according to a three-step synthetic process outlined in FIGS. 22 A-I. (Note: References to “Formula A,” “Formula B,” etc. relate to FIGS. 22A, 22B, etc.)
  • Fuming nitric acid (260 mL) is added dropwise over 30 min while the temperature of the solution is held below 30° C. After the addition is complete, the red colored solution is allowed to stir at room temperature until the reaction is complete (ca. 5 h, TLC: 95/5; CH 2 Cl 2 /MeOH) and then poured into well stirred ice water (1500 mL). Methylene chloride (400 mL) is added, the two-phase mixture transferred to a 2 L separatory funnel and the organic layer removed.
  • the aqueous layer is extracted with CH2Cl2 (2 ⁇ 150 mL) and the combined organic extracts washed with 10% NaOH (2 ⁇ 250 mL) and brine (250 mL), dried (MgSO 4 ), and concentrated under reduced pressure.
  • the resulting orange oil is dissolved in acetone (100 mL), and the solution layered with n-hexanes (500 mL), and stored in the freezer.
  • the resulting precipitate is collected by filtration yield 101.69 g (80%) of Formula E as a yellow solid.
  • Formula H is recrystallized from isopropyl alcohol/n-heptane to afford 50 g (85%) of a scarlet red solid.
  • reaction mixture is carefully monitored by UV/visible spectroscopy (i.e., a spectrum is taken every 0.5-1 h, ⁇ 1 drop diluted in 4-5 mL MeOH).
  • UV/visible spectroscopy i.e., a spectrum is taken every 0.5-1 h, ⁇ 1 drop diluted in 4-5 mL MeOH.
  • the dark green reaction is cooled to room temperature, filtered through Celite into a 2 L round bottom flask, and the solvent removed under reduced pressure.
  • the dark green solid is suspended in acetone (1 L) and the resulting slurry is stirred for 1 h at room temperature.
  • the suspension is filtered to remove the red/brown impurities (incomplete oxidation products), the solids rinsed with acetone (200 mL), and air dried.
  • the crude complex 35 g is dissolved in MeOH (600 mL), stirred vigorously for 15 min, filtered through Celite, and transferred to a 2 L Erlenmeyer flask. An additional 300 mL of MeOH and 90 mL water are added to the flask, along with acetic acid washed LZY-54 zeolite (150 g). The suspension is agitated with an overhead mechanical stirrer for approximately 3-4 h. The zeolite extraction is deemed complete with the absence of free Gd(III).
  • the zeolite is removed through a Whatman #3 filter paper and the collected solids rinsed with MeOH (200 mL).
  • the dark green filtrate is loaded onto a column of Amberlite IRA-904 anion exchange resin (30 cm length ⁇ 2.5 cm diameter) and eluted through the resin (ca. 10 mL/min flow rate) into a 2 L round bottom flask with 300 mL 1-butanol.
  • the resin is rinsed with an additional 100 mL of MeOH and the combined eluent evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure.
  • the dark green solid is suspended in acetone (600 mL, stirred for 30 min at room temperature, and then filtered to wash away the red/brown impurities (incomplete oxidation products and excess triethylamine).
  • the crude complex is dissolved into MeOH (300 mL, stirred for ⁇ 30 min, and then filtered through celite into a 1 L Erlenmeyer flask.
  • An additional 50 mL of MeOH and 50 mL of water are added to the flask along with acetic acid washed LZY-54 zeolite (40 g). The resulting mixture is agitated or shaken for 3 h, then filtered to remove the zeolite.
  • the zeolite cake is rinsed with MeOH (100 mL and the rinse solution added to the filtrate.
  • the filtrate is first concentrated to 150 mL and then loaded onto a column (30 cm length ⁇ 2.5 cm diameter) of pretreated Amberlite IRA-904 anion exchange resin (resin in the acetate form).
  • the eluent containing the bisacetate lutetium(III) texaphyrin complex is collected concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure, and recrystallized from anhydrous methanol/t-butylmethyl ether to afford 11.7 g (63%) of a shiny green solid.
  • FIGS. 23 A-H illustrate the synthesis of a light activated drug conjugate.
  • the light activated drug is a texaphyrin coupled with an oligonucleotide which is complementary to a DNA site.
  • the light activated drug conjugate can bind the complementary DNA site and will cleave the site upon activation by ultrasound.
  • References to “Formula A,” “Formula B,” etc. relate to FIGS. 23A, 23B, etc.
  • TLC: Rf 0.69, 20% methanol/CHCL 3 (streaks, turns green on plate with I 2 ).
  • the compounds are dissolved in dimethylformamide (anhydrous, 500 ⁇ L) and dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (10 mg, 48 ⁇ mol) is added.
  • the resulting solution is stirred under argon with protection from light for 8 h, whereupon a 110 ⁇ L aliquot is added to a solution of oligodeoxynucleotide (Formula G) (87 ⁇ mol) in a volume of 350 ⁇ L of 0.4M sodium bicarbonate buffer in a 1.6 mL Eppendorf tube. After vortexing briefly, the solution is allowed to stand for 23 h with light protection.
  • the suspension is filtered through 0.45 ⁇ m nylon microfilterfuge tubes, and the Eppendorf tube is washed with 250 ⁇ L sterile water.
  • the combined filtrates are divided into two Eppendorf tubes, and glycogen (20 mg/mL, 2 ⁇ L) and sodium acetate (3M, pH 5.4 30 ⁇ L) are added to each tube.
  • glycogen (20 mg/mL, 2 ⁇ L) and sodium acetate (3M, pH 5.4 30 ⁇ L) are added to each tube.
  • ethanol absolute, 1 mL
  • Ethanol is decanted following centrifugation, and the DNA is washed with an additional 1 mL aliquot of ethanol and allowed to air dry.
  • the pellet is dissolved in 50% formamide gel loading buffer (20 ⁇ L), denatured at 90° C. for ca.
  • the suspension is filtered through nylon filters (0.45 ⁇ m) and desalted using a Sep-pakTM reverse phase cartridge.
  • the conjugate is eluted from the cartridge using 40% acetonitrile, lyophilized overnight, and dissolved in 1 mM HEPES buffer, pH 7.0 (500 ⁇ L). The solution concentration is determined using UV/vis spectroscopy.
  • Amides, ethers, and thioethers are representative of linkages which may be used for coupling site-directing molecules such as oligonucleotides to light activated drugs such as texaphyrin metal complexes as illustrated in FIGS. 24 A-F.
  • site-directing molecules such as oligonucleotides to light activated drugs such as texaphyrin metal complexes as illustrated in FIGS. 24 A-F.
  • Oligonucleotides or other site-directing molecules functionalized with amines at the 5′-end, the 3′-end, or internally at sugar or base residues are modified post-synthetically with an activated carboxylic ester derivative of the texaphyrin complex.
  • a bromide derivatized texaphyrin (for example, Formula C of FIG. 24) will react with an hydroxyl group of an oligonucleotide to form and ether linkage between the texaphyrin linker and the oligonucleotide.
  • oligonucleotide analogues containing one or more thiophosphate or thiol groups are selectively alkylated at the sulfur atom(s) with an alkyl halide derivative of the texaphyrin complex.
  • Oligodeoxynucleotide-complex conjugates are designed so as to provide optimal catalytic interaction between the targeted DNA phosphodiester backbone and the texaphyrino.
  • Oligonucleotides are used to bind selectively compounds which include the complementary nucleotide or oligo- or polynucleotides containing substantially complementary sequences.
  • a substantially complementary sequence is one in which the nucleotides generally base pair with the complementary nucleotide and in which there are very few base pair mismatches.
  • the oligonucleotide may be large enough to bind probably at least 9 nucleotides of complementary nucleic acid.
  • oligomers up to ca. 100 residues in length are prepared on a commercial synthesizer, eg., Applied Biosystems Inc. (ABI) model 392, that uses phosphoramidite chemistry. DNA is synthesized from the 3′ to the 5′ direction through the sequential addition of highly reactive phosphorous(I) reagents called phosphoramidites. The initial 3′ residue is covalently attached to a controlled porosity silica solid support, which greatly facilitates manipulation of the polymer.
  • ABS Applied Biosystems Inc.
  • the phosphorus(III) is oxidized to the more stable phosphorus(V) state by a short treatment with iodine solution. Unreacted residues are capped with acetic anhydride, the 5′-protective group is removed with weak acid, and the cycle may be repeated to add a further residue until the desired DNA polymer is synthesized. The full length polymer is released from the solid support, with concomitant removal of remaining protective groups, by exposure to base.
  • a common protocol uses saturated ethanolic ammonia.
  • the phosphonate based synthesis is conducted by the reaction of a suitably protected nucleotide containing a phosphonate moiety at a position to be coupled with a solid phase-derivatized nucleotide chain having a free hydroxyl phosphonate ester linkage, which is stable to acid.
  • the oxidation to the phosphate or thiophosphate can be conducted at any point during synthesis of the oligonucleotide or after synthesis of the oligonucleotide is complete.
  • the phosphonates can also be converted to phosphoramidate derivatives by reaction with a primary or secondary amine in the presence of carbon tetrachloride.
  • a protected phosphodiester nucleotide is condensed with the free hydroxyl of a growing nucleotide chain derivatized to a solid support in the presence of coupling agent.
  • the reaction yields a protected phosphate linkage which may be treated with an oximate solution to form unprotected oligonucleotide.
  • oligonucleotides may also be synthesized using solution phase methods such as diester synthesis. The methods are workable, but in general, less efficient for oligonucleotides of any substantial length.
  • Preferred oligonucleotides resistant to in vivo hydrolysis may contain a phosphorothioate substitution at each base ( J. Org. Chem. 55:4693-469, (1990) and Agrawal, (1990)). Oligodeoxynucleotides or their phosphorothioate analogues may be synthesized using an Applied Biosystem 380B DNA synthesizer (Applied Biosystems, Inc., Foster City, Calif.).
  • the present example provides for the synthesis of a light activated drug conjugate.
  • the light activated drug conjugate includes a oligonucleotide acting as a site directing molecule coupled with the tripyrrane portion of a texaphyrin as illustrated in FIGS. 25 A-J. (Note: References to “Formula A,” “Formula B,” etc. relate to FIGS. 25A, 25B, etc.)
  • reaction suspension is filtered over celite.
  • the solvent of the filtrate is removed under reduced pressure to obtain a foam which is dried under high vacuum overnight (10.94 g, 21.99 mmol, 87.0% pure.)
  • Triethylorthoformate (32.5 mL) is dripped into the flask from the addition funnel over a 20 minute period keeping the flask contents below ⁇ 25° C. by means of a dry ice/ethylene glycol bath.
  • the reaction solution is stirred for one hour at ⁇ 25° C. and then a 0° C. bath is set up.
  • Deionized water (32.5 mL) is dripped into the reaction flask from the addition funnel keeping the flask contents below 110° C.
  • the resulting two phase mixture is stirred at room temperature for 75 minutes and then added 1-butanol (200 mL.) The solvents are removed under reduced pressure.
  • the resulting dark oil is dried under high vacuum overnight to obtain black solids (11.64 g.)
  • Forma G crude methylester diformyl tripyrrane
  • methyl alcohol 900 mL
  • deionized water 60 mL
  • lithium hydroxide monohydrate 4.7 g.
  • the monoacid tripyrrane (Formula H) is condensed with a derivatized ortho-phenylene diamine to form a nonaromatic precursor which is then oxidized to an aromatic metal complex, for example, Formula I.
  • An oligonucleotide amine may be reacted with the carboxylic acid derivatized texaphyrin Formula I to form the conjugate Formula J having the site-directing molecule on the T (tripyrrane) portion of the molecule rather than the B (benzene) portion.
  • MCT oil medium chain length oil
  • SnEt 2 medium chain length oil
  • certain emulsions also included additional excipients in the following concentrations: ethanol at mg/gm oil; egg phospholipids at 75 mg/gm oil; and sodium cholate at 10 mg/gm oil. After incubating for 30 minutes at 55° C., the tubes stand overnight at room temperature (19°-22° C.).
  • the tubes are centrifuged to remove bulk precipitates, and supernatants are filtered through 0.45 ⁇ m nylon membrane to remove any undissolved drug. Aliquots of filtrate are then diluted in chloroform:isopropyl alcohol (1:1) for spectrophotometric determination of drug concentration (absorbance at 662 nm). Reference standards are prepared with known concentrations of SnEt 2 in the same solvent.
  • the concentration of SnEt 2 in each of the emulsions is illustrated in Table 2. As illustrated, the concentration of SnEt 2 in the emulsion can be more than ten times the concentration in MCT oil alone. TABLE 2 Drug Solubility in Oil SnEt 2 SnEt 2 Excipient Combination Concentration Concentration Added to MCT Oil mg/gm oil Normalized MCT oil alone 0.38 1.00 + ethanol 0.28 0.74 + egg phospholipids (EYP) 0.89 2.34 + Na cholate 1.17 3.08 + ethanol + EYP 1.37 3.61 + EYP + Na cholate 1.77 4.66 + ethanol + Na cholate 2.20 5.79 + ethanol + EYP + Na cholate 4.92 12.95
  • This example illustrates relative efficiencies of several bile salts.
  • Mixtures of MCT oil, egg phospholipids, ethanol, and SnEt 2 are incubated with different bile salts, all at 4.6 mM, under the same conditions described above.
  • sodium cholate is the most efficient solubilizer.
  • Cholic acid lacks solubilizing action in the oil.
  • BPD-MA See FIG. 17
  • a 100-ml batch of BPD-MA liposomes is prepared at room temperature (about 20° C.) using the following general procedure.
  • BPDMA, butylated hydroxytoluene (“BHT”), ascorbyl palmirate, and the phospholipids DMPC and EPG are dissolved in methylene chloride.
  • the molar ratio of light activated drug: EPG:DMPC is 1.0:3.7 and has the compositions illustrated in Table 4.
  • TABLE 4 Light activated drug 0.21 g EPG 0.68 g DMPC 1.38 g BHT 0.0002 g Ascorbic acid 6- 0.002 g palmitate Lactose NF 10 g crystalline injectable Water for injection 100 ml
  • the total lipid concentration (% w/v) is about 2.06.
  • the resulting solution is filtered through a 0.22 ⁇ m filter and then dried under vacuum using a rotary evaporator. Drying is continued until the amount of methylene chloride in the solid residue is no longer detectable by gas chromatography.
  • a 10% lactose/water-for-injection solution is then prepared and filtered through a 0.22 ⁇ m filter. Instead of being warmed to a temperature of about 35° C., the lactose/water solution is allowed to remain at room temperature (about 25° C.) for addition to the flask containing the solid residue of the light activated drug/phospholipid. The solid residue is dispersed in the 10% lactose/water solution at room temperature, stirred for about one hour, and passed through a MicrofluidizerTM homogenizer three to four times with the outlet temperature controlled to about 200°-250° C. The solution is then filtered through a 0.22 ⁇ m Durapore, hydrophilic filter.
  • the filterability of the composition in g/cm 2 is typically greater than about 10. Moreover, the yield is about 100% by HPLC analysis, with light activated drug potency typically being maintained even after sterile filtration. Average particle sizes vary from about 150 to about 300 nm (+50 nm).
  • Example 3 describes the delivery of a light activated drug to an atheroma.
  • An emulsion is prepared having about 0.6 g SnEt 2 /ml of emulsion and about 20 g of MCT oil based hydrophobic phase/ml of emulsion.
  • the catheter illustrated in FIG. 7C is positioned in a vessel of the cardiovascular system using over the guidewire techniques. The catheter is positioned such that the media delivery port is adjacent to the atheroma using radiopaque markers on the catheter and the balloon is expanded into contact with the vessel wall.
  • the emulsion is delivered via the third utility lumen 16 B of the catheter 10 .
  • the ultrasound energy is delivered at about 0.3 W/cm 2 at a frequency of approximately 1.3 MHz for about ten minutes. After the delivery of ultrasound energy has concluded, the catheter is withdrawn from the vasculature of the tumor.
  • the following Example describes the delivery of a light activated drug to a tumor.
  • An emulsion is prepared having approximately 0.8 g SnEt 2 /ml of emulsion and approximately 30 g of MCT oil based hydrophobic phase/ml of emulsion.
  • the catheter 10 illustrated in FIG. 3A is positioned in the vasculature of a tumor using over the guidewire techniques.
  • the catheter is positioned such that the media delivery port is within the tumor using radiopaque markers included on the catheter.
  • the prepared emulsion is delivered into the vasculature of the tumor via the utility lumen 16 A.
  • the ultrasound energy is delivered at about 0.3 W/cm 2 at a frequency of approximately 1.3 MHz for about fifteen minutes.
  • the catheter is withdrawn from the vascular system of the patient.
  • Example 3 describes the delivery of a light activated drug to a potential restenosis site.
  • An emulsion is prepared having approximately 0.6 g SnEt 2 /ml of emulsion and approximately 30 g of MCT oil based hydrophobic phase/ml of emulsion.
  • the catheter illustrated in FIG. 7C is positioned in the vasculature of a patient using over the guidewire techniques. The catheter is positioned such that the media delivery port is adjacent to a portion of the vessel which was previously treated with balloon angioplasty and the balloon is expanded into contact with the vessel wall.
  • the prepared emulsion is delivered into the vasculature of the patient via the third utility lumen 16 B.
  • Ultrasound energy is delivered from the ultrasound assembly to the potential restenosis site at about 0.3 W/cm 2 at a frequency of approximately 1.3 MHz for about ten minutes. After the delivery of ultrasound energy has concluded, the catheter is withdrawn from the vascular system of the patient.
  • Liposomes are prepared including BPD-MA (See FIG. 17) as the light activated drug and DMPC and EPG as the phospholipids.
  • BPD-MA See FIG. 17
  • EPG EPG
  • the molar ratio of BPDMA:EPG:DMPC is about 1:3:7.
  • the catheter illustrated in FIG. 7C is positioned in a vessel of the cardiovascular system using over the guidewire techniques. The catheter is positioned such that the media delivery port is adjacent to the atheroma using radiopaque markers included on the catheter and the balloon is expanded into contact with the vessel.
  • Ultrasound energy is delivered at about 0.3 W/cm 2 at a frequency of approximately 1.3 MHz for about 20 minutes in order to rupture the liposomes and cause tissue death within the atheroma. After the delivery of ultrasound energy has concluded, the catheter is withdrawn from the vascular system of the patient.
  • the following Example describes the delivery of a light activated drug to a tumor.
  • Liposomes are prepared including BPD-MA (See FIG. 17) as the light activated drug and DMPC and EPG as the phospholipids.
  • the molar ratio of BPD-MA:EPG:DMPC is about 1:3:7.
  • the catheter illustrated in FIG. 8 is positioned in the vasculature of a tumor using over the guidewire techniques.
  • the catheter is positioned such that the media delivery port is within the tumor using radiopaque markers included on the catheter.
  • Ultrasound energy is delivered at about 0.3 W/cm 2 at a frequency of approximately 1.3 MHz for about 20 minutes in order to rupture the liposomes and cause tissue death within the atheroma. After the delivery of ultrasound energy is concluded, the catheter is withdrawn from the vasculature of the tumor.
  • Liposomes are prepared including BPD-MA (See FIG. 17) as the light activated drug and DMPC and EPG as the phospholipids.
  • BPD-MA See FIG. 17
  • EPG EPG
  • the molar ratio of BPD-MA:EPG:DMPC is approximately 1:3:7.
  • the catheter illustrated in FIG. 7C is positioned in the vasculature of a patient using over the guidewire techniques. The catheter is positioned such that the media delivery port is adjacent to a portion of the vasculature which was previously treated with balloon angioplasty and the balloon is inflated into contact with the vessel wall.
  • Ultrasound energy is delivered at about 0.3 W/cm 2 at a frequency of approximately 1.3 MHz for about 15 minutes in order to rupture the liposomes and cause tissue death within the atheroma. After the delivery of ultrasound energy is concluded, the catheter is withdrawn from the vasculature of the patient.
  • the following Example describes the delivery of a light activated drug to an atheroma.
  • Liposomes are prepared including BPD-MA (See FIG. 17) as the light activated drug and DMPC and EPG as the phospholipids.
  • the molar ratio of BPD-MA:EPG:DMPC is about 1:3:7.
  • the phospholipids are systemically delivered.
  • the catheter illustrated in FIG. 7C is positioned in the vasculature of a patient using over the guidewire techniques. The catheter is positioned such that the media delivery port is adjacent to the atheroma and the balloon is inflated into contact with the vessel wall.
  • Ultrasound energy is delivered at about 0.3 W/cm at a frequency of approximately 1.3 MHz for about 15 minutes. After the delivery of ultrasound energy is concluded, the catheter is withdrawn from the vasculature of the patient.
  • Example 3 describes the delivery of a light activated drug to a tumor.
  • Microbubbles are prepared including cisplatin and photofrin according to the methods disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,770,222.
  • the microbubbles are systemically administered.
  • the catheter illustrated in FIG. 1A is positioned within the vasculature of a tumor.
  • Ultrasound energy is delivered at about 0.3 W/cm 2 at a frequency of approximately 1.3 MHz for about 15 minutes. After the delivery of ultrasound energy is concluded, the catheter is withdrawn from the vasculature of the patient.
  • Example 3 describes the delivery of a light activated drug to a tumor.
  • Microbubbles are prepared including cisplatin and photofrin according to the methods disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,770,222.
  • the catheter illustrated in FIG. 3A is positioned within the vasculature of a tumor.
  • the microbubbles are delivered to the tumor via the second utility lumen 16 A of the catheter.
  • Ultrasound energy is delivered at about 0.3 W/cm 2 at a frequency of approximately 1.3 MHz for about 15 minutes. After the delivery of ultrasound energy is concluded, the catheter is withdrawn from the vasculature of the patient.
  • Example 3 describes the delivery of a light activated drug to a thrombosis.
  • Microbubbles are prepared including heparin, photofrin and an albumin substrate.
  • the microbubbles are systemically administered.
  • the catheter illustrated in FIG. 1A is positioned adjacent to the thrombosis.
  • Ultrasound energy is delivered at about 0.2 W/cm 2 at a frequency of approximately 1.3 MHz for about 20 minutes. After the delivery of ultrasound energy is concluded, the catheter is withdrawn from the vasculature of the patient.

Abstract

A kit and method for causing tissue death within a tissue site is disclosed. The kit includes a media with a light activated drug activatable upon exposure to a particular level of ultrasound energy. The kit also includes a catheter with a lumen coupled with a media delivery port through which the light activated drug can be locally delivered to the tissue site. The ultrasound transducer is configured to transmit the level of ultrasound energy which activates the light activated drug with sufficient power that the ultrasound energy can penetrate the tissue site.

Description

    RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 10/305,865, filed Nov. 26, 2002, which is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 09/620,701, filed Jul. 20, 2000, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,527,759, which is a divisional of U.S. application Ser. No. 09/158,316, filed Sep. 21, 1998, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,176,842, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. application Ser. No. 09/129,980, filed Aug. 5, 1998, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,210,356 and U.S. application Ser. No. 08/972,846, filed Nov. 18, 1997, now abandoned, which is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 08/611,105, filed Mar. 5, 1996, now abandoned. This application also claims priority to Japanese application number 9-255814, filed Sep. 19, 1997 and Japanese application number 7-048710, filed Mar. 8, 1995. Each of the above applications is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.[0001]
  • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • 1. Field of the Invention [0002]
  • The present invention relates to a method and catheter for treating biological tissues with light activated drugs, and more particularly, to a method and catheter for treating biological tissues by delivering a light activated drug to a biological tissue and exposing the light activated drug to ultrasound energy. [0003]
  • 2. Description of the Related Art [0004]
  • It is frequently desirable to kill targeted biological tissues such as tumors and atheroma. One technique for causing targeted tissue death is called photodynamic therapy which requires the use of light activated drugs. Light activated drugs are inactive until exposed to light of particular wavelengths, however, upon exposure to light of the appropriate wavelength, light activated drugs can exhibit a cytotoxic effect on the tissues where they are localized. It has been postulated that the cytotoxic effect is a result of the formation of singlet oxygen on exposure to light. [0005]
  • Photodynamic therapy begins with the systemic administration of a selected light activated drug to a patient. At first, the drug disperses throughout the body and is taken up by most tissues within the body. After a period of time usually between 3 and 48 hours, the drug clears from most normal tissue and is retained to a greater degree in lipid rich regions such as the liver, kidney, tumor and atheroma. A light source, such as a fiber optic, is then directed to a targeted tissue site which includes the light activated drug. The tissues of the tissue site are then exposed to light from the light source in order to activate any light activated drugs within the tissue site. The activation of the light activated drug causes tissue death within the tissue site. [0006]
  • Several difficulties can be encountered during photodynamic therapy. For instance, since the light activated drug is typically administered systemically, the concentration of the light activated drug within the targeted tissue site is limited by the quantity of light activated drug administered. The concentration of the light activated drug within a tissue site can also be limited by the degree of selective uptake of the light activated drug into the tissue site. Specifically, if the targeted tissue site does not selectively uptake the light activated drug, the concentration of light activated drug within the tissue site can be too low for an effective treatment. [0007]
  • An additional problem associated with photodynamic therapy concerns depth of treatment. Light cannot penetrate deeply into opaque tissues. As a result, the depth that light penetrates most tissue sites is limited. This limited depth can prevent photodynamic therapy from being used to treat tissues which are located deeply in the interior of a tissue site. [0008]
  • There is currently a need for a method and apparatus which can be used to cause death to tissues death deep within a tissue site. When the method and apparatus employ light activated drugs, the method and apparatus should be able to provide an appropriate concentration of light activated drug within the tissue site. [0009]
  • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • An object for an embodiment of the invention is causing tissue death within a tissue site. [0010]
  • Another object for an embodiment of the present invention is locally delivering a light activated drug to a tissue site and activating the light activated drug. [0011]
  • Yet another object for an embodiment of the present invention is locally delivering a light activated drug to a tissue site and delivering ultrasound energy to the delivered light activated drug to activate the light activated drug. [0012]
  • A further object for an embodiment of the present invention is using a catheter to locally deliver a light activated drug to a tissue site and delivering ultrasound energy from an ultrasound element on the catheter to activate the light activated drug. [0013]
  • Yet a further object for an embodiment of the present invention is including the light activated drug in an emulsion, locally delivering the emulsion to a tissue site and delivering ultrasound energy to the light activated drug within the tissue site to activate the light activated drug. [0014]
  • Even a further object for an embodiment of the present invention is including the light activated drug in a liposome, locally delivering the liposome to a tissue site and delivering ultrasound energy to the light activated drug within the tissue site to activate the light activated drug. [0015]
  • An additional object for an embodiment of the present invention is including the light activated drug in an aqueous solution, locally delivering the aqueous solution to a tissue site and delivering ultrasound energy to the light activated drug within the tissue site to activate the light activated drug. [0016]
  • Yet a further object for an embodiment of the present invention is including the light activated drug in an emulsion, systemically delivering the emulsion, providing the light activated drug sufficient time to localize within a tissue site and delivering ultrasound energy to the light activated drug within the tissue site to activate the light activated drug. [0017]
  • Even a further object for an embodiment of the present invention is including the light activated drug in liposomes, systemically delivering the liposomes, providing the light activated drug sufficient time to localize within a tissue site and delivering ultrasound energy to the light activated drug within the tissue site to activate the light activated drug. [0018]
  • An additional object for an embodiment of the present invention is including the light activated drug in an aqueous solution, systemically delivering the aqueous solution, providing the light activated drug sufficient time to localize within a tissue site and delivering ultrasound energy to the light activated drug within the tissue site to activate the light activated drug. [0019]
  • Another object for an embodiment of the present invention is coupling a site directing molecule to a light activated drug, locally delivering the light activated drug to a tissue site and activating the light activated drug within the tissue site. [0020]
  • Yet another object for an embodiment of the invention is providing a catheter for locally delivering a media including a light activated drug to a tissue site. The catheter including an ultrasound assembly configured to activate the light activated drug within the tissue site. [0021]
  • A further object for an embodiment of the invention is providing a catheter for delivering a media including a light activated drug to a tissue site. The catheter including an ultrasound assembly for reducing exposure of the light activated drug to ultrasound energy until the light activated drug has been delivered from within the catheter. [0022]
  • A kit for causing tissue death within a tissue site is disclosed. The kit includes a media with a light activated drug activatable upon exposure to a particular level of ultrasound energy. The kit also includes a catheter with a lumen coupled with a media delivery port through which the light activated drug can be locally delivered to the tissue site. The ultrasound transducer is configured to transmit the level of ultrasound energy which activates the light activated drug with sufficient power that the ultrasound energy can penetrate the tissue site. [0023]
  • A method for causing tissue death in a subdermal tissue site is also disclosed. The method includes providing a catheter for locally delivering a light activated drug to the subdermal tissue site, the catheter including an ultrasound transducer. The method also includes locally delivering the light activated drug to the tissue site; producing ultrasound energy from the ultrasound transducer; and directing the ultrasound energy to the subdermal tissue site following penetration of the light activated drug into the subdermal tissue site to activate at least a portion of the light activated drug within the subdermal tissue site. [0024]
  • A method for activating a light activated drug is also disclosed. The method includes providing a catheter with an ultrasound transducer. The method also includes introducing the light activated drug into a patient's body where a subdermal tissue site absorbs at least a portion of the light activated drug; producing ultrasound energy; directing the ultrasound energy to the light activated containing subdermal tissue site including the light activated drug; and activating at least a portion of the light activated drug in the subdermal selected tissue site. [0025]
  • A method for releasing a therapeutic from a microbubble is also disclosed. The method includes providing a microbubble with a light activated drug activatable upon exposure to ultrasound energy; and delivering ultrasound energy to the microbubble at a frequency and intensity which activates the light activated drug to cause a rupture of the microbubble. [0026]
  • A microbubble is also disclosed. The microbubble includes a substrate defining a shell of the microbubble and having a thickness permitting hydraulic transport of the microbubble. The microbubble also includes a light activated drug activatable upon exposure to ultrasound energy. Activation of the light activated drug causes a disruption in the shell sufficient to cause a rupture of the microbubble. The microbubble further includes a therapeutic releasable from the microbubble upon rupture of the microbubble and yielding a therapeutic effect upon release from the microbubble.[0027]
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • FIG. 1A is a side view of a catheter for locally delivering a media including a light activated drug to a tissue site. [0028]
  • FIG. 1B is an axial cross section of an ultrasound assembly for use with the catheter shown in FIG. 1A. [0029]
  • FIG. 1C is a lateral cross section of an ultrasound assembly for use with the catheter shown in FIG. 1A. [0030]
  • FIG. 2A is a side view of a catheter having an elongated body and an ultrasound assembly which is flush with the elongated body. [0031]
  • FIG. 2B is an axial cross section of the ultrasound assembly illustrated in FIG. 2A. [0032]
  • FIG. 2C is a lateral cross section of the ultrasound assembly illustrated in FIG. 2A. [0033]
  • FIG. 3A illustrates a catheter with a utility lumen and a second utility lumen. [0034]
  • FIG. 3B is an axial cross section of the ultrasound assembly illustrated in the catheter of FIG. 3A. [0035]
  • FIG. 4A is a side view of a catheter including a plurality of ultrasound assemblies. [0036]
  • FIG. 4B is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly included on a catheter with a plurality of utility lumens. [0037]
  • FIG. 4C is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly included on a catheter with a plurality of utility lumens. [0038]
  • FIG. 5A is a side view of a catheter including a balloon. [0039]
  • FIG. 5B is a cross section of a catheter with a balloon which include an ultrasound assembly. [0040]
  • FIG. 6A is a side view of a catheter with a balloon positioned distally relative to an ultrasound assembly. [0041]
  • FIG. 6B is a side view of a catheter with an ultrasound assembly positioned distally relative to a balloon. [0042]
  • FIG. 6C is a cross section of a catheter with an ultrasound assembly positioned at the distal end of the catheter. [0043]
  • FIG. 7A is a side view of a catheter with a media delivery port positioned between an ultrasound assembly and a balloon. [0044]
  • FIG. 7B is a side view of a catheter with an ultrasound assembly positioned between a media delivery port and a balloon. [0045]
  • FIG. 7C is a cross section of a catheter with an ultrasound assembly positioned at the distal end of the catheter. [0046]
  • FIG. 8A is a side view of a catheter including a media delivery port and an ultrasound assembly positioned between first and second balloons. [0047]
  • FIG. 8B is a side view of a catheter including a media delivery port and an ultrasound assembly positioned between first and second balloons. [0048]
  • FIG. 8C is a cross section of a balloon included on a catheter having a first and second balloon. [0049]
  • FIG. 9A illustrates an ultrasound assembly positioned adjacent to a tissue site and microbubbles delivered via a utility lumen. [0050]
  • FIG. 9B illustrates an ultrasound assembly positioned adjacent to a tissue site and a media delivered via a media delivery port. [0051]
  • FIG. 9C illustrates an ultrasound assembly positioned adjacent to a tissue site and a media delivered via a media delivery port while a guidewire is positioned in a utility lumen. [0052]
  • FIG. 9D illustrates a catheter including a balloon positioned adjacent to a tissue site. [0053]
  • FIG. 9E illustrates a catheter including a balloon expanded into contact with a tissue site. [0054]
  • FIG. 9F illustrates a catheter with an ultrasound assembly outside a balloon positioned at a tissue site. [0055]
  • FIG. 9G illustrates the balloon of FIG. 9F expanded into contact with a vessel so as to occlude the vessel. [0056]
  • FIG. 9H illustrates a catheter with an ultrasound assembly outside a first and second balloon positioned at a tissue site. [0057]
  • FIG. 9I illustrates the first and second balloon of FIG. 9H expanded into contact with a vessel so as to occlude the vessel. [0058]
  • FIG. 10A is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly according to the present invention. [0059]
  • FIG. 10B is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly according to the present invention. [0060]
  • FIG. 10C illustrates a support member with integral supports. [0061]
  • FIG. 10D illustrates a support member which is supported by an outer coating. [0062]
  • FIG. 11A is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly including two concentric ultrasound transducers in contact with one another. [0063]
  • FIG. 11B is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly including two separated and concentric ultrasound transducers. [0064]
  • FIG. 11C is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly including two ultrasound transducers where a chamber is defined between one of the ultrasound transducers and an elongated body. [0065]
  • FIG. 11D is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly including two longitudinally adjacent ultrasound transducers in physical contact with one another. [0066]
  • FIG. 11E is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly including two separated and longitudinally adjacent ultrasound transducers. [0067]
  • FIG. 11F is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly including two longitudinally adjacent ultrasound transducers with a single chamber positioned between both ultrasound transducers and an elongated body. [0068]
  • FIG. 11G is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly including two longitudinally adjacent ultrasound transducers with different chambers positioned between each ultrasound transducers and an elongated body. [0069]
  • FIG. 11H is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly including two longitudinally adjacent ultrasound transducers in contact with one another and having a single chamber positioned between each ultrasound transducers and an elongated body. [0070]
  • FIG. 12A is a cross section of a catheter which includes an ultrasound assembly module which is independent of a first catheter component and a second catheter component. [0071]
  • FIG. 12B illustrates the first and second catheter components coupled with the ultrasound assembly module. [0072]
  • FIG. 12C is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly which is integral with a catheter. [0073]
  • FIG. 13A is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly configured to radiate ultrasound energy in a radial direction. The lines which drive the ultrasound transducer pass through a utility lumen in the catheter. [0074]
  • FIG. 13B is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly configured to radiate ultrasound energy in a radial direction. The lines which drive the ultrasound transducer pass through line lumens in the catheter. [0075]
  • FIG. 13C is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly configured to longitudinally radiate ultrasound energy. The distal portion of one line travels proximally through the outer coating. [0076]
  • FIG. 13D is a cross section of an ultrasound assembly configured to longitudinally transmit ultrasound energy. The distal portion of one line travels proximally through a line lumen in the catheter. [0077]
  • FIG. 14A illustrates ultrasound transducers connected in parallel. [0078]
  • FIG. 14B illustrates ultrasound transducers connected in series. [0079]
  • FIG. 14C illustrates ultrasound transducers connected with a common line. [0080]
  • FIG. 15 illustrates a circuit for electrically coupling temperature sensors. [0081]
  • FIG. 16 illustrates a feedback control system for use with a catheter including an ultrasound assembly. [0082]
  • FIGS. [0083] 17A-N illustrate pyrrole-based macrocyclic classes of light emitting drugs.
  • FIGS. [0084] 17B-2 illustrates possible texaphyrin derivation sites.
  • FIGS. [0085] 18A-F illustrate the formulae of preferred light emitting drugs for use with media that includes microbubbles.
  • FIG. 19 illustrates a formula for a porphyrin group. [0086]
  • FIGS. [0087] 20A-D illustrate the formulae of four preferred forms of the hydromonobenzoporphyrin derivatives of the green porphyrins illustrated in formulae 3 and 4 of FIG. 18.
  • FIGS. [0088] 21A-B illustrate the formulae for specific examples of pyrrole-based macrocycle derivatives and xanthene derivatives which are preferred for inclusion in microbubbles to enhance rupture of the microbubbles upon activation.
  • FIGS. [0089] 22A-I schematically summarize the synthesis of an oligonucleotide conjugate of a texaphyrin metal complex.
  • FIGS. [0090] 23A-H illustrate the covalent coupling of texaphyrin metal complexes with amine, thiol, or hydroxy linked oligonucleotides.
  • FIGS. [0091] 24A-F illustrate the synthesis of diformyl monoic acid and oligonucleotide conjugate.
  • FIGS. [0092] 25A-J illustrate the synthesis of a texaphyrin based light activated drug.
  • FIG. 26 illustrates the formula for tin ethyl etiopurpurin (SnEt[0093] 2).
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENT
  • The present invention relates to a method and catheter for delivering a light activated drug to a tissue site and delivering ultrasound energy to the light activated drug within the tissue site. Since many light activated drugs are also activated by ultrasound energy, the delivery of ultrasound energy to the light activated drug activates the light activated drug within the tissue site. Similar to activation of a light activated drug by light, activation by ultrasound causes death of tissues within the tissue site. The tissue death is believed to result from the release of a singlet oxygen. Suitable tissue sites include, but are not limited to, atheroma, cancerous tumors, thrombi and potential restenosis sites. A potential restenosis site is a tissue site where restenosis is likely to occur such as the portion of vessels previously treated by balloon angioplasty. In contrast to light, ultrasound energy can be transmitted through opaque tissues. As a result, the ultrasound energy can be used to treat tissues which are deeper within a tissue site than could be treated via light activation. [0094]
  • One explanation for the activation of light activated drugs via the application of ultrasound is a result of cavitation. Cavitation is known to occur when ultrasonic energy above a certain threshold is applied to a liquid. The mechanism of generation of cavitation is described in Apfel, Robert E., “Sonic Effervescence: Tutorial on Acoustic Cavitation” Journal of Acoustic Society of America 101 (3): 1227-1237 (March 1997) and Atchley A., Crum L., “Ultrasound—Its Chemical, Physical and Biological Effects: Acoustic Cavitation and Bubble Dynamics,” pp. 1-64, 1988 VCH Publishers, New York (1998). [0095]
  • Cavitation results when gas dissolved in a solution forms bubbles under certain types of acoustic vibration. Cavitation can also occur when small bubbles already present in the solution oscillate or repeatedly enlarge and contract to become bubbles. When the size of these cavitation bubbles reaches a size that cannot be maintained, they suddenly collapse and release various types of energy. The various types of energy include, but are not limited to, mechanical energy, visible light, ultraviolet light and other types of electromagnetic radiation. Heat, plasma, magnetic fields, shock waves, free radicals, heat and other forms of energy are also thought to be generated locally. The light activated drug is believed to be activated by at least one of the various forms of energy generated at the time of cavitation collapse. [0096]
  • The delivery of light activated drug to the tissue site can be through traditional systemic administration of a media including the light activated drug or can be performed through localized delivery of the media. Localized delivery can be achieved through injection into the tissue site or through other traditional localized delivery techniques. A preferred delivery technique is using a catheter which includes a media delivery lumen coupled with a media delivery port. The catheter can be positioned such that the media delivery port is within the tissue site or is adjacent to the tissue site via traditional over-the-guidewire techniques. The media can then be locally delivered to the tissue site through the media delivery port. [0097]
  • The localized delivery of the light activated drug to the tissue sight serves to localize the light activated drug within the tissue site and can reduce the amount of light activated drug which concentrates in tissues outside the tissue site. Further, localized delivery of the light activated drug can serve to increase the concentration of the light activated drug within the tissue site above levels which would be achieved through systemic delivery of the light activated drug. Alternatively, the same concentration of light activated drug within the tissue site as would occur through systemic administration can be achieved by introducing smaller amounts of light activated drug into a patient's body. [0098]
  • Localized delivery of the light activated drug also permits treatment of tissue sites which do not have selective uptake of the light activated drug. As discussed above, many light activated drugs, such as the texaphyrins, are taken up by most tissues within the body and later localize within lipid rich tissues. As a result, a non-lipid rich tissue site can be treated by delivering the ultrasound energy to the tissue site before the light activated drug has an opportunity to localize in lipid rich tissues. [0099]
  • Localized delivery is also advantageous when the tissue site is lipid rich such as in an atheroma or a tumor. The localized delivery of the light activated drug combined with the inherent affinity of the light activated drug for tissue site can result in a high degree of localization of the light activated drug within lipid rich tissue sites. [0100]
  • To increase localization of the light activated drug within the tissue site, the light activated drug can be coupled with a sight directing molecule to form a light activated drug conjugate. The site directing molecule is chosen so the light activated drug conjugate specifically binds with the tissue site when the light activated drug conjugate is contacted with the tissue site under physiological conditions of temperature and pH. The specific binding may result from specific electrostatic, hydrophobic, entropic, or other interactions between certain residues on the conjugate and specific residues on the tissue site. [0101]
  • In one preferred embodiment, the light activated drug includes an oligonucleotide acting as a site specific molecule coupled with a texaphyrin. The oligonucleotide can have an affinity for a targeted site on a DNA strand. For instance, the oligonucleotide can be designed to have complementary Watson-Crick base pairing with the targeted DNA site. Activation of the light activated drug after the conjugate has bound the targeted DNA site can cause cleavage of the DNA strand at the targeted DNA site. As a result, the activated drug conjugate can be used for cleavage of targeted DNA sites. The light activated conjugate can be targeted to a site on viral DNA where activation of the light activated conjugate causes the virus to be killed. Similarly, the light activated conjugate can be targeted to oncogenes. Other applications of targeted DNA cleavage include, but are not limited to, antisense applications, specific cleavage and subsequent recombination of DNA; destruction of viral DNA; construction of probes for controlling gene expression at the cellular level and for diagnosis; and cleavage of DNA in footprinting analyses, DNA sequencing, chromosome analysis, gene isolation, recombinant DNA manipulations, mapping of large genomes and chromosomes, in chemotherapy and in site directing mutagenesis. [0102]
  • In another preferred embodiment, the light activated drug includes a hormone. The hormone may be targeted to a particular biological receptor which is localized at the tissue site. [0103]
  • The light activated drug can be included within several media suitable for delivery into the body. Many light activated drugs are known to have low water solubilities of less than 100 mg/L. As a result, achieving the desired concentration of light activated drug in an aqueous solution media for systemic delivery can often be difficult. However, localized delivery of the light activated drug requires a lower concentration of light activated drug within the media. As a result, when the light activated drug is delivered locally, the light activated drug can be included in an aqueous solution. [0104]
  • The media can also be an emulsion which includes a lipoid as a hydrophobic phase dispersed in a hydrophilic phase. These emulsions provide a media which is safe for delivery into the body with an effective concentration of light activated drug. [0105]
  • The media can also include microbubbles comprised from a substrate which forms a shell. Suitable substrates for the microbubble include, but are not limited to, biocompatible polymers, albumins, lipids, sugars or other substances. The light activated drug can be enclosed within the microbubble, coupled with the shell and/or distributed in the media outside the microbubble. A preferred microbubble comprises a lipid substrate such as liposome. Systemic administration of liposomes with light activated drug has been shown to result in an increased accumulation and more prolonged retention of light activated drugs within cultured malignant cells and within tumors in vivo. Jori et al., [0106] Br. J. Cancer, 48:307-309 (1983); Cozzani et al., In Porphyrins in Tumor Phototherapy, 173-183, Plenum Press (Andreoni et al. eds. 1984). As a result, inclusion of the light activated drug within a liposome combined with the localized delivery of the light activated drug can serve to enhance the localization of the light activated drug within the tissue site.
  • Including a light activated drug with the microbubbles has numerous advantages over microbubbles without light activated drug. After administration of microbubbles to a patient, the microbubbles often must be ruptured to achieve their therapeutic effects. One technique for rupturing microbubbles has been to expose the microbubbles to ultrasound energy. However, ultrasound energy of undesirably high intensity is frequently required to break the microbubbles. Further, the ultrasound energy frequently must be matched to the resonant frequency of the microbubbles. As a result, rupturing the microbubbles with ultrasound can present numerous challenges. [0107]
  • Activating a light activated drug within the microbubble and/or in the substrate of the microbubble can cause the microbubble to rupture. Activation of the light activated drug is believed to cause a disturbance which disrupts the shell of the microbubble enough to cause the microbubble to rupture. This disruption occurs when the light activated drug is coupled with the shell of the microbubble or is entirely within the microbubble. This disruption is also believed to occur when light activated drug located the media outside the microbubbles is activated in proximity of the microbubble. Accordingly, including a sufficient concentration light activated drug in the media outside the microbubble and activating a portion of that light activated drug can also cause rupture of the microbubbles. As a result, microbubbles can be ruptured by activating light activated drugs and without matching the ultrasound frequency to the resonant frequency of the microbubble. However, a more efficient rupturing of microbubbles can be achieved by delivering a level of ultrasound energy which is appropriate to activate the light activated drug and which is matched to the resonant frequency of the microbubble. Further, the cavitation threshold can require an ultrasound intensity which is lower than the intensity required to rupture microbubbles without light activated drugs. As a result, including light activated drug with microbubbles can reduce the intensity of ultrasound energy required to rupture the microbubble. [0108]
  • The threshold value of cavitation is also reduced in the proximity of many light activated drugs. As a result, the light activated drug encourages cavitation in the proximity of the light activated drug. [0109]
  • The interior of the microbubbles may include a gas or may be devoid of gas. When a gas is present, the gas can occupy any portion of the microbubble's volume but preferably occupies 0.01-50% of the volume of the microbubble interior, more preferably 5-30% and most preferably 10-20%. When the volume of gas is less than 0.01% of the volume, cavitation can be hindered and when the volume of gas is greater than 50% the structural integrity of the microbubble shell can become too weak for the microbubble to be transported to the tissue site. Suitable gasses for the interior of the microbubbles include, but are not limited to, biocompatible gasses such as air, nitrogen, carbon dioxide, oxygen, argon, fluorine, xenon, neon, helium, or combinations thereof. The presence of tiny bubbles is known to reduce the cavitation threshold. As a result, the presence of an appropriately sized gas bubble in the microbubble can enhance cavitation in the proximity of the light activated drug. [0110]
  • The microbubbles are preferably 0.01-100 μm in diameter. This size microbubble reduces excretion of the microbubble outside the body and also reduces interference of the microbubble with the flow of fluids within the body of the patient. Further, the microbubbles preferably have a shell thickness of 0.001-50 μm, 0.01-5 μm and 0.1-0.5 μm. This thickness provides the shells with sufficient thickness that the microbubble can withstand enough of the forces within the vasculature of a patient to be transported through at least a portion of the patient's vasculature. Similarly, the thickness can permit the microbubbles to be transported through a lumen in an apparatus such as a catheter. However, this thickness is also sufficiently thin that alteration of the ultrasound activated substance upon activation is sufficient to disrupt the shell of the microbubble and cause the microbubble to rupture. [0111]
  • Activating the light activated drug to rupture microbubbles can cause the light activated drug to be released from the microbubble so the light activated drug can penetrate the tissue near the site of rupture. Further exposure of the light activated drug to ultrasound can activate the light activated drug within the tissue and cause death of the tissue as described above. [0112]
  • The microbubble can include a therapeutic in addition to the light activated drug. Activation of the light activated drug can serve to rupture the microbubble and release the therapeutic from the microbubble. As a result, the therapeutic is released in proximity to a tissue site by rupturing the microbubble in proximity to the tissue site. This is advantageous when the therapeutic can be detrimental when administered systemically. For instance, a therapeutic such as cisplatin is known to kill cancerous tissues but is also known to kill other tissues throughout the body. As a result, systemic administration of cisplatin can be detrimental. However, microbubbles can serve to protect tissues from the therapeutic agent until the therapeutic agent is released from the carrier. For instance, when the therapeutic is enclosed within the interior of the microbubble, contact between the therapeutic agent and tissues outside the carrier is reduced. As a result, the carrier increases protection of tissues outside the carrier are protected from the therapeutic agent until the microbubble is ruptured and the therapeutic released. [0113]
  • The therapeutics may be encapsulated in the microbubbles, included in the shell of the microbubbles or in the media outside the microbubbles. Therapeutic, as used herein, means an agent having beneficial effect on the patient. [0114]
  • Examples of therapeutics which can be included with the microbubbles include, but are not limited to, hormone products such as, vasopressin and oxytocin and their derivatives, glucagon and thyroid agents as iodine products and anti-thyroid agents; cardiovascular products as chelating agents and mercurial diuretics and cardiac glycosides; respiratory products as xanthine derivatives (theophylline & aminophylline); anti-infectives as aminoglycosides, antifungals (amphotericin), penicillin and cephalosporin antibiotics, antiviral agents as Zidovudine, Ribavirin, Amantadine, Vidarabine, and Acyclovir, anti-helmintics, antimalarials, and antituberculous drugs; biologicals as immune serums, antitoxins and antivenins, rabies prophylaxis products, bacterial vaccines, viral vaccines, toxoids; antineoplastics asnitrosureas, nitrogen mustards, antimetabolites (fluorouracil, hormones, asprogesings and estrogens and antiestrogens; antibiotics as Dactinomycin; mitotic inhibitors as Etoposide and the Vinca alkaloids, Radiopharmaceuticals as radioactive iodine and phosphorus products; as well as Interferon, hydroxyurea, procarbazine, Dacarbazine, Mitotane, Asparaginase and cyclosporins. [0115]
  • Other suitable therapeutics include, but are not limited to: thrombolytic agents such as urokinase; coagulants such as thrombin; antineoplastic agents, such as platinum compounds (e.g., spiroplatin, cisplatin, and carboplatin), methotrexate, adriamycin, taxol, mitomycin, ansamitocin, bleomycin, cytosine arabinoside, arabinosyl adsnine, mercaptopolylysine, vincristine, busulfan, chlorambucil, melphalan (e.g., PAM, L-PAM or phenylalanine mustard), mercaptopurine, mitotane, procarbazine hydrochloride dactinomycin (actinomycin D), daunorubicinhydrochloride, doxorubicin hydrochloride, mitomycin, plicamycin (mithramycin), aminoglutethimide, estramustine phosphate sodium, flutamide, leuprolide acetate, megestrol acetate, tamoxifen citrate, testolactone, trilostane, amsacrine (m-AMSA), asparaginase (L-asparaginase) Erwinaasparaginase, etoposide (VP-16), interferon alpha-2a, interferon alpha-2b, teniposide (VM-26), vinblastine sulfate (VLB), vincristine sulfate, bleomycin, bleomycin sulfate, methotrexate, adriamycin, and arabinosyl; blood products such as parenteral iron, hemin; biological response modifiers such as muramyldipeptide, muramyltripeptide, microbial cell wall components, lymphokines (e.g., bacterial endotoxin such as lipopolysaccharide, macrophage activation factor), sub-units of bacteria (such as Mycobacteria, Corynebacteria), the synthetic dipeptide N-acetyl-muramyl-L-alanyl-D-isoglutamine; anti-fungalagents such as ketoconazole, nystatin, griseofulvin, flucytosine (5-fc), miconazole, amphotericin B, ricin, and beta-lactam antibiotics (e.g., sulfazecin); hormones such as growth hormone, melanocyte stimulating hormone, estradiol, beclomethasone dipropionate, betamethasone, betamethasone acetate and betamethasone sodium phosphate, vetamethasonedisodiumphosphate, vetamethasone sodium phosphate, cortisone acetate, dexamethasone, dexamethasone acetate, dexamethasone sodium phosphate, flunsolide, hydrocortisone, hydrocortisone acetate, hydrocortisonecypionate, hydrocortisone sodium phosphate, hydrocortisone sodium succinate, methylprednisolone, methylprednisolone acetate, methylprednisolone sodium succinate, paramethasone acetate, prednisolone, prednisoloneacetate, prednisolone sodium phosphate, prednisolone rebutate, prednisone, triamcinolone, triamcinolone acetonide, triamcinolone diacetate, triamcinolone hexacetonide and fludrocortisone acetate; vitamins such ascyanocobalamin neinoic acid, retinoids and derivatives such as retinolpalmitate, and alpha-tocopherol; peptides, such as manganese super oxidedimutase; enzymes such as alkaline phosphatase; anti-allergic agents such as amelexanox; anti-coagulation agents such as phenprocoumon and heparin; circulatory drugs such as propranolol; metabolic potentiators such asglutathione; antituberculars such as para-aminosalicylic acid, isoniazid, capreomycin sulfate cycloserine, ethambutol hydrochloride ethionamide, pyrazinamide, rifampin, and streptomycin sulfate; antivirals such as acyclovir, amantadine azidothymidine (AZT or Zidovudine), Ribavirin andvidarabine monohydrate (adenine arabinoside, ara-A); antianginals such asdiltiazem, nifedipine, verapamil, erythrityl tetranitrate, isosorbidedinitrate, nitroglycerin (glyceryl trinitrate) and pentaerythritoltetranitrate; anticoagulants such as phenprocoumon, heparin; antibiotics such as dapsone, chloramphenicol, neomycin, cefaclor, cefadroxil, cephalexin, cephradine erythromycin, clindamycin, lincomycin, amoxicillin, ampicillin, bacampicillin, carbenicillin, dicloxacillin, cyclacillin, picloxacillin, hetacillin, methicillin, nafcillin, oxacillin, penicillin G, penicillin V, ticarcillin rifampin and tetracycline; antiinflammatories such as difunisal, ibuprofen, indomethacin, meclofenamate, mefenamic acid, naproxen, oxyphenbutazone, phenylbutazone, piroxicam, sulindac, tolmetin, aspirin and salicylates; antiprotozoans such as chloroquine, hydroxychloroquine, metronidazole, quinine and meglumine antimonate; antirheumatics such as penicillamine; narcotics such as paregoric; opiates such as codeine, heroin, methadone, morphine and opium; cardiac glycosides such as deslanoside, digitoxin, digoxin, digitalin and digitalis; neuromuscular blockers such as atracurium besylate, gallamine triethiodide, hexafluorenium bromide, metocurine iodide, pancuronium bromide, succinylcholine chloride (suxamethonium chloride), tubocurarine chloride and vecuronium bromide; sedatives (hypnotics) such as amobarbital, amobarbital sodium, aprobarbital, butabarbital sodium, chloral hydrate, ethchlorvynol, ethinamate, flurazepam hydrochloride, glutethimide, methotrimeprazine hydrochloride, methyprylon, midazolam hydrochloride, paraldehyde, pentobarbital, pentobarbital sodium, phenobarbital sodium, secobarbital sodium, talbutal, temazepam and triazolam; local anesthetics such as bupivacaine hydrochloride, chloroprocaine hydrochloride, etidocainehydrochloride, lidocaine hydrochloride, mepivacaine hydrochloride, procainehydrochloride and tetracaine hydrochloride; general anesthetics such asdroperidol, etomidate, fentanyl citrate with droperidol, ketaminehydrochloride, methohexital sodium and thiopental sodium; and radioactive particles or ions such as strontium, iodide rhenium and yttrium. [0116]
  • In certain preferred embodiments, the therapeutic is a monoclonal antibody, such as a monoclonal antibody capable of binding to melanoma antigen. [0117]
  • Other preferred therapeutics include genetic material such as nucleic acids, RNA, and DNA, of either natural or synthetic origin, including recombinant RNA and DNA and antisense RNA and DNA. Types of genetic material that may be used include, for example, genes carried on expression vectors such as plasmids, phagemids, cosmids, yeast artificial chromosomes (YACs), and defective or “helper” viruses, antigene nucleic acids, both single and double stranded RNA and DNA and analogs thereof, such asphosphorothioate and phosphorodithioate oligodeoxynucleotides. Additionally, the genetic material may be combined, for example, with proteins or other polymers. [0118]
  • Examples of genetic therapeutics that may be included in the microbubbles include DNA encoding at least a portion of an HLAgene, DNA encoding at least a portion of dystrophin, DNA encoding at least a portion of CFTR, DNA encoding at least a portion of IL-2, DNA encoding at least a portion of TNF, an antisense oligonucleotide capable of binding the DNA encoding at least a portion of Ras. [0119]
  • DNA encoding certain proteins may be used in the treatment of many different types of diseases. For example, adenosine deaminase may be provided to treat ADA deficiency; tumor necrosis factor and/or interleukin-2 may be provided to treat advanced cancers; HDL receptor may be provided to treat liver disease; thymidine kinase may be provided to treat ovarian cancer, brain tumors, or HIV infection; HLA-B7 may be provided to treat malignant melanoma; interleukin-2 may be provided to treat neuroblastoma, malignant melanoma, or kidney cancer; interleukin-4 may be provided to treat cancer; HIV env may be provided to treat HIV infection; antisense ras/p53 may be provided to treat lung cancer; and Factor VIII may be provided to treat Hemophilia B. See, for example, Science 258, 744-746. [0120]
  • If desired, more than one therapeutic may be included in the media. For example, a single microbubble may contain more than one therapeutic or microbubbles containing different therapeutics may be co-administered. By way of example, a monoclonal antibody capable of binding to melanoma antigen and an oligonucleotide encoding at least a portion of IL-2 may be administered in a single microbubble. The phrase “at least a portion of,” as used herein, means that the entire gene need not be represented by the oligonucleotide, so long as the portion of the gene represented provides an effective block to gene expression. Further, microbubbles including a therapeutic can be administered before, after, during or intermittently with the administration of microbubbles without a therapeutic. For instance, microbubbles without a therapeutic and microbubbles including a coagulant such as thrombin can be administered to a patient having liver cancer. Activating the light activated drug included with the microbubbles serves to rupture the microbubbles and release the light activated drug and thrombin from the microbubbles. Further activation of the light activated drug can cause tissue death and the thrombin can cause coagulation in and around the damaged tissues. [0121]
  • Prodrugs may be included in the microbubbles, and are included within the ambit of the term therapeutic, as used herein. Prodrugs are well known in the art and include inactive drug precursors which, when exposed to high temperature, metabolizing enzymes, cavitation and/or pressure, in the presence of oxygen or otherwise, or when released from the microbubbles, will form active drugs. Such prodrugs can be activated via the application of ultrasound to the prodrug-containing microbubbles with the resultant cavitation, heating, pressure, and/or release from the microbubbles. Suitable prodrugs will be apparent to those skilled in the art, and are described, for example, in Sinkula et al., J. Pharm. Sci. 1975 64, 181-210, the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. Prodrugs, for example, may comprise inactive forms of the active drugs wherein a chemical group is present on the prodrug which renders it inactive and/or confers solubility or some other property to the drug. In this form, the prodrugs are generally inactive, but once the chemical group has been cleaved from the prodrug, by heat, cavitation, pressure, and/or by enzymes in the surrounding environment or otherwise, the active drug is generated. Such prodrugs are well described in the art, and comprise a wide variety of drugs bound to chemical groups through bonds such as esters to short, medium or long chain aliphatic carbonates, hemiesters of organic phosphate, pyrophosphate, sulfate, amides, amino acids, azo bonds, carbamate, phosphamide, glucosiduronate, N-acetylglucosamine and beta-glucoside. Examples of drugs with the parent molecule and the reversible modification or linkage are as follows: convallatoxin with ketals, hydantoin with alkyl esters, chlorphenesin with glycine or alanins esters, acetaminophen with caffeine complex, acetylsalicylic acid with THAM salt, acetylsalicylic acid with acetamidophenyl ester, naloxone with sulfateester, 15-[0122] methylprostaglandin F sub 2 with methyl ester, procaine with polyethylene glycol, erythromycin with alkyl esters, clindamycin with alkylesters or phosphate esters, tetracycline with betains salts, 7-acylaminocephalosporins with ring-substituted acyloxybenzyl esters, nandrolone with phenylproprionate decanoate esters, estradiol with enolether acetal, methylprednisolone with acetate esters, testosterone with n-acetylglucosaminide glucosiduronate (trimethylsilyl) ether, cortisol or prednisolone or dexamethasone with 21-phosphate esters. Prodrugs may also be designed as reversible drug derivatives and utilized as modifiers to enhance drug transport to site-specific tissues. Examples of parent molecules with reversible modifications or linkages to influence transport to a site specific tissue and for enhanced therapeutic effect include isocyanate with haloalkyl nitrosurea, testosterone with propionateester, methotrexate (3-5′-dichloromethotrexate) with dialkyl esters, cytosine arabinoside with 5′-acylate, nitrogen mustard (2,2′-dichloro-N-methyldiethylamine), nitrogen mustard with aminomethyltetracycline, nitrogen mustard with cholesterol or estradiol ordehydroepiandrosterone esters and nitrogen mustard with azobenzene. As one skilled in the art would recognize, a particular chemical group to modify a given drug may be selected to influence the partitioning of the drug into either the shell or the interior of the microbubbles. The bond selected to link the chemical group to the drug may be selected to have the desired rate of metabolism, e.g., hydrolysis in the case of ester bonds in the presence of serum esterases after release from the microbubbles. Additionally, the particular chemical group may be selected to influence the biodistribution of the drug employed in the microbubbles, e.g., N,N-bis(2-chloroethyl)-phosphorodiamidicacid with cyclic phosphoramide for ovarian adenocarcinoma. Additionally, the prodrugs employed within the microbubbles may be designed to contain reversible derivatives which are utilized as modifiers of duration of activity to provide, prolong or depot action effects. For example, nicotinic acid may be modified with dextran and carboxymethlydextran esters, streptomycin with alginic acid salt, dihydrostreptomycin with pamoate salt, cytarabine (ara-C) with 5′-adamantoats ester, ara-adenosine (ara-A) with 5-palmirate and 5′-benzoate esters, amphotericin B with methyl esters, testosterone with 17-beta-alkyl esters, estradiol with formate ester, prostaglandin with 2-(4-imidazolyl) ethylamine salt, dopamine with amino acid amides, chloramphenicol with mono- and bis(trimethylsilyl) ethers, and cycloguanil with pamoate salt. In this form, a depot or reservoir of long-acting drug may be released in vivo from the prodrug bearing microbubbles. In addition, compounds which are generally thermally labile may be utilized to create toxic free radical compounds. Compounds with azolinkages, peroxides and disulfide linkages which decompose with high temperature are preferred. With this form of prodrug, azo, peroxide or disulfide bond containing compounds are activated by cavitation and/or increased heating caused by the interaction of ultra with the microbubbles to create cascades of free radicals from these prodrugs entrapped therein. A wide variety of drugs or chemicals may constitute these prodrugs, such as azo compounds, the general structure of such compounds being R—N═N—R, wherein R is a hydrocarbon chain, where the double bond between the two nitrogen atoms may react to create free radical products in vivo. Exemplary drugs or compounds which may be used to create free radical products include azo containing compounds such as azobenzene,2,2′-azobisisobutyronitrile, azodicarbonamide, azolitmin, azomycin, azosemide, azosulfamide, azoxybenzene, aztreonam, sudan II, sulfachrysoidine, sulfamidochrysoidine and sulfasalazine, compounds containing disulfide bonds such as sulbentine, thiamine disulfide, thiolutin, thiram, compounds containing peroxides such as hydrogen peroxide and benzoylperoxide, 2,2′-azobisisobutyronitrile, 2,2′-azobis(2-amidopropane) dihydrochloride, and 2,2′-azobis(2,4-dimethylvaleronitrile). A microbubble having oxygen gas on its interior should create extensive free radicals with cavitation. Also, metal ions from the transition series, especially manganese, iron and copper can increase the rate of formation of reactive oxygen intermediates from oxygen. By including metal ions within the microbubbles, the formation of free radicals in vivo can be increased. These metal ions may be incorporated into the microbubbles as freesalts, as complexes, e.g., with EDTA, DTPA, DOTA or desferrioxamine, or asoxides of the metal ions. Additionally, derivatized complexes of the metal ions may be bound to lipid head groups, or lipophilic complexes of the ions may be incorporated into a lipid bilayer, for example. When exposed to thermal stimulation, e.g., cavitation, these metal ions then will increase the rate of formation of reactive oxygen intermediates. Further, radiosensitizers such as metronidazole and misonidazole may be incorporated into the gas-filled liposomes to create free radicals on thermal stimulation. By way of an example of the use of prodrugs, an acylated chemical group may be bound to a drug via an ester linkage which would readily cleave in vivo by enzymatic action in serum. The acylated prodrug can be included in the microbubble. When the microbubble is ruptured, the prodrug will then be exposed to the serum. The ester linkage is then cleaved by esterases in the serum, thereby generating the drug. Similarly, ultrasound may be utilized not only to activate the light activated drug so as to burst the gas-filled liposome, but also to cause thermal effects which may increase the rate of the chemical cleavage and the release of the active drug from the prodrug. The microbubbles may also be designed so that there is a symmetric or an asymmetric distribution of the therapeutic both inside and outside of the microbubble. The particular chemical structure of the therapeutics may be selected or modified to achieve desired solubility such that the therapeutic may either be encapsulated within the interior of the microbubble or couple with the shell of the microbubble. The shell-bound therapeutic may bear one or more acyl chains such that, when the microbubble is popped or heated or ruptured via cavitation, the acylated therapeutic may then leave the surface and/or the therapeutic may be cleaved from the acyl chains chemical group. Similarly, other therapeutics may be formulated with a hydrophobic group which is aromatic or sterol in structure to incorporate into the surface of the microbubble.
  • When the microbubble is a liposome, the liposomes can be “fast breaking”. In fast breaking liposomes, the light activated drug-liposome combination is stable in vitro but, when administered in vivo, the light activated drug is rapidly released into the bloodstream where it can associate with serum lipoproteins. As a result, the localized delivery of liposomes combined with the fast breaking nature of the liposomes can result in localization of the light activated drug and/or the therapeutic in the tissues near the catheter. Further, the fast breaking liposomes can prevent the liposomes from leaving the vicinity of the catheter intact and then concentrating in non-targeted tissues such as the liver. Delivery of ultrasound energy from the catheter can also serve to break apart the liposomes after they have been delivered from the catheter. [0123]
  • A catheter for locally delivering a media including a light activated drug includes an elongated body with at least one utility lumen extending through the elongated body. The utility lumens can be used to deliver the media including the light activated drug locally to a tissue site and/or to receive a guidewire so the catheter can be guided to the tissue site. The ultrasound assembly can include an ultrasound transducer designed to transmit ultrasound energy which activates the light activated drug. [0124]
  • A support member can support the ultrasound transducer adjacent to an outer surface of the elongated body so as to define a chamber between the ultrasound transducer and the elongated body. The chamber can be filled with a material which creates a low acoustic impedance to reduce the exposure of at least one utility lumen within the elongated body to ultrasound energy delivered from the ultrasound transducer. For instance, the chamber can be filled with a material which absorbs, reflects or prevents transmission of ultrasound energy through the chamber. Alternatively, the chamber can be evacuated to reduce transmission of ultrasound energy through the chamber. Reducing the exposure of at least one lumen to the ultrasound energy reduces exposure of media delivered through the at least one lumen to the ultrasound energy. As a result, the effect of the ultrasound energy on the light activated drug is reduced until the light activated drug has been delivered out of the catheter. Further, ultrasound energy is known to rupture microbubbles. As a result, when the media includes microbubbles, the chamber reduces the opportunity for the ultrasound energy to rupture the microbubbles within the catheter. [0125]
  • The support member can have ends which extend beyond the ultrasound member. As a result, the chamber can be positioned adjacent to the entire longitudinal length of the ultrasound transducer and can extend beyond the ends of the ultrasound transducer. This configuration maximizes the portion of the ultrasound transducer which is adjacent to the chamber. Increasing the portion of ultrasound transducer adjacent to the chamber can reduce the amount of ultrasound energy transmitted to the utility lumens. The ultrasound assembly can include an outer coating over the ultrasound transducer. Temperature sensors can be positioned in the outer coating adjacent to ultrasound transducer. The temperature sensors feed back information regarding the temperature adjacent to the ultrasound transducers where the thermal energy has a reduced opportunity to dissipate. As a result, the temperature sensors provide a measure of the temperature on the exterior surface of the transducer. [0126]
  • FIGS. [0127] 1A-1B illustrates a catheter 10 for delivering a media including a light activated drug to a tissue site. The catheter 10 includes an ultrasound assembly 12 for delivering ultrasound energy to light activated drug within the tissue site. The catheter 10 includes an elongated body 14 with a utility lumen 16 extending through the elongated body 14. The utility lumen 16 can receive a guidewire (not shown) so the catheter 10 can be threaded along the guidewire. The utility lumen 16 can also be used for the delivering media which include a light activated drug. A fiber optic can also be positioned in the utility lumen 16 to provide a view of the tissue site or to provide light to the tissue site. As a result, the catheter can also be used as an endoscope.
  • The [0128] ultrasound assembly 12 can also include an outer coating 18. Suitable outer coatings 18 include, but are not limited to, polyimide, parylene and polyester. An ultrasound transducer 20 is positioned within the outer coating 18. Suitable ultrasound transducers 20 include, but are not limited to, PZT-4D, PZT-4, PZT-8 and cylindrically shaped piezoceramics. When the ultrasound transducer 20 has a cylindrical shape, the ultrasound transducer 20 can encircle the elongated body 14 as illustrated in FIG. 1C. One or more temperature sensors 22 can be positioned in the outer coating 18. The temperature sensors 22 can be positioned adjacent to the ultrasound transducer 20 to provide feedback regarding the temperature adjacent to the ultrasound transducer 20. The temperature sensors can be in electrical communication with an electrical coupling 24. The electrical coupling 24 can be coupled with a feedback control system (not shown) which adjusts the level of the ultrasound energy delivered from the ultrasound transducer 20 in response to the temperature at the temperature sensors 22.
  • The [0129] catheter 10 can include a perfusion lumen 25. The perfusion lumen 25 allows fluid to flow from outside the catheter into the utility lumen 16. Once a guidewire has been removed from the utility lumen 16, fluid flow which is obstructed by the ultrasound assembly can continue through the perfusion lumen 25 and the utility lumen. As illustrated in FIGS. 2A-2B, the ultrasound assembly 12 can be flush with the elongated body 14. Further, the ultrasound transducer 20 and the temperature sensors 22 can be positioned within the elongated body 14. This configuration of elongated body 14 and ultrasound transducer 20 can eliminate the need for the outer coating 18 illustrated in FIGS. 1A-1C.
  • As illustrated in FIG. 3A, the [0130] catheter 10 can also include a media delivery port 26, a media inlet port 28 and a second utility lumen 16A. The media inlet port 28 is designed to be coupled with a media source (not shown). Media can be transported from the media source and through the media delivery port 26 via the second utility lumen 16A. As a result, a guidewire can be left within the utility lumen 16 while media is delivered via the second utility lumen 16A.
  • FIG. 4A illustrates a [0131] catheter 10 including a plurality of ultrasound assemblies 12. FIGS. 4B-4C are cross sections of a catheter 10 with a second utility lumen 16A coupled with the media delivery ports 26. The second utility lumen 16A can also be coupled with the media inlet port 28 illustrated in FIG. 4A. The media inlet port 28 is designed to be coupled with a media source (not shown). Media can be transported from the media source and through the media delivery ports 26 via the second utility lumen 16A.
  • The [0132] catheter 10 can include a balloon 30 as illustrated in FIG. 5A. The balloon 30 can be constructed from an impermeable material or a permeable membrane or a selectively permeable membrane which allows certain media to flow through the membrane while preventing other media from flowing through the membrane. Suitable membranous materials for the balloon 30 include, but are not limited to cellulose, cellulose acetate, polyvinylchloride, polyolefin, polyurethane and polysulfone. When the balloon 30 is constructed from a permeable membrane or a selectively permeable membrane, the membrane pore sizes are preferably 5 A-2 μm, more preferably 50 A-900 A and most preferably 100 A-300 A in diameter.
  • As illustrated in FIG. 5B, an [0133] ultrasound assembly 12, a first media delivery port 26A and a second media delivery port 26B can be positioned within the balloon 30. The first and second media delivery ports 26A, 26B are coupled with a second utility lumen 16A and third utility lumen 16B. The second and third utility lumens 16A, 16B can be coupled with the same media inlet port 28 or with independent media inlet ports 28. When the first and second media delivery ports 26A, 26B are coupled with different media inlet ports 28, different media can be delivered via the second and third media delivery ports 26A, 26B. For instance, a medication media can be delivered via the third utility lumen 16B and an expansion media can be delivered via the second utility lumen 16A. The medication media can include drugs or other medicaments which can provide a therapeutic effect. The expansion media can serve to expand the balloon 30 or wet the membrane comprising the balloon 30. Wetting the membrane comprising the balloon 30 can cause a minimally permeable membrane to become permeable.
  • The [0134] ultrasound assembly 12 can be positioned outside the balloon 30 as illustrated in FIGS. 6A-6C. In FIG. 6A the balloon 30 is positioned distally of the ultrasound assembly 12 and in FIG. 6B the ultrasound assembly 12 is positioned distally of the balloon 30. FIG. 6C is a cross section a catheter 10 with an ultrasound assembly 12 positioned outside the balloon 30. The catheter includes a second utility lumen 16A coupled with a first media delivery port 26A. The second utility lumen 16A can be used to deliver an expansion media and/or a medication media to the balloon 30. When the balloon 30 is constructed from a permeable membrane, the medication media and/or the expansion media can pass through the balloon 30. Similarly, when the balloon 30 is constructed from a selectively permeable membrane, particular components of the medication media and/or the expansion media can pass through the balloon 30. Pressure can be used to drive the media or components of the media across the balloon 30. Other means such as phoresis can also be used to drive the media or components of the media across the balloon 30.
  • As illustrated in FIG. 6C, the [0135] ultrasound assembly 12 may be positioned at the distal end of the catheter 10. The second utility lumen 16A can be used to deliver an expansion media and/or a medication media to the balloon 30. The utility lumen 16 can be used to deliver a medication media as well as to guide the catheter 10 along a guidewire.
  • As illustrated in FIGS. [0136] 7A-7C, the catheter 10 can include a second media delivery port 26B positioned outside the balloon. In FIGS. 7A-7C the ultrasound assembly 12 and the second media delivery port 26B are positioned distally relative to a balloon 30, however, the balloon 30 can be positioned distally relative to the ultrasound assembly 12 and the second media delivery port 26B. In FIG. 7A the ultrasound assembly 12 is positioned distally of the second media delivery port 26B and in FIG. 7B the second media delivery port 26B is positioned distally of the ultrasound assembly 12.
  • FIG. 7C is a cross section of the [0137] catheter 10 illustrated in FIG. 7A. The catheter 10 includes first and second media delivery ports 26A, 26B coupled with a second utility lumen 16A and third utility lumen 16B. The second and third utility lumens 16A, 16B can be coupled with independent media inlet ports 28 (not shown). The second utility lumen 16A can be used to deliver an expansion media and/or a medication media to the balloon 30 while the third utility lumen 16B can be used to deliver a medication media through the second media delivery port 26B.
  • As illustrated in FIGS. [0138] 8A-8B, the catheter 10 can include a first balloon 30A and a second balloon 30B. The ultrasound assembly 12 can be positioned between the first and second balloons 30A, 30B. A second media delivery port 26B can optionally be positioned between the first and second balloons 30A, 30B. In FIG. 8A the second media delivery port 26B is positioned distally relative to the ultrasound assembly and in FIG. 8B the ultrasound assembly is positioned distally relative to the second media delivery port 26B.
  • FIG. 8C is a cross section of the [0139] first balloon 30A illustrated in FIG. 8B. The catheter includes a second, third and fourth utility lumens 16A, 16B, 16C. The second utility lumen 16A is coupled with a first media delivery port 26A within the first balloon. The third utility lumen 16B is coupled with the second media delivery port 26B and the fourth utility lumen 16C is coupled with a third media delivery port 26C in the second balloon 30B (not shown). The second and fourth utility lumens 16A, 16C can be used to deliver expansion media and/or medication media to the first and second balloon 30A, 30B. The second and fourth utility lumens 16A, 16C can be coupled with the same media inlet port or with independent media inlet ports (not shown). When the second and fourth utility lumens are coupled with the same media inlet port, the pressure within the first and second balloons 30A, 30B will be similar. When the second and fourth utility lumens are coupled with independent media inlet ports, different pressures can be created within the first and second balloons 30A, 30B. The third utility lumen 16B can be coupled with an independent media inlet port and can be used to deliver a medication media via the second media delivery port 26B.
  • FIGS. [0140] 9A-9I illustrate operation of various embodiments of catheters 10 for delivering ultrasound energy to a light activated drug within a tissue site. FIGS. 9A-9I illustrate the tissue site 32 as an atheroma in a vessel 34, however, it is contemplated that the catheter 10 can be used with other tissue sites 32 such as a tumor and that the catheter 10 can be positioned within the vasculature of the tumor. In each of FIGS. 9A-9I, the catheter 10 is illustrated as being within a vessel 34. The catheter 10 can be positioned within the vessel 34 by applying conventional over-the-guidewire techniques and can be verified by including radiopaque markers upon the catheter 10.
  • In FIG. 9A, the [0141] catheter 10 is positioned so the ultrasound assembly 12 is adjacent to a tissue site 32 within a vessel 34. When the catheter 10 is in position, the guidewire is removed from the utility lumen 16 and media can be delivered via the utility lumen 16 as illustrated by the arrows 36. In FIG. 9A, the media includes microbubbles 38 but can alternatively be an emulsion. The media is delivered to the tissue site 32 via the utility lumen 16 and ultrasound energy 40 is delivered from the ultrasound assembly 12. Suitable periods for delivering the ultrasound energy include., but are not limited to, 1 minute to three hours, 2 minutes to one hour and 10-30 minutes.
  • Suitable intensities for the ultrasound energy include, but are not limited to, 0.1-1000 W/cm[0142] 2, 1-100 W/cm2 and 10-50 W/cm2. Suitable frequencies for the ultrasound energy include, but are not lmited to, 10 kHz-100 MHz and 10 kHz-50 MHz but is preferably 20 kHz-10 MHz. Suitable ultrasound energies also include, but are not limited to 0.02 to 10 w/cm at a frequency of about 20 KHz to about 10 MHz and more preferably about 0.3 W/cm2 at a frequency of about 1.3 MHz. The ultrasound energy can be intermittently switched between a first and second frequency to increase the efficiency of microbubble rupture and to increase activation of the light activated drug. For instance, the ultrasound energy can be switched between about 100 kHz and about 270 kHz in short pulses of approximately 0.001-10 seconds duration. Similarly, the ultrasound energy can be switched between first and second intensities. When the catheter includes a plurality of ultrasound transducers as will be discussed below, the first and second frequencies can be provided by different ultrasound transducers. Similarly, the first and second intensities can be provided by different ultrasound transducers. Further, when the catheter includes a plurality of ultrasound transducers each transducer can simultaneously transmit ultrasound energy with different intensity and/or frequency.
  • The delivery of [0143] ultrasound energy 40 can be before, after, during or intermittently with the delivery of the microbubbles 38. As discussed above, the microbubbles 38 can be “fast breaking” so they rupture upon exiting the utility lumen and being exposed to the vessel 34. As described above, the ultrasound energy from the ultrasound assembly 12 can cause the microbubbles 38 within the delivered media to rupture. As will be described in more detail below, the ultrasound assembly can be designed to reduce the exposure of media within the catheter 10 to the ultrasound energy from the ultrasound assembly 12. When the catheter 10 is so designed, the number of microbubbles 38 which rupture within the catheter is reduced and the number of microbubbles 38 which rupture outside the catheter is increased.
  • Delivery of the ultrasound energy before delivery of the light activated drug can enhance absorption of the light activated drug into the tissue site. Delivery of the ultrasound energy a pre-determined time after delivery of the light activated drug can provide the light activated drug time to penetrate the tissue site. The pre-determined time can be of sufficient duration that at least a portion of the light activated drug penetrates into the tissue site. The pre-determined time can also be of sufficient duration that the light activated drug localizes within the lipid rich tissue of the atheroma. Sufficient time between delivery of the media and the ultrasound energy include but are not limited to, 1 minute to 48 hours, 1 minute to 3 hours, 1 to 15 minutes and 1 to 2 minutes. Once the light activated drug has penetrated the [0144] tissue site 32, the ultrasound energy from the ultrasound assembly 12 can activate the light activated dug within the tissue site 32 so as to cause tissue death within the tissue site 32.
  • In FIG. 9B, [0145] ultrasound energy 40 is delivered from the ultrasound transducer 20 and a media is delivered through the media delivery port 26 as illustrated by the arrows 36. The delivery of ultrasound energy 40 can be before, after, during or intermittently with the delivery of the media via the media delivery port 26. As illustrated in FIG. 9C, the guidewire 104 can remain in the utility lumen 16 during the delivery of the media via the media delivery ports 26. As will be discussed in further detail below, the ultrasound assembly can be designed to reduce the transmission of the ultrasound energy into the utility lumen. Because the transmission of ultrasound energy 40 into the utility lumen 16 is reduced, the change in the frequency of the ultrasound transducer 20 which is due to the presence of the guidewire in the utility lumen 16 is also reduced.
  • In FIG. 9D, a [0146] catheter 10 including a balloon 30 is positioned with the balloon adjacent to the tissue site 32. In FIG. 9E, the balloon 30 is expanded into contact with the tissue site 32. As discussed above, the catheter 10 can include a perfusion lumen which permits a continuous flow of fluid from the vessel through the utility lumen during the partial or full obstruction of the vessel by the balloon. When the balloon 30 is constructed from a membrane or a selectively permeable membrane a media can be delivered to the tissue site 32 via the balloon 30. The media can serve to wet the membrane or can include a drug or other medicament which provides a therapeutic effect. Ultrasound energy 40 can be delivered from the ultrasound assembly 12 before, after, during or intermittently with the delivery of the media. The ultrasound energy 40 can serve to drive the media across the membrane via phonophoresis or can enhance the therapeutic effect of the media.
  • In FIG. 9F a [0147] catheter 10 with an ultrasound assembly 12 outside a balloon 30 is positioned at the tissue site 32 so the ultrasound assembly 12 is adjacent to the tissue site 32. A fluid within the vessel flows past the balloon as indicated by the arrow 42. In FIG. 9G, the balloon 30 is expanded into contact with the vessel 34. The balloon 30 can be constructed from an impermeable material so the vessel 34 is occluded. As a result, the fluid flow through the vessel 34 is reduced or stopped. A medication media is delivered through the utility lumen 16 and ultrasound energy 40 is delivered from the ultrasound assembly 12. In embodiments of the catheter 10 including a media delivery port 26 outside of the balloon 30 (i.e. FIGS. 7A-7C), the medication media can be delivered via the media delivery port 26. Further, a first medication media can be delivered via the media delivery port 26 while a second medication media can be delivered via the utility lumen 16 or while a guidewire is positioned within the utility lumen 16. The ultrasound energy 40 can be delivered from the ultrasound assembly 12 before, after, during or intermittently with the delivery of the media. The occlusion of the vessel 34 before the delivery of the media can serve to prevent the media from being swept from the tissue site 32 by the fluid flow. Although the balloon 30 illustrated in FIGS. 9F-9G is positioned proximally relative to the ultrasound assembly 12, the fluid flow through the vessel 34 can also be reduced by expanding a single balloon 30 which is positioned distally relative to the ultrasound assembly 12.
  • In FIG. 9H a [0148] catheter 10 including a first balloon 30A and a second balloon 30B is positioned at a tissue site 32 so the ultrasound assembly 12 is positioned adjacent to the tissue site 32. A fluid within the vessel 34 flows past the balloon 30 as indicated by the arrow 42. In FIG. 9I, the first and second balloons 30A, 30B are expanded into contact with the vessel 34. The first and second balloons 30A, 30B can be constructed from an impermeable material so the vessel 34 is occluded proximally and distally of the ultrasound assembly 12. As a result, the fluid flow adjacent to the tissue site 32 is reduced or stopped. A medication media is delivered through the media delivery port 26 and ultrasound energy 40 is delivered from the ultrasound assembly 12. The ultrasound energy 40 can be delivered from the ultrasound assembly 12 before, after, during or intermittently with the delivery of the media. The occlusion of the vessel 34 before the delivery of the media can serve to prevent the media from being swept from the tissue site 32 by the fluid flow.
  • In each of the FIGS. [0149] 9A-9I illustrated above, the media can be systemically delivered. The catheter 10 is positioned adjacent to the tissue site before, after or during the systemic administration of the media. When the media includes microbubbles which must be burst before their therapeutic effect can be obtained, the ultrasound energy can be delivered after the microbubbles have had sufficient time to reach the desired tissue site in sufficient concentrations. A level of ultrasound which ruptures the microbubbles is then delivered from the ultrasound assembly. After rupture of the microbubbles, the delivery of ultrasound energy can be stopped to provide the light activated drug or other therapeutic time to penetrate the tissue site. The delivery of the ultrasound energy can also be continuous to maximize the number of microbubbles which are burst.
  • When the media is systemically delivered and the light activated drug is included in media which does' not require an ultrasound activated release, the behavior of the light activated drug within the patient must be taken into consideration. As described above, many light drugs such as the macrocycles, initially disperse throughout the body and where they are taken up by most tissues. After a period of time, usually between 3 and 48 hours, the drug clears from most normal tissue and is retained to a greater degree in lipid rich regions such as the liver, kidney, tumor and atheroma. As a result, when the tissue site is not a lipid rich region, the ultrasound energy should be delivered to the tissue site within 3 to 48 hours of systemically administering the media. However, when the tissue site is lipid rich, improved results can be achieved by waiting 3 to 48 hours after systemic administration of the media before delivering the ultrasound energy. [0150]
  • FIG. 10A provides a cross section of an ultrasound assembly which reduces transmission of ultrasound energy from the ultrasound transducer into the catheter. The [0151] ultrasound assembly 12 includes a support member 44. Suitable support members 44 include, but are not limited to, polyimide, polyester and nylon. The support member 44 can be attached to the ultrasound transducer 20. Suitable means for attaching the ultrasound transducer 20 to the support member 44 include, but are not limited to, adhesive bonding and thermal bonding.
  • The [0152] support member 44 supports the ultrasound transducer 20 at an external surface 46 of the elongated body 14 such that a chamber 48 is defined between the ultrasound transducer 20 and the external surface 46 of the elongated body 14. The chamber 48 preferably has a height from 0.25-10 μm, more preferably from 0.50-5 μm and most preferably from 0.0-1.5 μm. The support member 44 can be supported by supports 50 positioned at the ends 52 of the support member 44 as illustrated in FIG. 10A. The supports 50 can be integral with the support member 44 as illustrated in FIG. 10C. The outer coating 18 can serve as the supports as illustrated in FIG. 10D.
  • The ends [0153] 52 of the support member 44 can extend beyond the ends 54 of the ultrasound transducer 20. The supports 50 can be positioned beyond the ends 54 of the ultrasound transducer 20. As a result, the chamber 48 can extend along the longitudinal length 56 of the ultrasound transducer 20, maximizing the portion of the ultrasound transducer 20 which is adjacent to the chamber 48. The chamber 48 can be filled with a medium which absorbs ultrasound energy or which prevents transmission of ultrasound energy. Suitable gaseous media for filling the chamber 48 include, but are not limited to, helium, argon, air and nitrogen. Suitable solid media for filling the chamber 48 include, but are not limited to, silicon and rubber. The chamber 48 can also be evacuated. Suitable pressures for an evacuated chamber 48 include, but are not limited to, negative pressures to −760 mm Hg.
  • The ultrasound assembly can include a [0154] second ultrasound transducer 20A as illustrated in FIGS. 11A-11H. In FIGS. 11A-11C one ultrasound transducer encircles the other and in FIGS. 11D-11H the ultrasound transducers are longitudinally adjacent to one another. The ultrasound transducers 20, 20A can be in contact with one another as illustrated in FIGS. 11A, 11E and 11H or separated from one another as illustrated in FIGS. 11B-11D, 11F and 11G. A single chamber 54 can be defined between the ultrasound transducers 20, 20A and the external surface 46 of the elongated body 14 as illustrated in FIGS. 11C, 11F and 11G or a different chamber can be defined between each of the ultrasound transducers 20, 20A and the external surface 46. Although the ultrasound transducers 20, 20A in FIGS. 11A-11C are illustrated as having the same longitudinal length, the longitudinal length may be different.
  • In FIGS. [0155] 11A-11H, the different temperature sensors can be positioned adjacent to different ultrasound transducers 20, 20A. As a result, the temperature adjacent to different ultrasound transducers 20, 20A can be detected and the level of ultrasound energy produced by each ultrasound transducer adjusted in response to the detected temperature.
  • When the ultrasound assembly includes a [0156] second transducer 20A, the transducers 20, 20A may be constructed from the same or different materials. Both transducers 20, 20A may be configured to radiate ultrasound energy in the same direction. Further, one transducer may be configured to transmit ultrasound energy in a radial direction and the other in a longitudinal direction in order to increase the angular spectrum over which ultrasound energy can be simultaneously transmitted. The ultrasound transducers can be configured to transmit ultrasound energy having the same or different characteristics. The transmission of ultrasound energy with different characteristics allows the same ultrasound assemblies to be used to perform different functions. For instance, one ultrasound transducer can transmit a frequency which is appropriate for activating a light activated drug while the second ultrasound transducer transmits a frequency appropriate for enhancing penetration of a therapeutic agent into the treatment site. The transducers can be operated independently or simultaneously. When the transducers are operated simultaneously, the ultrasound assembly produces a waveform which is more complex than a single ultrasound transducer. More complex waveforms can provide advantages such as more efficient rupture of microbubbles. It is also contemplated that the ultrasound assembly can include three or more ultrasound transducers arranged similar to the transducers illustrated in FIGS. 11A-11H.
  • The [0157] ultrasound assembly 12 can be a separate module 58 as illustrated in FIGS. 12A-12B. In FIG. 12A, the catheter 10 includes a first catheter component 60 a second catheter component 62 and an ultrasound assembly module 58. The first and second catheter components 60, 62 include component ends 64 which are complementary to the ultrasound assembly module ends 66. The component ends 64 can be coupled with the ultrasound assembly module ends 66 as illustrated in FIG. 12B. Suitable means for coupling the component ends 64 and the ultrasound assembly module ends 66 include, but are not limited to, adhesive, mechanical and thermal methods. The ultrasound assembly 12 can be integral with the catheter 10 as illustrated in FIG. 12C. Further, the outer coating 18 can have a diameter which is larger than the diameter of the elongated body 14 as illustrated in FIG. 10A or can be flush with the external surface 46 of the elongated body 14 as illustrated in FIGS. 12A-12C.
  • The [0158] ultrasound assembly 12 can be electrically coupled to produce radial vibrations of the ultrasound transducer 20 as illustrated in FIGS. 13A-13B. A first line 68 is coupled with an outer surface 70 of the ultrasound transducer 20 while a second line 72 is coupled with an inner surface 74 of the ultrasound transducer 20. The first and second lines 68, 72 can pass proximally through the utility lumen 16 as illustrated in FIG. 13A. Alternatively, the first and second lines 68, 72 can pass proximally through line lumens 76 within the catheter 10 as illustrated in FIG. 13B. Suitable lines for the ultrasound transducer 20 include, but are not limited to, copper, gold and aluminum. Suitable frequencies for the ultrasound energy delivered by the ultrasound transducer 20 include, but are not limited to, 20 KHz to 2 MHz.
  • The [0159] ultrasound assembly 12 can be electrically coupled to produce longitudinal vibrations of the ultrasound transducer 20 as illustrated in FIGS. 13C-13D. A first line 68 is coupled with a first end 78 of the ultrasound transducer 20 while a second line 72 is coupled with a second end 80 of the ultrasound transducer 20. The distal portion 82 of the second line 72 can pass through the outer coating 18 as illustrated in FIG. 13C. Alternatively, the distal portion 82 of the second line 72 can pass through line lumens 76 in the catheter 10 as illustrated in FIG. 13D. As discussed above, the first and second lines 68, 72 can pass proximally through the utility lumen 16.
  • As discussed above, the [0160] catheter 10 can include a plurality of ultrasound assemblies. When the catheter 10 includes a plurality of ultrasound assemblies, each ultrasound transducer 20 can each be individually powered. When the elongated body 14 includes N ultrasound transducers 20, the elongated body 14 must include 2N lines to individually power N ultrasound transducers 20. The individual ultrasound transducers 20 can also be electrically coupled in serial or in parallel as illustrated in FIGS. 14A-14B. These arrangements permit maximum flexibility as they require only 2 lines. Each of the ultrasound transducers 20 receive power simultaneously whether the ultrasound transducers 20 are in series or in parallel. When the ultrasound transducers 20 are in series, less current is required to produce the same power from each ultrasound transducer 20 than when the ultrasound transducers 20 are connected in parallel. The reduced current allows smaller lines to be used to provide power to the ultrasound transducers 20 and accordingly increases the flexibility of the elongated body 14. When the ultrasound transducers 20 are connected in parallel, an ultrasound transducer 20 can break down and the remaining ultrasound transducers 20 will continue to operate.
  • As illustrated in FIG. 14C, a [0161] common line 84 can provide power to each ultrasound transducer 20 while each ultrasound transducer 20 has its own return line 86. A particular ultrasound transducer 20 can be individually activated by closing a switch 88 to complete a circuit between the common line 84 and the particular ultrasound transducer's 20 return line 86. Once a switch 88 corresponding to a particular ultrasound transducer 20 has been closed, the amount of power supplied to the ultrasound transducer 20 can be adjusted with the corresponding potentiometer 90. Accordingly, an catheter 10 with N ultrasound transducers 20 requires only N+1 lines and still permits independent control of the ultrasound transducers 20. This reduced number of lines increases the flexibility of the catheter 10. To improve the flexibility of the catheter 10, the individual return lines 86 can have diameters which are smaller than the common line 84 diameter. For instance, in an embodiment where N ultrasound transducers 20 will be powered simultaneously, the diameter of the individual return lines 86 can be the square root of N times smaller than the diameter of the common line 84.
  • As discussed above, the [0162] ultrasound assembly 12 can include at least one temperature sensor 22. Suitable temperature sensors 22 include, but are not limited to, thermistors, thermocouples, resistance temperature detectors (RTD)s, and fiber optic temperature sensors 22 which use thermalchromic liquid crystals. Suitable temperature sensor geometries include, but are not limited to, a point, patch, stripe and a band encircling the ultrasound transducer 20.
  • When the [0163] ultrasound assembly 12 includes a plurality of temperature sensors 22, the temperature sensors 22 can be electrically connected as illustrated in FIG. 15. Each temperature sensor 22 can be coupled with a common line 84 and then include its own return line 86. Accordingly, N+1 lines can be used to independently sense the temperature at the temperature sensors 22 when N temperature sensors 22 are employed. A suitable common line 84 can be constructed from Constantine and suitable return lines 86 can be constructed from copper. The temperature at a particular temperature sensor 22 can be determined by closing a switch 88 to complete a circuit between the thermocouple's return line 86 and the common line 84. When the temperature sensors 22 are thermocouples, the temperature can be calculated from the voltage in the circuit. To improve the flexibility of the catheter 10, the individual return lines 86 can have diameters which are smaller than the common line 84 diameter.
  • Each [0164] temperature sensor 22 can also be independently electrically coupled. Employing N independently electrically coupled temperature sensors 22 requires 2N lines to pass the length of the catheter 10.
  • The [0165] catheter 10 flexibility can also be improved by using fiber optic based temperature sensors 22. The flexibility can be improved because only N fiber optics need to be employed sense the temperature at N temperature sensors 22.
  • The [0166] catheter 10 can be coupled with a feedback control system as illustrated in FIG. 16. The temperature at each temperature sensor 22 is monitored and the output power of an energy source adjusted accordingly. The physician can, if desired, override the closed or open loop system.
  • The feedback control system includes an [0167] energy source 92, power circuits 94 and a power calculation device 96 coupled with each ultrasound transducer 20. A temperature measurement device 98 is coupled with the temperature sensors 22 on the catheter 10. A processing unit 100 is coupled with the power calculation device 96, the power circuits 94 and a user interface and display 102.
  • In operation, the temperature at each [0168] temperature sensor 22 is determined at the temperature measurement device 98. The processing unit 100 receives signals indicating the determined temperatures from the temperature measurement device 98. The determined temperatures can then be displayed to the user at the user interface and display 102.
  • The [0169] processing unit 100 includes logic for generating a temperature control signal. The temperature control signal is proportional to the difference between the measured temperature and a desired temperature. The desired temperature can be determined by the user. The user can set the predetermined temperature at the user interface and display 102.
  • The temperature control signal is received by the [0170] power circuits 94. The power circuits 94 adjust the power level of the energy supplied to the ultrasound transducers 20 from the energy source 92. For instance, when the temperature control signal is above a particular level, the power supplied to a particular ultrasound transducer 20 is reduced in proportion to the magnitude of the temperature control signal. Similarly, when the temperature control signal is below a particular level, the power supplied to a particular ultrasound transducer 20 is increased in proportion to the magnitude of the temperature control signal. After each power adjustment, the processing unit 100 monitors the temperature sensors 22 and produces another temperature control signal which is received by the power circuits 94.
  • The [0171] processing unit 100 can also include safety control logic. The safety control logic detects when the temperature at a temperature sensor 22 has exceeded a safety threshold. The processing unit 100 can then provide a temperature control signal which causes the power circuits 94 to stop the delivery of energy from the energy source 92 to the ultrasound transducers 20.
  • The [0172] processing unit 100 also receives a power signal from the power calculation device 96. The power signal can be used to determine the power being received by each ultrasound transducer 20. The determined power can then be displayed to the user on the user interface and display 102.
  • The feedback control system can maintain the tissue adjacent to the [0173] ultrasound transducers 20 within a desired temperature range for a selected period of time. As described above, the ultrasound transducers 20 can be electrically connected so each ultrasound transducer 20 can generate an independent output. The output maintains a selected energy at each ultrasound transducer 20 for a selected length of time.
  • The [0174] processing unit 100 can be a digital or analog controller, or a computer with software. When the processing unit 100 is a computer it can include a CPU coupled through a system bus. The user interface and display 102 can be a mouse, keyboard, a disk drive, or other non-volatile memory systems, a display monitor, and other peripherals, as are known in the art. Also coupled to the bus is a program memory and a data memory.
  • In lieu of the series of power adjustments described above, a profile of the power delivered to each [0175] ultrasound transducer 20 can be incorporated in the processing unit 100 and a preset amount of energy to be delivered may also be profiled. The power delivered to each ultrasound transducer 20 can then be adjusted according to the profiles.
  • The above catheters are suitable for locally delivering a media including a light activated drug. Suitable light activated drugs include, but are not limited to, fluorescein, merocyanin. However, preferred light activated drugs' include xanthene and its derivatives and the photoreactive pyrrole-derived macrocycles and their derivatives due to a reduced toxicity and an increased biological affinity. Suitable photoreactive pyrrole-derived macrocycles include, but are not limited to, naturally occurring or synthetic porphyrins, naturally occurring or synthetic chlorins, naturally occurring or synthetic bacteriochlorins, synthetic isobateriochlorins, phthalocyanines, naphtalocyanines, and expanded pyrrole-based macrocyclic systems such as porphycenes, sapphyrins, and texaphyrins. Examples of suitable pyrrole-based macrocyclic classes are illustrated in FIGS. [0176] 17A-N.
  • As described above, the derivative of the pyrrole-based macrocycle classes can be used. For the purposes of illustrating some of the derivatives a macrocycle class, FIGS. [0177] 17B-2 illustrates a formula for the derivatives of texaphyrin: where M is H, CH3, a divalent metal cation selected from the group consisting of Ca(II), Mn(II), Co(II), Ni(II), Zn(II), Cd(II), Hg(II), Fe(II), Sm(II), and UO(II) or a trivalent metal cation selected from the group consisting of Mn(III), Co(III), Ni(III), Fe(III), Ho(III), Ce(III), Y(III), In(III), Pr(III), Nd(III), Sm(III), Eu(III), Gd(III), Tb(III), Dy(III), Er(III), Tm(III), Yb(III), Lu(III), La(III), and U(III). Preferred metals include Lu(III), Dy(III), Eu(III), or Gd(III). M may be H or CH3 in a non-metalated form of texaphyrin. R1, R2, R3, R4, R5 and R6 can independently be hydrogen, hydroxyl, alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxy, hydroxyalkoxy, saccharide, carboxyalkyl, carboxyamidealkyl, a site-directing molecule, or a linker to a site-directing molecule where at least one of R1, R2, R3, R4, R5 and R6 is hydroxyl, hydroxyalkoxy, saccharide, alkoxy, carboxyalkyl, carboxyamidealkyl, hydroxyalkyl, a site-directing molecule or a couple to a site-directing molecule; and N is an integer less than or equal to 2.
  • A preferred paramagnetic metal complex is the Gd(III) complex of 4,5-diethyl-10,23-dimethyl-9,24-bis(3-hydroxypropyl)-16,17-bis[2-(2-methoxyethoxy)ethoxy]ethoxy-13,20,25,26,27-pentaazapentacyclo [20.2.1[0178] 3,6.18,11.014,19]heptacosa-1,3,5,7,9,11 (27),12,14(19),15,17,20,22(25),23-tridecaene (“GdT2BET”) and a preferred diamagnetic metal complex is the Lu(III) complex of 4,5-diethyl-10,23dimethyl-9,24-bis(3-hydroxypropyl)-16,17-bis[2-[2-(2-methoxyethoxy)ethoxy]ethoxy]-13,20,25,26,27-pentaazapentacyclo[20.2.1.1 3,6.18,11.014,19]heptacosa-1,3,5,7,9,11(27),12,14(19),15,17,20,22(25),23-tridecaene (“LuT2BET”).
  • R[0179] 1, R2, R3, R4, R5 and R6 may also independently be amino, carboxy, carboxamide, ester, amide sulfonato, aminoalkyl, sulfonatoalkyl, amidealkyl, aryl, etheramide or equivalent formulae conferring the desired properties. In a preferred embodiment, at least one of R1, R2, R3, R4, R5 and R6 is a site-directing molecule or is a couple to a site-directing molecule. For bulky R groups on the benzene ring portion of the molecule such as oligonucleotides, one skilled in the art would realize that derivatization at one position on the benzene potion is more preferred.
  • Hydroxyalkyl means alkyl groups having hydroxyl groups attached. Alkoxy means alkyl groups attached to an oxygen. Hydroxyalkoxy means alkyl groups having ether or ester linkages, hydroxyl groups, substituted hydroxyl groups, carboxyl groups, substituted carboxyl groups or the like. Saccharide includes oxidized, reduced or substituted saccharide; hexoses such as D-glucose, D-mannose or D-galactose; pentoses such as D-ribose or D-arabinose; ketoses such as D-ribulose or D-fructose; disaccharides such as sucrose, lactose, or maltose; derivatives such as acetals, amines, and phosphorylated sugars; oligosacchrides, as well as open chain forms of various sugars, and the like. Examples of amine-derivatized sugars are galactosamine, glucosamine, and sialic acid. Carboxyamidealkyl means alkyl groups with secondary or tertiary amide linkages or the like. Carboxyalkyl means alkyl groups having hydroxyl groups, carboxyl or amide substituted ethers, ester linkages, tertiary amide linkages removed from the ether or the like. [0180]
  • For the above-described texaphyrins, hydroxyalkoxy may be alkyl having independently hydroxy substituents and ether branches or may be C[0181] (n−x)H((2n+1)−2x)OxOy or OC(n−x)H((2n+1)−2x)OxOy where n is a positive integer from 1 to 10, x is zero or a positive integer less than or equal to n, and y is zero or a positive integer less than or equal to ((2n+1)−2x). The hydroxyalkoxy or saccharide may be CnH((2n+1)−q)OyRa q, OCnH((2n+1)−q)OyRa q or (CH2)nCO2Ra where n is a positive integer from 1 to 10, y is zero or a positive integer less than ((2n+1)−q), q is zero or a positive integer less than or equal to 2n+1, and Ra is independently H, alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, saccharide, C(m−w)H((2m+1)−2w)OwOz, O2CC(m−w)H((2m+1)−2w)OwOz or N(R)OCC(m−w)H((2m+1)−2w)OwOz. In this case, m is a positive integer from 1 to 10, w is zero or a positive integer less than or equal to m, z is zero or a positive integer less than or equal to ((2 m+1)−2w), and R is H, alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, or CmH((2m+1)−r)OZRb r where m is a positive integer from 1 to 10, z is zero or a positive integer less than ((2m+1)−r), r is zero or a positive integer less than or equal to 2m+1, and Rb is independently H, alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, or saccharide.
  • Carboxyamidealkyl may be alkyl having secondary or tertiary amide linkages or (CH[0182] 2)nCONHRa, O(CH2)nCONHRa, (CH2)nCON(Ra)2, or O(CH2)nCON(R1)2 where n is a positive integer from 1 to 10, and R is independently H, alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, saccharide, C(m−w)H((2n+1)−2w)OwOz, O2CC(m−w)H((2m+1)−2w)OwOz, N(R)OCC(m−w)H((2m+1)−2w)OwOz, or a site-directing molecule. In this case, m is a positive integer from 1 to 10, w is zero or a positive integer less than or equal to ((2M+1)−2w), and R is H, alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, or CmH((2m+1)−r)OzRb r. In this case, m is a positive integer from 1 to 10, w is zero or a positive integer less than or equal to m, z is zero or a positive integer less than or equal to ((2M+1) r), r is zero or a positive integer less than or equal to 2 m+1, and Rb is independently H, alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, or saccharide. In a preferred embodiment, Ra is an oligonucleotide.
  • Carboxyalkyl may be alkyl having a carboxyl substituted ether, an amide substituted ether or a tertiary amide removed from an ether or C[0183] nH((2n+1)−q)OyRc q or OCnH((2n+1)−q)OyRc q where n is a positive integer from 1 to 10; y is zero or a positive integer less than ((2n+1)−q), q is zero or a positive integer less than or equal to 2n+1, and Rc is (CH2)nCO2Rd, (CH2)nCOHRd, (CH2)nCON(Rd)2 or a site-directing molecule. In this case, n is a positive integer from 1 to 10, Rd is independently H, alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, saccharide, C(m−w)H((2m+1)−2w)OwOz, O2CC(m-w)H((2m+1)−2w)OwOz or N(R)OCC(m−w)H((2m+1)−2w)OwOz. In this case, m is a positive integer from 1 to 10, z is zero or a positive integer less than ((2m+1)−2w), and R is H, alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, or CmH((2m+1)−r)OzRb r. In this case, m is a positive integer from 1 to 10, z is zero or a positive integer less than ((2m+1)−r), r is zero or a positive integer less than or equal to 2M+1, and Rb is independently H, alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, or saccharide. In a preferred embodiment, Rc is an oligonucleotide.
  • Exemplary texaphyrins are listed in Table 1. [0184]
    TABLE 1
    Representative Substitutes for Texaphyrin Macrocycles
    TXP R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6
    A1 CH2(CH2)2OH CH2CH3 CH2CH3 CH3 O(CH2)3OH O(CH2)3OH
    A2 O(CH2CH2O)3CH3 O(CH2CH2O)3CH3
    A3 O(CH2)nCON-
    linker-site-
    directing
    molecule, n = 1-7
    A4 O(CH2)nCON- H
    linker-site-
    directing
    molecule
    A5 OCH2CO-hormone
    A6 O(CH2CH2O)3CH3
    A7 OCH2CON-linker- O(CH2CH2O)3CH3
    site-directing
    molecule
    A8 OCH2CO-hormone
    A9 O(CH2CH2O)120CH3 O(CH2CH2O)3CH2
    CH2—N-imidazole
    A10 saccharide H
    A11 OCH2CON—
    (CH2CH2OH)2
    A12 CH2CON(CH3)CH2
    (CHOH)4CH2OH
    A13 COOH COOH CH2CON(CH3)CH2
    (CHOH)4CH2OH
    A14 COOCH2CH3 COOCH2CH3 CH2CON(CH3)CH2
    (CHOH)4CH2OH
    A15 Ch2CH2CON(CH2CH2OH)2 CH2CH2 CH2CH3 CH2CON(CH3)CH2
    (CHOH)4CH2OH
    A16 CH2CH2ON(CH3)CH2 OCH3 OCH3
    (CHOH)4CH2OH
    A17 CH2(CH2)2OH O(CH2)nCOOH, n = 1-7 H
    A18 (CH2)n—CON-
    linker-site-directing
    molecule, n = 1-7
    A19 YCOCH2-linker-
    site-directing
    molecule
    Y = NH, O
    A20 CH2CH3 CH3 CH2CH2COOH O(CH2)2CH2OH O(CH2)2CH2OH
    A21 CH2CH2CON-oligo
    A22 CH2(CH2)2OH CH2CH3 CH2CH3 O(CH2)3CO-histamine H
  • Preferred pyrrole-based macrocycles include, but are not limited to the hydro-monobenzoporphyrins (the so-called “fi porphyrine” or “Gp” compounds) disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,920,143 and 4,883,790 which are incorporated herein by reference. Typically, these compounds are poorly water-soluble (less than 1 mg/ml) or water-insoluble. Gp is preferably selected from the group consisting of those compounds having one of the formulae A-F set forth in FIGS. [0185] 18A-F, mixtures thereof, and the metalated and labeled forms thereof.
  • In FIGS. [0186] 18A-F, R1 and R2 can be independently selected from the group consisting of carbalkoxy (2-6C), alkyl (1-6C) sulfonyl, aryl (6-10C), sulfonyl, aryl (6-10C), cyano, and —CONR5CO— wherein R5 is aryl (6-10C) or alkyl (1-6C). Preferably, however, each of R1 and R2 is carbalkoxy (2-6C). R3 can be independently carboxyalkyl (2-6C) or a salt, amide, ester or acylhydrazone thereof, or is alkyl (1-6C). Preferably R3 is —CH2CH2COOH or a salt, amide, ester or acylhydrazone thereof.
  • R[0187] 4 is —CHCH2; —CHOR4′ wherein R4′ is H or alkyl (1-6C), optionally substituted with a hydrophilic substituent; —CHO; —COOR4′; CH(OR4′)CH3; CH(OR4′) CH2OR4′; —CH(SR4′)CH3; —CHNR4′ 2)CH3; —CH(CN)CH3; —CH(COOR4′)CH3; —CH(OOCR4′)CH3; —CH(halo)CH3; —CH(halo)CH2(halo); an organic group of <12C resulting from direct or indirect derivatization of a vinyl group; or R4 consists of 1-3 tetrapyrrole-type nuclei of the formula -L-P, wherein -L- is selected from the group consisting of
    Figure US20040059313A1-20040325-C00001
  • and P is a second Gp, which is one of the formulae A-F (FIG. 18) but lacks R[0188] 4, or another porphyrin group. When P is another porphyrin group, P preferably has the formula illustrated in FIG. 19: wherein each R is independently H or lower alkyl (1-4C); two of the four bonds shown as unoccupied on adjacent rings are joined to R3; one of the remaining bonds shown as unoccupied is joined to R4; and the other is joined to L; with the proviso that, if R4 is —CHCH2, both R3 groups cannot be carbalkoxyethyl. The preparation and use of such compounds is disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,920,143 and 4,883,790, which are hereby incorporated by reference.
  • Even more preferred for including in liposomes are light activated drugs that are designated as benzoporphyrin derivatives (“BPD's”). BPD's are hydrolyzed forms, or partially hydrolyzed forms, of the rearranged products of formula A-C or formula A-D, where one or both of the protected carboxyl groups of R[0189] 3 are hydrolyzed. Particularly preferred is the compound referred to as BPD-MA in FIGS. 20A-D, which has two equally active regioisomers.
  • As described above, activating a light activated drug included in a microbubble can enhance rupture of the microbubble. Preferred light activated drugs for including in a microbubble to enhance rupture of the microbubble include Hematporphyrin, Rose Bengal, Eosin Y, Erythrocin, Rhodamine B, and PHOTOFRIN. The formulae for these preferred light activated drugs are illustrated in FIGS. [0190] 21A-B where Rose Bengal, Eosin Y, Erythrocin and Rhodamine B are xanthene derivatives.
  • As discussed above, the light activated drug can be coupled with a site directing molecule to form a light activated drug conjugate. Suitable site-directing molecules include, but are not limited to: polydeoxyribonucleotides, oligodeoxyribonucleotides, polyribonucleotide analogs, oligoribonucleotide analogs; polyamides including peptides having an affinity for a biological receptor and proteins such as antibodies; steroids and steroid derivatives; hormones such as estradiol or histamine; hormone mimics such as morphine and further macrocycles such as sapphyrins and rubyrins. It is understood that the terms “nucleotide”, “polynucleotide”, and “oligonucleotide”, as used herein and in the appended claims, refer to both naturally occurring and synthetic nucleotides, poly- and oligonucleotides and to analogs and derivatives thereof such as methylphosphonates, phosphotriesters, phosphorothioates, and phosphoramidates and the like. Deoxyribonucleotides and ribonucleotide analogs are contemplated as site-directing molecules. [0191]
  • When the site-directing molecule is an oligonucleotide, the oligonucleotide may be derivatized at the bases, the sugars, the end of the chains, or at the phosphate groups of the backbone to promote in vivo stability. Modifications of the phosphate groups are preferred in one embodiment since phosphate linkages are sensitive to nuclease activity. Preferred derivatives are the methylphosphonates, phosphotriesters, phosphorothioates, and phosphoramidates. Additionally, the phosphate linkages may be completely substituted with non-phosphate linkages such as amide linkages. Appendages to the ends of the oligonucleotide chains also provide exonuclease resistance. Sugar modifications may include alkyl groups attached to an oxygen of a ribose moiety in a ribonucleotide. In particular, the alkyl group is preferably a methyl group and the methyl group is attached to the 2′ oxygen of the ribose. Other alkyl groups may be ethyl or propyl. [0192]
  • A linker may be used to couple the light activated drug with the site directing molecule. Exemplary linkers include, but are not limited to, amides, amine, thioether, ether, or phosphate covalent bonds as described in the examples for attachment of oligonucleotides. In a preferred embodiment, an oligonucleotide or other site-directing molecules is covalently bonded to a texaphyrin or other light activated drugs via a carbon-nitrogen, carbon-sulfur, or a carbon-oxygen bond. [0193]
  • As described above, the media can be an emulsion which includes a light activated drug. The emulsions described below are suitable for delivery into a body since they avoid pharmaceutically undesirable organic solvents, solubilizers, oils or emulsifiers. A wide range of light activated drug concentrations can be used in the emulsion. Suitable concentrations of light activated drug within the emulsion include, but are not limited to, approximately 0.01 to 1 gram/100 ml, preferably about 0.05 to about 0.5 gram/100 ml, and approximately 0.1 g/100 ml. [0194]
  • The emulsion includes a lipoid as a hydrophobic component dispersed in a hydrophilic phase. The hydrophobic component of the emulsion comprises a pharmaceutically acceptable triglyceride, such as an oil or fat of a vegetable or animal nature, and preferably is selected from the group consisting of soybean oil, safflower oil, marine oil, black current seed oil, borage oil, palm kernel oil, cotton seed oil, corn oil, sunflower seed oil, olive oil or coconut oil. Physical mixtures of oils and/or interesterfied mixtures can be employed. The preferred oils are medium chain length triglycerides having C[0195] 8-C10 chain length and more preferably saturated. The preferred triglyceride is a distillate obtained from coconut oil. The hydrophobic content of the emulsion is preferably approximately 5 to 50 g/100 ml, more preferably about 10 to about 30 g/100 ml and approximately 20 g/100 ml of the emulsion.
  • The emulsion can also contains a stabilizer such as phosphatides, soybean phospholipids, nonionic block copolymers of polyoxethylene and polyoxpropylene (e.g. poloxamers), synthetic or semi-synthetic phospholipids, and the like. The preferred stabilizer is purified egg yolk phospholipid. The stabilizer is usually present in the composition in amounts of about 0.1 to about 10, and preferably about 0.3 to about 3 grams/100 ml, a typical example being about 1.5 grams/100 ml. [0196]
  • The emulsion can also include one or more bile acids salts as a costablizer. The salts are pharmacologically acceptable salts of bile acids selected from the group of cholic acid, deoxycholic acid and gylcocholic acid, and preferably of cholic acid. The salts are typically alkaline metal or alkaline earth metal salts and preferably sodium, potassium, calcium or magnesium salts, and most preferably, sodium salts. Mixtures of bile acid salts can be employed if desired. The amount of bile acid salt employed is usually about 0.01 to about 1.0 and preferably about 0.05 to about 0.4 grams/100 ml, a typical example being about 0.2 grams/100 ml. [0197]
  • Suitable pH for the emulsion includes, but is not limited to approximately 7.5 to 9.5, and preferably approximately 8.5. The pH can be adjusted to the desired value, if necessary, by adding a pharmaceutically acceptable base, such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, calcium hydroxide, magnesium hydroxide and ammonium hydroxide. [0198]
  • Water can be added to the emulsion to achieve the desired concentration of various components within the emulsion. Further, the emulsion can include auxiliary ingredients for regulating the osmotic pressure to make the emulsion isotonic with the blood. Suitable auxiliary ingredients include, but are not limited to, auxiliary surfactants, isotonic agents, antioxidants, nutritive agents, trace elements and vitamins. Suitable isotonic agents include, but are not limited to, glycerin, amino acids, such as alanine, histidine, glycine, and/or sugar alcohols, such as xylitol, sorbitol and/or mannitol. Suitable concentrations for isotonic agents within the emulsion include, but are not limited to, approximately 0.2 to about 8.0 grams/100 ml and preferably about 0.4 to about 4 grams/100 ml and most preferably 1.5 to 2.5 gram/100 ml. [0199]
  • Antioxidants can be used to enhance the stability of the emulsion, a typical example being α-tocopherol. Suitable concentrations for the antioxidants include, but are not limited to approximately 0.005 to 0.5 grams/100 ml, approximately 0.02 to about 0.2 grams/100 ml and most preferably approximately 0.05 to 0.15 grams/100 ml. [0200]
  • The emulsions can also contain auxiliary solvents, such as an alcohol, such as ethyl alcohol or benzyl alcohol, with ethyl alcohol being preferred. When employed, such is typically present in amounts of about 0.1 to about 4.0, and preferably about 0.2 to about 2 grams/100 ml, a typical example being about 1 gram/100 ml. The ethanol is advantageous since it facilitates dissolution of poorly water-soluble light activated drugs and especially those that form crystals which may be very difficult to dissolve in the hydrophobic phase. Accordingly, the ethanol must be added directly to the hydrophobic phase during preparation to be effective. For maximum effectiveness, the ethanol should constitute about 5% to 15% by weight of the hydrophobic phase. In particular, if ethanol constitutes less than 5% by weight of the hydrophobic phase, dissolution of the light activated drug can become unacceptably slow. When the ethanol concentration exceeds 15%, large (>5 μm diameter) and poorly emulsified oil droplets can form in the emulsion. The particles in the emulsion are preferably less than about 5.0 μm in diameter, more preferably less than 2.0 μm in diameter and most preferably less than 0.5 μm or below. [0201]
  • A typical emulsion is prepared using the following technique. The triglyceride oil is heated to 50°-70° C. while sparging with nitrogen gas. The required amounts of stabilizer (e.g. egg yolk phospholipids), bile acid salt, alcohol (e.g. ethanol), antioxidant (e.g. α-to-copherol) and light activated drug are added to the triglyceride while processing for about 5 to about 20 minutes with a high speed blender or overhead mixer to ensure complete dissolution or uniform suspension. [0202]
  • In a separate vessel, the required amounts of water and isotonic agent (e.g. -glycerin) are heated to the above temperature (e.g. 50°-70°) while sparging with nitrogen gas. Next, the aqueous phase is transferred into the prepared hydrophobic phase and high speed blending is continued for another 5 to 10 minutes to produce a uniform but coarse preemulsion (or premix). This premix is then transferred to a conventional high pressure homogenizer (APV Gaulin) for emulsification at about 8,000-10,000 psi. The diameter of the dispersed oil droplets in the finished emulsion will be less than 5 μm, with a large proportion less than 1 μm. The mean diameter of these oil droplets will be less than 1 μm, preferably from 0.2 to 0.5 μm. The emulsion product is then filled into borosilicate (Type 1) glass vials which are stoppered, capped and terminally heat sterilized in a rotating steam autoclave at about 121° C. [0203]
  • These emulsions can withstanding autoclaving as well as freezing at about 0° to −20° C. Such can be stored for a relatively long time with minimal physical and chemical breakdown, i.e. at least 12-18 months at 4°-8° C. The vehicle composition employed is chemically inert with respect to the incorporated pharmacologically active light activated drug. [0204]
  • The emulsions can exhibit very low toxicity following intravenous administration and exhibit no venous irritation and no pain on injection. The emulsions exhibit minimal physical and chemical changes (e.e. formation of non-emulsified surface oil) during controlled shake-testing on a horizontal platform. Moreover, the oil-in-water emulsions promote desirable pharmacoldnetics and tissue distribution of the light activated drug in vivo. [0205]
  • As discussed above, the light activated drug can also be delivered to the body in a media which includes microbubbles. Suitable substrates for the microbubble include, but are not limited to, biocompatible polymers, albumins, lipids, sugars or other substances. U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,701,899 and 5,578,291 teaches a method for synthesizing microbubbles with a sugar and protein substrate and is incorporated herein by reference. U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,665,383 and 5,665,382 teaches a method for synthesizing microbubbles with a polymeric substrate and is incorporated herein by reference. U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,626,833 and 5,798,091 teach methods for synthesizing microbubbles with a surfactant substrate and are incorporated herein by reference. A preferred microbubble has a lipid substrate. U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,772,929 teaches methods for synthesizing microbubbles with a lipid substrate. U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,776,429, 5,715,824 and 5,770,222 teach preferred methods for synthesizing microbubbles with a lipid substrate and a gas interior and are incorporated herein by reference. [0206]
  • Suitable microbubbles with a lipid substrate can be liposomes. The liposomes can be unilamellar vesicles having a single membrane bilayer or multilamellar vesicles having multiple membrane bilayers, each bilayer being separated from the next by an aqueous layer. A liposome bilayer is composed of two lipid monolayers having a hydrophobic “tail” region and a hydrophilic “head” region. The formula of the membrane bilayer is such that the hydrophobic (nonpolar) “tails” of the lipid monolayers orient themselves towards the center of the bilayer, while the hydrophilic “heads” orient themselves toward the aqueous phase. Either unilamellar or multilamellar or other types of liposomes may be used. [0207]
  • A hydrophilic light activated drug can be entrapped in the aqueous phase of the liposome before the drug is delivered into the patient. Alternatively, if the light activated drug is lipophilic, it may associate with the lipid bilayer. Liposomes may be used to help “target” the light activated drug to an active site or to solubilize hydrophobic light activated drugs. Light activated drugs are typically hydrophobic and form stable drug-lipid complexes. [0208]
  • As discussed above, many light activated drugs have low solubility in water at physiological pH's, but are also insoluble in (1) pharmaceutically acceptable aqueous-organic co-solvents, (2) aqueous polymeric solutions and (3) surfactant/micellar solutions. However, such light activated drugs can still be “solubilized” in a form suitable for delivery into a body by using a liposome composition. For example, one example of a light activated drug BPD-MA (See Formula A of FIG. 20) can be “solubilized” at a concentration of about 2.0 mg/ml in aqueous solution using an appropriate mixture of phospholipids to form encapsulating liposomes. [0209]
  • Although the light activated drug can be included in many different types of liposomes, the following description discloses particular liposome compositions and methods for making the liposomes which are known to be “fast breaking”. In fast breaking liposomes, the light activated drug-liposome combination is stable in vitro but, when administered in vivo, the light activated drug is rapidly released into the bloodstream where it can associate with serum lipoproteins. As a result, the localized delivery of liposomes combined with the fast breaking nature of the liposomes can result in localization of the light activated drug in the tissues near the catheter. Further, the fast breaking liposomes can prevent the liposomes from leaving the vicinity of the catheter intact and then concentrating in non-targeted tissues such as the liver. Delivery of ultrasound energy from the catheter can also serve to break apart the liposomes after they have been delivered from the catheter. [0210]
  • Liposomes are typically formed spontaneously by adding water to a dry lipid film. Liposomes which include light activated drugs can include a mixture of the commonly encountered lipids dimyristoyl phosphatidyl choline (“DMPC”) and egg phosphatidyl glycerol (“EPG”). The presence of DMPC is important because DMPC is the major component in the composition to form liposomes which can solubilize and encapsulate insoluble light activated drugs into a lipid bilayer. The presence of EPG is important because the negatively charged, polar head group of this lipid can prevent aggregation of the liposomes. [0211]
  • Other phospholipids, in addition to DMPC and EPG, may also be present. Examples of suitable additional phospholipids that may also be incorporated into the liposomes include phosphatidyl cholines (PCS), including mixtures of dipalmitoyl phosphatidyl choline (DPPC) and distearoyl phosphatidyl choline (DSPC). Examples of suitable phosphatidyl glycerols (PGs) include dimyristoyl phosphatidyl glycerol (DMPG), DLPG and the like. [0212]
  • Other types of suitable lipids that may be included are phosphatidyl ethanolamines (PEs), phosphatidic acids (PAs), phosphatidyl serines, and phosphatidyl inositols. [0213]
  • The molar ratio of the light activated drug to the DMPC/EPG phospholipid mixture can be as low as 1:7.0 or may contain a higher proportion of phospholipid, such as 1:7.5. Preferably, this molar ratio is 1:8 or more phospholipid, such as 1:10, 1:15, or 1:20. This molar ratio depends upon the exact light activated drug being used, but will assure the presence of a sufficient number of DMPC and EPG lipid molecules to form a stable complex with many light activated drugs. When the number of lipid molecules is not sufficient to form a stable complex, the lipophilic phase of the lipid bilayer becomes saturated with light activated drug molecules. Then, any slight change in the process conditions can force some of the previously encapsulated light activated drug to leak out of the vesicle, onto the surface of the lipid bilayer, or even out into the aqueous phase. [0214]
  • If the concentration of light activated drug is high enough, it can actually precipitate out from the aqueous layer and promote aggregation of the liposomes. The more unencapsulated light activated drug that is present, the higher the degree of aggregation. The more aggregation, the larger the mean particle size will be, and the more difficult aseptic or sterile filtration will be. As a result, small changes in the molar ratio can be important in achieving proper filterability of the liposome composition. [0215]
  • Accordingly, slight increases in the lipid content can increase significantly the filterability of the liposome composition by increasing the ability to form and maintain small particles. This is particularly advantageous when working with significant volumes of 500 ml, a liter, five liters, 40 liters, or more, as opposed to smaller batches of about 100-500 ml or less. This volume effect is thought to occur because larger homogenizing devices tend to provide less efficient agitation than can be accomplished easily on a small scale. For example, a large size Microfluidizer™ has a less efficient interaction chamber than that one of a smaller size. [0216]
  • A molar ratio of 1.05:3:5 BPD-MA:EPG:DMPC (i.e., slightly less phospholipid than 1:8.0 light activated drug:phospholipid) may provide marginally acceptable filterability in small batches of up to 500 ml. However, when larger volumes of the composition are being made, a higher molar ratio of phospholipid provides more assurance of reliable aseptic filterability. Moreover, the substantial potency losses that are common in scale-up batches, due at least in part to filterability problems, can thus be avoided. [0217]
  • Any cryoprotective agent known to be useful in the art of preparing freeze-dried formulations, such as di- or polysaccharides or other bulking agents such as lysine, may be used. Further, isotonic agents typically added to maintain isomolarity with body fluids may be used. In a preferred embodiment, a di-saccharide or polysaccharide is used and functions both as a cryoprotective agent and as an isotonic agent. [0218]
  • In a particular embodiment, the particular combination of the phospholipids, DMPC and EPG, and a disaccharide or polysaccharide form a liposomal composition having liposomes of a particularly narrow particle size distribution. When the process of hydrating a lipid film is prolonged, larger liposomes tend to be formed, or the light activated drug can even begin to precipitate. The addition of a disaccharide or polysaccharide provides instantaneous hydration and the large surface area for depositing a thin film of the drug-phospholipid complex. This thin film provides for faster hydration so that, when the liposome is initially formed by adding the aqueous phase, the liposomes formed are of a smaller and more uniform particle size. This provides significant advantages in terms of manufacturing ease. [0219]
  • However, it is also possible that, when a saccharide is present in the composition, it is added after dry lipid film formation, as a part of the aqueous solution used in hydration. In a particularly preferred embodiment, a saccharide is added to the dry lipid film during hydration. [0220]
  • Disaccharides or polysaccharides are preferred to monosaccharides for this purpose. To keep the osmotic pressure of the liposome composition similar to that of blood, no more than 4-5% monosaccharides could be added. In contrast, about 9-10% of a disaccharide can be used without generating an unacceptable osmotic pressure. The higher amount of disaccharide provides for a larger surface area, which results in smaller particle sizes being formed during hydration of the lipid film. [0221]
  • Accordingly, the preferred liposomal composition comprises a disaccharide or polysaccharide, in addition to the light activated drug and the mixture of DMPC and EPG phospholipids. When present, the disaccharide or polysaccharide is preferably chosen from among the group consisting of lactose, trehalose, maltose, maltotriose, palatinose, lactulose or sucrose, with lactose or trehalose being preferred. Even more preferably, the liposomes comprise lactose or trehalose. [0222]
  • Also, when present, the disaccharide or polysaccharide is formulated in a preferred ratio of about 10-20 saccharide to 0.5-6.0 DMPC/EPG phospholipid mixture, respectively, even more preferably at a ratio from about 10 to 1.5-4.0. In one embodiment, a preferred but not limiting formulation is lactose or trehalose and a mixture of DMPC and EPG in a concentration ratio of about 10 to 0.94-1.88 to about 0.65-1.30, respectively. [0223]
  • The presence of the disaccharide or polysaccharide in the composition not only tends to yield liposomes having extremely small and narrow particle size ranges, but also provides a liposome composition in which light activated drugs, in a particular, may be stably incorporated in an efficient manner, i.e., with an encapsulation efficiency approaching 80-100%. Moreover, liposomes made with a saccharide typically exhibit improved physical and chemical stability, such that they can retain an incorporated light activated drug without leakage upon prolonged storage, either as a reconstituted liposomal or as a cryodesiccated powder. [0224]
  • Other optional ingredients include minor amounts of nontoxic, auxiliary substances in the liposomal composition, such as antioxidants, e.g., butylated hydroxytoluene, alphatocopherol and ascorbyl palmitate; pH buggering agents, e.g., phosphates, glycine, and the like. [0225]
  • Liposomes containing a light activated drug may be prepared by combining the light activated drug and the DMPC and EPG phospholipids (and any other optional phospholipids or excipients, such as antioxidants) in the presence of an organic solvent. Suitable organic solvents include any volatile organic solvent, such as diethyl ether, acetone, methylene chloride, chloroform, piperidine, piperidine-water mixtures, methanol, tert-butanol, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, and mixtures thereof. Preferably, the organic solvent is water-immiscible, such as methylene chloride, but water immiscibility is not required. In any event, the solvent chosen should not only be able to dissolve all of the components of the lipid film, but should also not react with, or otherwise deleteriously affect, these components to any significant degree. [0226]
  • The organic solvent is then removed from the resulting solution to form a dry lipid film by any known laboratory technique that is not deleterious to the dry lipid film and the light activated drug. Preferably, the solvent is removed by placing the solution under a vacuum until the organic solvent is evaporated. The solid residue is the dry lipid film. The thickness of the lipid film is not critical, but usually varies from about 30 to about 45 mg/cm[0227] 2, depending upon the amount of solid residual and the total area of the glass wall of the flask. Once formed, the film may be stored for an extended period of time, preferably not more than 4 to 21 days, prior to hydration. While the temperature during a lipid film storage period is also not an important factor, it is preferably below room temperature, most preferably in the range from about −20 to about 4° C.
  • The dry lipid film is then dispersed in an aqueous solution, preferably containing a disaccharide or polysaccharide, and homogenized to form the desired particle size. Examples of useful aqueous solutions used during the hydration step include sterile water; a calcium- and magnesium-free, phosphate-buffered (pH 7.2-7.4) sodium chloride solution; a 9.75% w/v lactose solution; a lactose-saline solution; 5% dextrose solution; or any other physiologically acceptable aqueous solution of one or more electrolytes. Preferably, however, the aqueous solution is sterile. The volume of aqueous solution used during hydration can vary greatly, but should not be so great as about 98% nor so small as about 30-40%. A typical range of useful volumes would be from about 75% to about 95%, preferably about 85% to about 90%. [0228]
  • Upon hydration, coarse liposomes are formed that incorporate a therapeutically effective amount of the light activated drugs-phospholipid complex. The “therapeutically effective amount” can vary widely, depending on the tissue to be treated and whether it is coupled to a target-specific ligand, such as an antibody or an immunologically active fragment. It should be noted that the various parameters used for selective photodynamic therapy are interrelated. Therefore, the therapeutically effective amount should also be adjusted with respect to other parameters, for example, fluence, irradiance, duration of the light used in photodynamic therapy, and the time interval between administration of the light activated drug and the therapeutic irradiation. Generally, all of these parameters are adjusted to produce significant damage to tissue deemed undesirable, such as neovascular or tumor tissue, without significant damage to the surrounding tissue, or to enable the observation of such undesirable tissue without significant damage to the surrounding tissue. [0229]
  • Typically, the therapeutically effective amount is such to produce a dose of light activated drug within a range of from about 0.1 to about 20 mg/kg, preferably from about 0.15-2.0 mg/kg and, even more preferably, from about 0.25 to about 0.75 mg/kg. Preferably, the w/v concentration of the light activated drug in the composition ranges from about 0.1 to about 8.0-10.0 g/L. Most preferably, the concentration is about 2.0 to 2.5 g/L. [0230]
  • The hydration step should take place at a temperature that does not exceed about 30° C., preferably below the glass transition temperature of the light activated drug-phospholipid complex formed, even more preferably at room temperature or lower, e.g., 15°-20° C. The glass transition temperature of the light activated drug-lipid complex can be measure by using a differential scanning microcalorimeter. [0231]
  • In accordance with the usual expectation that the aqueous solubility of a substance should increase as higher temperatures are used, at a temperature around the transition temperature of the complex, the lipid membrane tends to undergo phase transition from a “solid” gel state to a pre-transition state and, finally, to a more “fluid” liquid crystal state. At these higher temperatures, however, not only does fluidity increase, but the degree of phase separation and the proportion of membrane defects also increases. This results in an increasing degree of leakage of the light activated drug from inside the membrane to the interface and event out into the aqueous phase. Once a significant amount of liposome leakage has occurred, even slight changes in the conditions such as a small drop in temperature, can shift the equilibrium away from aqueous “solubility” in favor of precipitation of the light activated drug. Moreover, once the typically water-insoluble light activated drug begins to precipitate, it is not possible to re-encapsulate it when the lipid bilayer. The precipitate is thought to contribute significantly to filterability problems. [0232]
  • In addition, the usual thickness of a lipid bilayer in the “solid” gel state (about 47 A) decreases in the transition to the “liquid” crystalline state to about 37 A, thus shrinking the entrapped volume available for the light activated drugs to occupy. The smaller “room” is not capable of containing as great a volume of light activated drug, which can then be squeezed out of the saturated lipid bilayer interstices. Any two or more liposomes exuding light activated drug may aggregate together, introducing further difficulties with respect to particle size reduction and ease of sterile filtration. Moreover, the use of higher hydration temperatures, such as, for example, about 35° to 45° C., can also result in losses of light activated drug potency as the light activated drug either precipitates or aggregates during aseptic filtration. [0233]
  • The particle sizes of the coarse liposomes first formed in hydration are then homogenized to a more uniform size, reduced to a smaller size range, or both, to about 150 to 300 nm, preferably also at a temperature that does not exceed about 30° C., preferably below the glass transition temperature of the light activated drug-phospholipid complex formed in the hydration step, and even more preferably below room temperature of about 25° C. Various high-speed agitation devices may be used during the homogenization step, such as a Microfluidizer™ model 110F; a sonicator; a high-shear mixer; a homogenizer; or a standard laboratory shaker. [0234]
  • It has been found that the homogenization temperature should be at room temperature or lower, e.g., 15°-20° C. At higher homogenization temperatures, such as about 32°-42° C., the relative filterability of the liposome composition may improve initially due to increased fluidity as expected, but then, unexpectedly, tends to decrease with continuing agitation due to increasing particle size. [0235]
  • Preferably, a high pressure device such a Microfluidizer™ is used for agitation. In microfluidization, a great amount of heat is generated during the short-period of time during which the fluid passes through a high pressure interaction chamber. In the interaction chamber, two streams of fluid at a high speed collide with each other at a 90° angle. As the microfluidization temperature increases, the fluidity of the membrane also increases, which initially makes particle size reduction easier, as expected. For example, filterability can increase by as much as four times with the initial few passes through a Microfluidizer™ device. The increase in the fluidity of the bilayer membrane promotes particle size reduction, which makes filtration of the final composition easier. In the initial several passes, this increased fluidity mechanism advantageously dominates the process. [0236]
  • However, as the number of passes and the temperature both increase, more of the hydrophobic light activated drug molecules are squeezed out of the liposomes, increasing the tendency of the liposomes to aggregate into larger particles. At the point at which the aggregation of vesicles begins to dominate the process, the sizes cannot be reduced any further. Surprisingly, particle sizes actually then tend to grow through aggregation. [0237]
  • For this reason, the homogenization temperature is cooled down to and maintained at a temperature no greater than room temperature after the composition passes through the zone of maximum agitation, e.g., the interaction chamber of a Microfluidizer™ device. An appropriate cooling system can easily be provided for any standard agitation device in which homogenization is to take place, e.g., a Microfluidizer™, such as by circulating cold water into an appropriate cooling jacket around the mixing chamber or other zone of maximum turbulence. While the pressure used in such high pressure devices is not critical, pressures from about 10,000 to about 16,000 psi are not uncommon. [0238]
  • As a last step, the compositions are preferably aseptically filtered through a filter having an extremely small pore size, i.e., 0.22 μm. Filter pressures used during sterile filtration can vary widely, depending on the volume of the composition, the density, the temperature, the type of filter, the filter pore size, and the particle size of the liposomes. However, as a guide, a typical set of filtration conditions would be as follows: filtration pressure of 15-25 psi; filtration load of 0.8 to 1.5 ml/cm[0239] 2; and filtration temperature of about 25° C.
  • A typical general procedure is described below with additional exemplary detail: [0240]
  • (1) Sterile filtration of organic solvent through a hydrophobic, 0.22 μm filter. [0241]
  • (2) Addition of EPG, DMPC, light activated drug, and excipients to the filtered organic solvent, dissolving both the excipients and the light activated drug. [0242]
  • (3) Filtration of the resulting solution through a 0.22 μm hydrophobic filter. [0243]
  • (4) Transfer of the filtrate to a rotary evaporator apparatus, such as that commercially available under the name Rotoevaporator™. [0244]
  • (5) Removal of the organic solvent to form a dry lipid film. [0245]
  • (6) Analysis of the lipid film to determine the level of organic solvent concentration. [0246]
  • (7) Preparation of a 10% lactose solution. [0247]
  • (8) Filtration of the lactose solution through a 0.22 μm hydrophilic filter. [0248]
  • (9) Hydration of the lipid film with a 10% lactose solution to form coarse liposomes. [0249]
  • (10) Reduction of the particle sizes of the coarse liposomes by passing them through a Microfluidizer™ three times. [0250]
  • (11) Determination of the reduced particle size distribution of liposomes. [0251]
  • (12) Aseptic filtration of the liposome composition through a 0.22 μm hydrophilic filter. (Optionally, the solution may first be pre-filtered with a 5.0 μm prefilter.) [0252]
  • (13) Analysis of light activated drug potency. [0253]
  • (14) Filling of vials with the liposome composition. [0254]
  • (15) Freeze-drying. [0255]
  • Once formulated, the liposome composition may be freeze-dried for long-term storage if desired. For example, BPD-MA, a preferred light activated drug, has maintained its potency in a cryodesiccated liposome composition for a period of at lest nine months at room temperature, and a shelf life of at least two years has been projected. If the composition is freeze-dried, it may be packed in vials for subsequent reconstitution with a suitable aqueous solution, such as sterile water or sterile water containing a saccharide and/or other suitable excipients, prior to administration, for example, by injection. [0256]
  • Preferably, liposomes that are to be freeze-dried are formed upon the addition of an aqueous vehicle contain a disaccharide or polysaccharide during hydration. The composition is then collected, placed into vials, freeze-dried, and stored, ideally under refrigeration. The freeze-dried composition can then be reconstituted by simply adding water for injection just prior to administration. [0257]
  • The liposomal composition provides liposomes of a sufficiently small and narrow particle size that the aseptic filtration of the composition through a 0.22 μm hydrophilic filter can be accomplished efficiently and with large volumes of 500 ml to a liter or more without significant clogging of the filter. A particularly preferred particle size range is below about 300 run, more preferably below from about 250 nm. Most preferably, the particle size is below about 220 nm. [0258]
  • Generally speaking, the concentration of the light activated drugs in the liposome depends upon the nature of the light activated drug used. When BPD-MA is used for example, the light activated drug is generally incorporated in the liposomes at a concentration of about 0.10% up to 0.5% w/v. If freeze-dried and reconstituted, this would typically yield a reconstituted solution of up to about 5.0 mg/ml light activated drug. [0259]
  • For diagnosis, the light activated drugs incorporated into liposomes may be used along with, or may be labeled with, a radioisotope or other detecting means. If this is the case, the detection means depends on the nature of the label. Scintigraphic labels such as technetium or indium can be detected using ex vivo scanners. Specific fluorescent labels can also be used but, like detection based on fluorescence of the light activated drugs themselves, these labels can require prior irradiation. [0260]
  • The methods of preparing various light activated drugs, light activated drug conjugates, emulsions and microbubbles are described in greater detail in the examples below. These examples are readily adapted to preparing analogous light activated drugs, light activated drug conjugates, emulsions and microbubbles by substitutions of appropriate light activated drugs, site directing molecule, phospholipids, and other analogous components. The following examples are being presented to describe the preferred components, embodiments, utilities and attributes of the media. For example, although BPD-MA is used as the light activated drugs in the microbubble (liposome) examples, the invention is not intended to be limited to this particular light activated drug. [0261]
  • Example 1 describes the synthesis of a preferred texaphyrin derivative. Examples 2-4 describe different light activated drugs conjugated with oligonucleotides as site directing molecules. Examples 5 and 6 describes a synthesis of an emulsion including a light activated drug. Example 7 describes preparation of microbubbles which include a light activated drug. [0262]
  • EXAMPLE 1 Synthesis of Texaphyrin T2BET Metal Complexes
  • The synthesis of texaphyrins is provided in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,935,498, 5,162,509 and 5,252,720, all incorporated by reference herein. The present example provides the synthesis of a preferred texaphyrin, named T2BET, having substituents containing ethoxy groups. [0263]
  • Lutetium(III) acetate hydrate can be purchased from Strem Chemicals, Inc. (Newburyport, Mass.), gadolinium(III) acetate tetrahydrate can be purchased from Aesar/Johnson Matthey (Ward Hill, Mass.) and LZY-54 zeolite can be purchased from UOP (Des Plaines, III.). Acetone, glacial acetic acid, methanol, ethanol, isopropyl alcohol, and n-heptanes can be purchased from J. T. Baker (Phillipsburg, N.J.). Triethylamine and Amberlite [0264] 904 anion exchange resin can be purchased from Aldrich (Milwaukee, Wisc.). All chemicals should be ACS grade and used without further purification.
  • FIGS. [0265] 22A-I illustrate the synthesis of the gadolinium (III) complex of 4,5-diethyl-10,23-dimethyl-9,24-bis(3-hydroxypropyl)-16,17-bis[2-[2-(2-methoxyethoxy) ethoxy]ethoxy]-pentaazapentacyclo [20.2.1.13,6.I8, 11.014,19]heptacosa-1,3,5,7,9,11(27),12,14,16,18,20,22(25),23-tridecaene which is illustrated as Formula I of FIG. 22. The critical intermediate 1,2-bis[2-[2-(2-methoxyethoxy)ethoxy)ethoxy]-4,5-dinitrobenzene (Formula E) can be prepared according to a three-step synthetic process outlined in FIGS. 22A-I. (Note: References to “Formula A,” “Formula B,” etc. relate to FIGS. 22A, 22B, etc.)
  • Synthesis of triethylene glycol monomethyl ether monotosylate, Formula B: In an oven dried 12 L three-necked roundbottom flask, equipped with a magnetic stir bar and a 1000 mL pressure-equalizing dropping funnel, a solution of NaOH (440.0 g, 11.0 mol) is added to 1800 mL water and the mixture is cooled to approximately 0° C. A solution of triethylene glycol monomethyl ether, Formula A, (656.84 g, 4.0 mol) in THF (1000 mL) is added. The clear solution is stirred vigorously at 0° C. for 15 min and a solution of tosyl chloride (915.12, 4.8 mol) in THF (2.0 L) added dropwise over a 1 h period. The reaction mixture is stirred for an additional 1 h at 0° C., and 10% HCl (5.0 L) is added to quench the reaction (to pH 5-7). The two-phase mixture is transferred to a 4 L separatory funnel, the organic layer removed, and the aqueous layer extracted with t-butylmethyl ether (3×250 mL). The combined organic extracts are washed with brine (2×350 mL), dried (MgSO[0266] 4), and evaporated under reduced pressure to afford Formula B, 1217.6 g (95%) as a light colored oil. This material is taken to the next step without further purification.
  • Synthesis of 1,2-bis[2-[2-(2-methoxyethoxy)ethoxy]ethoxy]benzene, Formula D: In a dry 5 L round-bottom flask equipped with an overhead stirrer, reflux condenser, and a gas line, K[0267] 2CO3 (439.47 g, 3.18 mol) and MeOH (1800 mL) are combined under an argon atmosphere. To this well-stirred suspension, catechol, Formula C, (140.24 g, 1.21 mol) is added, and the mixture heated to reflux. Formula B (1012.68 g, 3.18 mol) is then added in one portion. The suspension is stirred at reflux for 24 h, cooled to room temperature, and filtered through Celite. The pad is rinsed with 500 mL of methanol and the combined filtrates are evaporated under reduced pressure. The resulting brown residue is taken up in 10% NaOH (800 mL), and methylene chloride (800 mL) added with stirring. The mixture is transferred to a 2 L separatory funnel, the organic layer removed and the aqueous layer extracted with methylene chloride (3×350 mL). The organic extracts are combined, washed with brine (350 mL), dried (MgSO4), evaporated under reduced pressure, and the residue dried in vacuo for several hours to yield 485.6 (95%) of 1,2-bis[2-[2-(2-methoxyethoxy)ethoxy)ethoxy]benzene (Formula D). For Formula D: bp. 165°-220° C., (0.2-0.5 mm Hg); FAB MS, M+: m/e 402; HRMS, M+: 402.2258 (calcd. for C20H34O8, 402.2253).
  • Synthesis of 1,2-bis[2-[2-(2-methoxyetboxy)ethoxy]ethoxy]-4,5-dinitrobenzene, Formula E: In an oven dried 1 L roundbottom flask Formula D (104 g, 0.26 mol) and glacial acetic acid (120 mL) are combined and cooled to 5° C. To this well stirred solution, concentrated nitric acid (80 mL) is added dropwise over 15-20 min. The temperature of the mixture is held below 40° C. by cooling and proper regulation of the rate of addition of the acid. After addition, the reaction is allowed to stir for an additional 10-15 min and is then cooled to 0° C. Fuming nitric acid (260 mL) is added dropwise over 30 min while the temperature of the solution is held below 30° C. After the addition is complete, the red colored solution is allowed to stir at room temperature until the reaction is complete (ca. 5 h, TLC: 95/5; CH[0268] 2Cl2/MeOH) and then poured into well stirred ice water (1500 mL). Methylene chloride (400 mL) is added, the two-phase mixture transferred to a 2 L separatory funnel and the organic layer removed. The aqueous layer is extracted with CH2Cl2 (2×150 mL) and the combined organic extracts washed with 10% NaOH (2×250 mL) and brine (250 mL), dried (MgSO4), and concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting orange oil is dissolved in acetone (100 mL), and the solution layered with n-hexanes (500 mL), and stored in the freezer. The resulting precipitate is collected by filtration yield 101.69 g (80%) of Formula E as a yellow solid. For Formula E: mp 43°-45° C.; FAB MS, (M+H)+: m/e 493; HRMS, (M+H)+; 493; HRMS, (M+H)+: 493.2030 (calcd. for C20H33N2O12, 493.2033).
  • Synthesis of 1,2-diamino-4,5-bis[2-[2-(2-methoxy-ethoxy)ethoxy]ethoxy], Formula F: In an oven dried 500 mL round bottom flask, equipped with a Claisen adapter, pressure equalizing dropping funnel, and reflux condenser, 1,2-bis[2-[2-(2-methoxyethoxy)ethoxy]ethoxy]-4,5-dinitrobenzene (Formula E) (20 g, 0.04 mol) is dissolved in absolute ethanol (200 mL). To this clear solution, 10% palladium on carbon (4 g) is added and the dark black suspension is heated to reflux under an argon atmosphere. Hydrazine hydrate (20 mL) in EtOH (20 mL) is added dropwise over 10 min to avoid bumping. The resulting brown suspension is heated at reflux for 1.5 h at which time the reaction mixture is colorless and TLC analysis (95/5; CH[0269] 2Cl2/MeOH) displays a low R_UV active spot corresponding to the diamine. Therefore, the mixture is hot filtered through Celite and the pad rinsed with absolute ethanol (50 mL). The solvent is removed under reduced pressure and the resulting light brown oil is dried in vacuo (in the dark) for 24 h to yield 15.55 g (89%) of 1,2-diamino-bis[2-[2-(2-methoxyethoxy)ethoxy]ethoxy]benzene (Formula F). For Formula F: FAB MS, M+: in/e 432; HRMS, M+: 432.2471 (calcd. for C20H36N2O8, 432.2482). This material is taken to the next step without further purification.
  • Synthesis of 4,5-diethyl-10,23-dimethyl-9,24-bis(3-hydroxypropyl)-16,17-bis[2-[2-(2-methoxyethoxy)ethoxy]ethoxy]-13,20,25,26,27-pentaazapentacyclo[20.2.1.1[0270] 3,6. 18, 11.014,19] heptacosa-3,5,8,10,12,14,16,18,20,22,24-undecaene, Formula H. In an oven dried 1 L round-bottom flask, 2,5-bis[(5-formyl-3-(3-hydroxypropyl)-4-methyl-pyrrol-2yl)methyl]-3,4-diethylpyrrole (Formula G) (The synthesis of Formula G is provided in U.S. Pat. No. 5,252,720, incorporated by reference herein.) (30.94) g, 0.0644 mol) and 4,5-diamino-bis[2[2-(2-methoxyetboxy)ethoxy)ethoxy]benzene (Formula F) (28.79 g, 0.0644 mol) are combined in absolute methanol (600 mL) under an argon atmosphere. To this well stirred suspension, a mixture of concentrated hydrochloric acid (6.7 m:) in absolute methanol 200 mL is added in one portion. The mixture is gradually heated to 50° C., at which time the reaction goes from a cloudy suspension of starting materials to a dark red homogeneous solution as the reaction proceeded. After 3 h the reaction is judged complete by TLC analysis and UV/visible spectroscopy (λmax 369 nm). The reaction mixture is cooled to room temperature, 60 g of activated carbon (DARCO™) is added, and the resulting suspension is stirred for 20 min. The dark suspension is filtered through Celite to remove the carbon, the solvent evaporated to dryness, and the crude Formula H dried in vacuo overnight. Formula H is recrystallized from isopropyl alcohol/n-heptane to afford 50 g (85%) of a scarlet red solid. For Formula H: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 1.11 (t, 6H, CH2CH3), 1.76 (p, 4H, pyrr-CH2CH2CH2OH), 2.36 (s, 6H, pyrr-CH3), 2.46 (q, 4H, CH2CH3), 2.64 (t, 4H, pyrr-CH2CH2CH2OH), 3.29 [s, 6H, (CH2CH2O)3CH3], 3.31 (t, 4H, pyrr-CH2CH2CH2OH), 3.43-3.85 (m, 20H, CH2CH2OCH2CH2OCH2CH2O), 4.0 (s, 4H, (pyrr)2-CH2), 4.22 (t, 4H, PhOCH2CH2O), 7.45 (s, 2H, PhH), 8.36 (s, 2H, HC═N); UV/vis: [(MeOH)λmax nm]: 369; FAB MS, [M+H]+: m/e 878.5; HRMS, [M+H]+: m/e 878.5274 (calcd. for [C48H72N5O10]+878.5279).
  • Synthesis of the gadolinium (HI) complex of 4,5-diethyl-10,23-dimethyl-9,24-bis(3-hydroxypropyl)-16,17-bis[2-[2-(2-methoxyethoxy)ethoxy]ethoxy]pentaazapentacyclo [20.2.1.1[0271] 3,6,18,11,014,19]heptacosa-1,3,5,7,9,11(27),12,14,16,18,20,22(25),23-tridecaene, Formula I. Formula I is prepared according to the process outlined in FIG. 22. In a dry 2 L three-necked round-bottom flask, Formula H (33.0 g, 0.036 mol) and gadolinium(II) acetate tetrahydrate (15.4 g, 0.038 mol) are combined in methanol (825 mL). To this well stirred red solution, gadolinium(III) acetate tetrahydrate (15.4 g, 0.038 mol) and triethylamine (50 mL) are added and the reaction is heated to reflux. After 1.5 h, air is bubbled (i.e., at reflux) for 4 h into the dark green reaction solution with aid of a gas dispersion tube (flow rate=20 cm3/min). At this point, the reaction mixture is carefully monitored by UV/visible spectroscopy (i.e., a spectrum is taken every 0.5-1 h, ˜1 drop diluted in 4-5 mL MeOH). The reaction is deemed complete by UV/Vis (In MeOH ratio: 342 nM/472 nm=0.22-0.24) after 4 h. The dark green reaction is cooled to room temperature, filtered through Celite into a 2 L round bottom flask, and the solvent removed under reduced pressure. The dark green solid is suspended in acetone (1 L) and the resulting slurry is stirred for 1 h at room temperature. The suspension is filtered to remove the red/brown impurities (incomplete oxidation products), the solids rinsed with acetone (200 mL), and air dried. The crude complex (35 g) is dissolved in MeOH (600 mL), stirred vigorously for 15 min, filtered through Celite, and transferred to a 2 L Erlenmeyer flask. An additional 300 mL of MeOH and 90 mL water are added to the flask, along with acetic acid washed LZY-54 zeolite (150 g). The suspension is agitated with an overhead mechanical stirrer for approximately 3-4 h. The zeolite extraction is deemed complete with the absence of free Gd(III). [To test for free gadolinium, the crude Formula I is spotted heavily onto a reverse phase TLC plate (Whatman KC8F, 1.5×10 cm) and the chromatogram developed using 10% acetic acid in methanol. The green complex moved up the TLC plate close to the solvent front. Any free gadolinium metal will remain at the origin under these conditions. After developing the chromatogram, the plate is dried and the lower 1/4 of the plate stained with an Arsenazo III solution in methanol (4 mg Arsenazo III in 10 mL methanol). A very faint blue spot (indicative of free metal) is observed at the origin against a pink background indicating very little free gadolinium metal.] The zeolite is removed through a Whatman #3 filter paper and the collected solids rinsed with MeOH (200 mL). The dark green filtrate is loaded onto a column of Amberlite IRA-904 anion exchange resin (30 cm length×2.5 cm diameter) and eluted through the resin (ca. 10 mL/min flow rate) into a 2 L round bottom flask with 300 mL 1-butanol. The resin is rinsed with an additional 100 mL of MeOH and the combined eluent evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure. The green shiny solid Formula I is dried in vacuo for several hours at 40° C., to a well stirred ethanoic solution (260 mL of Formula I at 55°-60° C., n-heptanes (ca. 600 mL) is added dropwise (flow=4 mL/min) from a 1 L pressure-equalizing dropping funnel. During the course of 1.5 h (300 mL addition) the green Formula I began to crystallize out of the dark mixture. After complete addition, the green suspension is cooled and stirred for 1 h at room temperature. The suspension is filtered, the solids rinsed with acetone (250 mL), and dried in vacuo for 24 h to afford 26 g (63%), UV/vis: [(MeOH) λmax nm]: 316, 350, 415, 473, 739; FAB MS, (M-20 Ac)+: m/e 1030; HRMS, (M−20 Ac)+: m/e 1027.4036 (calcd. for C48H66 155GdN5O10, 1027.4016). Anal. calcd. for [C52H72GdN5O14] 0.5H2O: C, 53.96; H, 6.36; N, 6.05, Gd, 13.59. Found: C, 53.73; H, 6.26; N, 5.82; Gd, 13.92.
  • Synthesis of the Lutetium(III) Complex of Formula H: The macrocyclic ligand Formula H is oxidatively metalated using lutetium(III) acetate hydrate (9.75 g, 0.0230 mol) and triethylamine (22 mL) in air-saturated methanol (1500 mL) at reflux. After completion of the reaction (as judged by the optical spectrum of the reaction mixture), the deep green solution is cooled to room temperature, filtered through a pad of celite, and the solvent removed under reduced pressure. The dark green solid is suspended in acetone (600 mL, stirred for 30 min at room temperature, and then filtered to wash away the red/brown impurities (incomplete oxidation products and excess triethylamine). The crude complex is dissolved into MeOH (300 mL, stirred for −30 min, and then filtered through celite into a 1 L Erlenmeyer flask. An additional 50 mL of MeOH and 50 mL of water are added to the flask along with acetic acid washed LZY-54 zeolite (40 g). The resulting mixture is agitated or shaken for 3 h, then filtered to remove the zeolite. The zeolite cake is rinsed with MeOH (100 mL and the rinse solution added to the filtrate. The filtrate is first concentrated to 150 mL and then loaded onto a column (30 cm length×2.5 cm diameter) of pretreated Amberlite IRA-904 anion exchange resin (resin in the acetate form). The eluent containing the bisacetate lutetium(III) texaphyrin complex is collected concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure, and recrystallized from anhydrous methanol/t-butylmethyl ether to afford 11.7 g (63%) of a shiny green solid. For the complex: UV/vis: [(MeOH) λ[0272] max nm (log ε)]: 354, 414, 474 (5.10), 672, 732; FAB MS, [IM-OAc]+: m/e 1106.4; HRMS, (M-OAc]+: m/e 1106.4330 (calcd. for [C48H66N5;O10Lu(OAc)]+, 1106.4351). Anal. calcd. for [C48H66N5O10Lu](OAc)2H2O; C, 52.74; H, 6.30; N, 5.91. Found: C, 52.74; H, 6.18; N, 5.84.
  • EXAMPLE 2 Synthesis of a T2B1 TXP Metal Complex-Oligonuleotide Conjugate
  • FIGS. [0273] 23A-H illustrate the synthesis of a light activated drug conjugate. The light activated drug is a texaphyrin coupled with an oligonucleotide which is complementary to a DNA site. As a result, the light activated drug conjugate can bind the complementary DNA site and will cleave the site upon activation by ultrasound. (Note: References to “Formula A,” “Formula B,” etc. relate to FIGS. 23A, 23B, etc.)
  • Synthesis of 4-Amino-1-[1-(ethyloxy)acetyl-2-oxy]-3-nitrobenzene (Formula B of FIG. 19), n=1. Potassium carbonate (14.0 g, 101 mmol) and 4-amino-3-nitrophenol (Formula A) (10.0 g, 64.9 mmol) are suspended in 150 mL dry acetonitrile. Ethyl-2-iodoacetate (10 mL, 84.5 mmol) (or ethyl iodobutyrate may be used, in that case n=3) is added via syringe, and the suspension is stirred at ambient temperature for ca. 21 h. Chloroform (ca. 375 mL) is added and is used to transfer the suspension to a separatory funnel, whereupon it is washed with water (2xca. 100 mL). The water washes are in turn washed with CHOl[0274] 3 (ca. 100 mL) and the combined CHCl3 extracts are washed with water (ca. 100 mL). Solvents are removed on a rotary evaporator, and the residue is redissolved in CHCl3 (ca. 500 mL) and precipitated into hexanes (1.5 L). After standing two days, the precipitate is filtered using a coarse fritted funnel and dried in vacuo to provide 14.67 g (Formula B), n=1 (94.1%). TLC: Rf=0.43, CHCl3.
  • Synthesis of 4-Amino-1-[1-(hydroxy)acetyl-2-oxy]-3-nitrobenzene (Formula C), n=1. 4-Amino-1-[1-(ethyloxy)acetyl-2-oxy]-3-nitrobenzene (Formula B), n=1, (10.00 g, 37.3 mmol) is dissolved in tetrahydrofuran (100 mL), aqueous sodium hydroxide (1M solution, 50 mL) is added and the solution is stirred at ambient temperature for ca. 21 h. Tetrahydrofuran is removed on a rotary evaporator, and water (100 mL) is added. The solution is washed with CHCl[0275] 3 (ca. 200 mL), the neutralized by addition of hydrochloric acid (1M solution, 50 mL). The precipitate which formed is filtered after standing a few minutes, washed with water, and dried in vacuo to provide 8.913 g compound (Formula C), n=1 (99.5%). TLC: Rf=0.65, 10% methanol/CHCl3.
  • Synthesis of 16-[1-(Hydroxy)acetyl-2-oxy]-9,24-bis(3-hydroxypropyl)-4,5-diethyl-10,23-dimethyl-13,20,25,26,27-pentaazapentacyclo [20.2.1.1[0276] 3,6.18,11.014,19]heptacosa-3,5,8,10,12,14(19), 15,17,20,22,24-undecaene (Formula E), n=1: 4-Amino-1-[1-(hydroxy)acetyl-2-oxy]-3-nitrobenzene (Formula C), n=1. (1,800 g, 8.49 mmol) is dissolved in methanol (100 mL) in a 1L flask. Palladium on carbon (10%, 180 mg) is added, and the atmosphere inside the flask is replaced with hydrogen at ambient pressure. A grey precipitate is formed after ca. 3 h, and the supernatant is clear. Methanol is removed in vacuo, taking precautions to prevent exposure to oxygen, and the compound is dried overnight in vacuo. Isopropyl alcohol (500 mL) and HCl (12M, 400 μL) are added, and the suspension is allowed to stir for ca. 15′. 2,5-Bis[(3-hydroxypropyl-5-formyl-4-methylpyrrol-2-y)methyl]-3,4-diethylpyrrole (Formula D) (n=1) (4.084 g, 8.49 mmol) is added, and the reaction stirred at room temperature under argon for 3 hours. Hydrochloric acid is again added (12M, 400 μL) and the reaction again is allowed to stir for an additional 3.5 h. The resulting red solution is filtered through celite, and the filtercake is washed with isopropyl alcohol until the filtrate is colorless. Solvent is reduced to a volume of ca. 50 mL using a rotary evaporator, whereupon the solution is precipitated into rapidly stirring Et2O (ca. 700 mL). Formula E (n=1) is obtained as a red solid (5.550 g, 98.4%) upon filtering and drying in vacuo. TLC: Rf=0.69, 20% methanol/CHCL3 (streaks, turns green on plate with I2).
  • Synthesis of metal complex of 16-[1-(hydroxy)acetyl-2-oxy]-9,24-bis(3-hydroxypropyl)-4,5-diethyl-10,23-dimethyl-13,20,25,26,27-pentaazapentacyclo [20.2.1.1[0277] 3,16.18,11.014,19]heptacosa-1,3,5,7,9,11(27),12,14(19),15,17,20,22(25),23-tridecaene (Formula F), n=1: Approximately equal molar amounts of the protonated form of the macrocycle, 16-[1-(hydroxy)acetyl-2-oxy]-9,24-bis(3-hydroxypropyl)-4,5-diethyl-10,23-dimethyl-13,20,25,26,27-pentaazapentacyclo[20.2.0.1.13,6.18,11.014,19]heptacosa-3,5,8,10,12,14(19),15,17,20,22,24-undecaene hydrochloride (Formula E), n=1, and a metal acetate pentahydrate are combined with triethylamine in methanol, and are heated to reflux under air for 5.5 h. The reaction is cooled to room temperature, and stored at −20° C., overnight. Solvent is removed on a rotary evaporator, acetone is added, and the suspension is stirred on a rotary evaporator for 2 h. The suspension is filtered and the precipitate dried briefly in vacuo, whereupon a solution is formed in methanol (ca. 250 mL) and water (25 mL). The pH is adjusted to 4.0 using HCl (1M), HCl-washed zeolite LZY54 is added (ca. 5 g) and the suspension is stirred on the rotary evaporator for ca. 6 h. Amberlite™ IRA-900 ion exchange resin (NaF treated, ca. 5 g) is added, and the suspension is stirred for an additional hour. The suspension is filtered, the resin is washed with methanol (ca. 100 mL), and the filtrate is adjusted to pH 4.0 using HCl (1M). Solvents are removed on a rotary evaporator, using ethanol (abs.) to remove traces of water. After drying in vacuo, the compound is dissolved in methanol (25 mL) and precipitated into rapidly stirring Et2O (300 mL). Formula F, n=1, is obtained as a precipitate after filtering and drying in vacuo. An analytical sample is prepared by treating 50 mg of Formula F, n=1, dissolved in methanol (25 mL) with acetic acid-washed zeolite, then acetic acid-washed Amberlite™ for ca. 1 h. After reducing methanol to a minimum volume, the solution is precipitated into rapidly stirring Et2O (70 mL), filtered, and dried in vacuo.
  • Postsynthetic modification of oligodeoxynucleotide-amine (Formula G) with metal complex (Formula F), n=1: The metal complex of 16-[1-(hydroxy)acetyl-2-oxy]-9,24-bis(3-hydroxypropyl)-4,5-diethyl-10,23-dimethyl-13,20,25,26,27-pentaazapentacyclo [20.2.1.1[0278] 3,6.18,11.014,19]heptacosa-1,3,5,7,9,11(27),12,14(19),15,17,20,22(25),23-tridacaene (Formula F), n=1, (about 30 mol) and N-hydroxysuccinimide (43 μmol) are dried together overnight in vacuo. The compounds are dissolved in dimethylformamide (anhydrous, 500 μL) and dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (10 mg, 48 μmol) is added. The resulting solution is stirred under argon with protection from light for 8 h, whereupon a 110 μL aliquot is added to a solution of oligodeoxynucleotide (Formula G) (87 μmol) in a volume of 350 μL of 0.4M sodium bicarbonate buffer in a 1.6 mL Eppendorf tube. After vortexing briefly, the solution is allowed to stand for 23 h with light protection. The suspension is filtered through 0.45 μm nylon microfilterfuge tubes, and the Eppendorf tube is washed with 250 μL sterile water. The combined filtrates are divided into two Eppendorf tubes, and glycogen (20 mg/mL, 2 μL) and sodium acetate (3M, pH 5.4 30 μL) are added to each tube. After vortexing, ethanol (absolute, 1 mL) is added to each tube to precipitate the DNA. Ethanol is decanted following centrifugation, and the DNA is washed with an additional 1 mL aliquot of ethanol and allowed to air dry. The pellet is dissolved in 50% formamide gel loading buffer (20 μL), denatured at 90° C. for ca. 2′, and loaded on a 20% denaturing polyacrylamide gel. The band corresponding to conjugate (Formula H), n=1, is cut from the gel, crushed and soaked in 1×TBE buffer (ca. 7 mL) for 1-2 days. The suspension is filtered through nylon filters (0.45 μm) and desalted using a Sep-pak™ reverse phase cartridge. The conjugate is eluted from the cartridge using 40% acetonitrile, lyophilized overnight, and dissolved in 1 mM HEPES buffer, pH 7.0 (500 μL). The solution concentration is determined using UV/vis spectroscopy.
  • EXAMPLE 3 Synthesis of Texaphyrin Metal Complexes with Amine-, Thiol- or Hydroxy-Linked Oligonucleotides
  • Amides, ethers, and thioethers are representative of linkages which may be used for coupling site-directing molecules such as oligonucleotides to light activated drugs such as texaphyrin metal complexes as illustrated in FIGS. [0279] 24A-F. (Note: References to “Formula A,” “Formula B,” etc. relate to FIGS. 24A, 24B, etc.) Oligonucleotides or other site-directing molecules functionalized with amines at the 5′-end, the 3′-end, or internally at sugar or base residues are modified post-synthetically with an activated carboxylic ester derivative of the texaphyrin complex. In the presence of a Lewis acid such as FeBr3, a bromide derivatized texaphyrin (for example, Formula C of FIG. 24) will react with an hydroxyl group of an oligonucleotide to form and ether linkage between the texaphyrin linker and the oligonucleotide. Alternatively, oligonucleotide analogues containing one or more thiophosphate or thiol groups are selectively alkylated at the sulfur atom(s) with an alkyl halide derivative of the texaphyrin complex. Oligodeoxynucleotide-complex conjugates are designed so as to provide optimal catalytic interaction between the targeted DNA phosphodiester backbone and the texaphyrino.
  • Oligonucleotides are used to bind selectively compounds which include the complementary nucleotide or oligo- or polynucleotides containing substantially complementary sequences. As used herein, a substantially complementary sequence is one in which the nucleotides generally base pair with the complementary nucleotide and in which there are very few base pair mismatches. The oligonucleotide may be large enough to bind probably at least 9 nucleotides of complementary nucleic acid. [0280]
  • For general reviews of synthesis of DNA, RNA, and their analogues, see [0281] Oligonucleotides and Analogues, F. Eckstein, Ed., 1991. IRL Press, New York; Oligonucleotide Synthesis, M. J. Gait, Ed., 1984, IRL Press Oxford, England; Caracciolo et al. (1989); Bioconjugate Chemistry, Goodchild, J. (1990); or for phosphonate synthesis, Matteucci, Md. et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 14:5399 (1986) (these references are incorporated by reference herein).
  • In general, there are three commonly used solid phase-based approaches to the synthesis of oligonucleotides containing conventional 5′-3′ linkages. These are the phosphoramidite method, the phosphonate method, and the triester method. [0282]
  • A brief description of a current method used commercially to synthesize oligomeric DNA is as follows: Oligomers up to ca. 100 residues in length are prepared on a commercial synthesizer, eg., Applied Biosystems Inc. (ABI) model 392, that uses phosphoramidite chemistry. DNA is synthesized from the 3′ to the 5′ direction through the sequential addition of highly reactive phosphorous(I) reagents called phosphoramidites. The initial 3′ residue is covalently attached to a controlled porosity silica solid support, which greatly facilitates manipulation of the polymer. After each residue is coupled to the growing polymer chain, the phosphorus(III) is oxidized to the more stable phosphorus(V) state by a short treatment with iodine solution. Unreacted residues are capped with acetic anhydride, the 5′-protective group is removed with weak acid, and the cycle may be repeated to add a further residue until the desired DNA polymer is synthesized. The full length polymer is released from the solid support, with concomitant removal of remaining protective groups, by exposure to base. A common protocol uses saturated ethanolic ammonia. [0283]
  • The phosphonate based synthesis is conducted by the reaction of a suitably protected nucleotide containing a phosphonate moiety at a position to be coupled with a solid phase-derivatized nucleotide chain having a free hydroxyl phosphonate ester linkage, which is stable to acid. Thus, the oxidation to the phosphate or thiophosphate can be conducted at any point during synthesis of the oligonucleotide or after synthesis of the oligonucleotide is complete. The phosphonates can also be converted to phosphoramidate derivatives by reaction with a primary or secondary amine in the presence of carbon tetrachloride. [0284]
  • In the triester synthesis, a protected phosphodiester nucleotide is condensed with the free hydroxyl of a growing nucleotide chain derivatized to a solid support in the presence of coupling agent. The reaction yields a protected phosphate linkage which may be treated with an oximate solution to form unprotected oligonucleotide. [0285]
  • To indicate the three approaches generically, the incoming nucleotide is regarded as having an “activated” phosphite/phosphate group. In addition to employing commonly used solid phase synthesis techniques, oligonucleotides may also be synthesized using solution phase methods such as diester synthesis. The methods are workable, but in general, less efficient for oligonucleotides of any substantial length. [0286]
  • Preferred oligonucleotides resistant to in vivo hydrolysis may contain a phosphorothioate substitution at each base ([0287] J. Org. Chem. 55:4693-469, (1990) and Agrawal, (1990)). Oligodeoxynucleotides or their phosphorothioate analogues may be synthesized using an Applied Biosystem 380B DNA synthesizer (Applied Biosystems, Inc., Foster City, Calif.).
  • EXAMPLE 4 Synthesis of Diformyl Monoacid Tripyrrane (FIG. 25, Formula H) and Oligonucleotide Conjugate (FIG. 25, Formula J)
  • The present example provides for the synthesis of a light activated drug conjugate. The light activated drug conjugate includes a oligonucleotide acting as a site directing molecule coupled with the tripyrrane portion of a texaphyrin as illustrated in FIGS. [0288] 25A-J. (Note: References to “Formula A,” “Formula B,” etc. relate to FIGS. 25A, 25B, etc.)
  • Synthesis of Dimethylester Dibenzylester Dipyrromethane (Formula B): A three-neck 1000 mL round-bottom flask set with a magnetic stirring bar, a thermometer, a heating mantle, and a reflux condenser attached to an argon line is charged with methylester acetoxypyrrole (Formula A) (100.00 g; 267.8 mmol), [0289] 200 proof ethyl alcohol (580 mL), and deionized water (30 mL.) The reaction mixture is heated up and when the resulting solution begins to reflux, 12N aq. hydrochloric acid (22 mL) is added all at once. The flask contents are stirred under reflux for two hours. The heating element is replaced by a 0° C. bath and the resulting thick mixture is stirred for two hours prior to placing it in the freezer overnight.
  • The mixture is filtered over medium fritted glass funnel, pressed with a rubber dam, and washed with hexanes until the filtrate comes out colorless. The collected solids are set for overnight high vacuum drying at 30° C. to afford slightly yellowish solids (65.85 g, 214.3 mmol, 80.0% yield.) [0290]
  • Synthesis of Dimethylester Diacid Dipyrromethane, Formula C: All the glassware is oven dried. A three-[0291] neck 2000 mL round-bottom flask set with a magnetic stirring bar, a hydrogen line, and a vacuum line is charged with dimethylester dibenzylester dipyrromethane (Formula B) (33.07 g, 53.80 mmol), anhydrous tetrahydrofuran (1500 mL), and 10% palladium on charcoal (3.15 g.) The flask is filled with dry hydrogen gas after each of several purges of the flask atmosphere prior to stirring the reaction suspension under a hydrogen atmosphere for 24 hours.
  • The solvent of the reaction suspension is removed under reduced pressure. The resulting solids are dried under high vacuum overnight. [0292]
  • The dry solids are suspended in a mixture of saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (1500 mL) and ethyl alcohol (200 mL), and stirred at its boiling point for five minutes. The hot suspension is filtered over celite. The filtrate is cooled down to room temperature and acidified to [0293] pH 6 with 12N aqueous hydrochloric acid. The resulting mixture is filtered over medium fritted glass. The collected solids are dried under high vacuum to constant weight (21.63 g, 49.78 mmol, 92.5% yield.)
  • Synthesis of Methylester Dibenzylester Tripyrrane, Formula E: A three-[0294] neck 2000 mL round-bottom flask set with a heating mantle, a magnetic stirring bar, a thermometer, and a reflux condenser attached to an argon line is charged with dimethyleser diacid dipyrromethane (Formula C) (21.00 g, 48.33 mmol), ethyl acetoxy pyrrole (Formula D) (30.50 g), p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (1.94 g), trifluoroacetic acid (39 mL), and methyl alcohol (1350 mL.) The flask contents are heated and stirred under reflux for two hours. The heating element is replaced with a 0° C. bath and the stirring is continued for half an hour prior to placing the resulting mixture in a freezer overnight.
  • The cold mixture is filtered over medium fritted glass. The collected solids are washed with hexanes and dried under high vacuum overnight (13.05 g, 19.25 mmol, 39.85 yield). [0295]
  • Synthesis of Methylester Diacid Tripyrrane, Formula F: All the glassware is oven dried. A three-neck 500 mL round-bottom flask set with a magnetic stirring bar, a hydrogen line, and a vacuum line is charged with methylester dibenzylester tripyrrane (Formula E) (12.97 g, 19.13 mmol), anhydrous tetrahydrofuran (365 mL), and 10% palladium on charcoal (1.13 g.) The flask is filled with dry hydrogen gas after each of several purges of the flask atmosphere prior to stirring the reaction suspension for 24 hours under a hydrogen atmosphere at room temperature. [0296]
  • The reaction suspension is filtered over celite. The solvent of the filtrate is removed under reduced pressure to obtain a foam which is dried under high vacuum overnight (10.94 g, 21.99 mmol, 87.0% pure.) [0297]
  • Synthesis of Monoacid Tripyrrane, Formula H: All the glassware is oven dried. A three-neck 500 mL round-bottom flask set with a mechanical stirrer, a thermometer, a 0° C. bath, and an additional funnel set with an argon line is charged with methylester diacid tripyrrane (Formula F) (10.20 g, 17.83 mmol). Trifluoroacetic acid (32.5 mL) is dripped into the reaction flask from the addition funnel over a 45 minute period keeping the flask contents below 5° C. The resulting reaction solution is stirred at 0° C. for 15 minutes, and then at 20° C. for three hours. Triethylorthoformate (32.5 mL) is dripped into the flask from the addition funnel over a 20 minute period keeping the flask contents below −25° C. by means of a dry ice/ethylene glycol bath. The reaction solution is stirred for one hour at −25° C. and then a 0° C. bath is set up. Deionized water (32.5 mL) is dripped into the reaction flask from the addition funnel keeping the flask contents below 110° C. The resulting two phase mixture is stirred at room temperature for 75 minutes and then added 1-butanol (200 mL.) The solvents are removed under reduced pressure. The resulting dark oil is dried under high vacuum overnight to obtain black solids (11.64 g.) [0298]
  • A three-[0299] neck 2000 mL round-bottom flask set with a thermometer, a heating mantle, a magnetic stirring bar, and a reflux condenser attached to an argon line, is charged with the crude methylester diformyl tripyrrane (Formula G) (11.64 g), methyl alcohol (900 mL), deionized water (60 mL), and lithium hydroxide monohydrate (4.7 g.) The flask contents are heated, stirred under reflux for two hours, cooled down to room temperature, added deionized water (250 mL), acidified with 12N aq. HCL to pH 5, and then stirred at 0° C. for one hour. The resulting mixture is filtered over medium fritted glass funnel. The collected solids are dried under high vacuum to constant weight prior to their purification by column chromatography (silica gel, MeOH in CH2Cl2, 0-10%; 3.64 g, 8.06 mmol, 45.2% yield.)
  • The monoacid tripyrrane (Formula H) is condensed with a derivatized ortho-phenylene diamine to form a nonaromatic precursor which is then oxidized to an aromatic metal complex, for example, Formula I. An oligonucleotide amine may be reacted with the carboxylic acid derivatized texaphyrin Formula I to form the conjugate Formula J having the site-directing molecule on the T (tripyrrane) portion of the molecule rather than the B (benzene) portion. [0300]
  • EXAMPLE 5
  • The following example describes the synthesis of an emulsion including tin ethyl etiopurpurin (SnEt[0301] 2) which is illustrated in FIG. 26.
  • Several emulsions are prepared as described above. In 5 ml glass tubes, medium chain length oil known as MCT oil (Miglyol 801, Hüls America, Piscataway, N.J.) is combined with 10 mg/gm SnEt[0302] 2 plus excipients as described above. Certain emulsions also included additional excipients in the following concentrations: ethanol at mg/gm oil; egg phospholipids at 75 mg/gm oil; and sodium cholate at 10 mg/gm oil. After incubating for 30 minutes at 55° C., the tubes stand overnight at room temperature (19°-22° C.). The tubes are centrifuged to remove bulk precipitates, and supernatants are filtered through 0.45 μm nylon membrane to remove any undissolved drug. Aliquots of filtrate are then diluted in chloroform:isopropyl alcohol (1:1) for spectrophotometric determination of drug concentration (absorbance at 662 nm). Reference standards are prepared with known concentrations of SnEt2 in the same solvent.
  • The concentration of SnEt[0303] 2 in each of the emulsions is illustrated in Table 2. As illustrated, the concentration of SnEt2 in the emulsion can be more than ten times the concentration in MCT oil alone.
    TABLE 2
    Drug Solubility in Oil
    SnEt2 SnEt2
    Excipient Combination Concentration Concentration
    Added to MCT Oil mg/gm oil Normalized
    MCT oil alone 0.38 1.00
    + ethanol 0.28 0.74
    + egg phospholipids (EYP) 0.89 2.34
    + Na cholate 1.17 3.08
    + ethanol + EYP 1.37 3.61
    + EYP + Na cholate 1.77 4.66
    + ethanol + Na cholate 2.20 5.79
    + ethanol + EYP + Na cholate 4.92 12.95
  • EXAMPLE 6
  • This example illustrates relative efficiencies of several bile salts. Mixtures of MCT oil, egg phospholipids, ethanol, and SnEt[0304] 2 are incubated with different bile salts, all at 4.6 mM, under the same conditions described above. As shown in Table 3, sodium cholate is the most efficient solubilizer. Cholic acid lacks solubilizing action in the oil.
    TABLE 3
    Sodium Cholate is the Most Efficient Co-Solubilizer for SnEt2
    SnEt2 SnEt2
    Concentration Concentration
    Bile compound mg/gm oil Normalized
    None 1.26 1.00
    Na Tauracholate 1.13 0.90
    Cholic acid 1.33 1.06
    Na glycocholate 2.22 1.76
    Na deoxycholate 2.31 1.83
    Na cholate 3.70 2.94
  • EXAMPLE 7
  • The following Example illustrates the preparation of liposomes including BPD-MA (See FIG. 17) as a light activated drug. A 100-ml batch of BPD-MA liposomes is prepared at room temperature (about 20° C.) using the following general procedure. BPDMA, butylated hydroxytoluene (“BHT”), ascorbyl palmirate, and the phospholipids DMPC and EPG are dissolved in methylene chloride. The molar ratio of light activated drug: EPG:DMPC is 1.0:3.7 and has the compositions illustrated in Table 4. [0305]
    TABLE 4
    Light activated drug 0.21 g
    EPG 0.68 g
    DMPC 1.38 g
    BHT 0.0002 g
    Ascorbic acid 6- 0.002 g
    palmitate
    Lactose NF 10 g
    crystalline
    injectable
    Water for injection 100 ml
  • Using the above formulation, the total lipid concentration (% w/v) is about 2.06. The resulting solution is filtered through a 0.22 μm filter and then dried under vacuum using a rotary evaporator. Drying is continued until the amount of methylene chloride in the solid residue is no longer detectable by gas chromatography. [0306]
  • A 10% lactose/water-for-injection solution is then prepared and filtered through a 0.22 μm filter. Instead of being warmed to a temperature of about 35° C., the lactose/water solution is allowed to remain at room temperature (about 25° C.) for addition to the flask containing the solid residue of the light activated drug/phospholipid. The solid residue is dispersed in the 10% lactose/water solution at room temperature, stirred for about one hour, and passed through a Microfluidizer™ homogenizer three to four times with the outlet temperature controlled to about 200°-250° C. The solution is then filtered through a 0.22 μm Durapore, hydrophilic filter. [0307]
  • The filterability of the composition in g/cm[0308] 2 is typically greater than about 10. Moreover, the yield is about 100% by HPLC analysis, with light activated drug potency typically being maintained even after sterile filtration. Average particle sizes vary from about 150 to about 300 nm (+50 nm).
  • EXAMPLE 8
  • The following Example describes the delivery of a light activated drug to an atheroma. An emulsion is prepared having about 0.6 g SnEt[0309] 2/ml of emulsion and about 20 g of MCT oil based hydrophobic phase/ml of emulsion. The catheter illustrated in FIG. 7C is positioned in a vessel of the cardiovascular system using over the guidewire techniques. The catheter is positioned such that the media delivery port is adjacent to the atheroma using radiopaque markers on the catheter and the balloon is expanded into contact with the vessel wall. The emulsion is delivered via the third utility lumen 16B of the catheter 10. After the delivery of the emulsion, the ultrasound energy is delivered at about 0.3 W/cm2 at a frequency of approximately 1.3 MHz for about ten minutes. After the delivery of ultrasound energy has concluded, the catheter is withdrawn from the vasculature of the tumor.
  • EXAMPLE 9
  • The following Example describes the delivery of a light activated drug to a tumor. An emulsion is prepared having approximately 0.8 g SnEt[0310] 2/ml of emulsion and approximately 30 g of MCT oil based hydrophobic phase/ml of emulsion. The catheter 10 illustrated in FIG. 3A is positioned in the vasculature of a tumor using over the guidewire techniques. The catheter is positioned such that the media delivery port is within the tumor using radiopaque markers included on the catheter. The prepared emulsion is delivered into the vasculature of the tumor via the utility lumen 16A. After the delivery of the emulsion, the ultrasound energy is delivered at about 0.3 W/cm2 at a frequency of approximately 1.3 MHz for about fifteen minutes. After the delivery of ultrasound energy has concluded, the catheter is withdrawn from the vascular system of the patient.
  • EXAMPLE 10
  • The following Example describes the delivery of a light activated drug to a potential restenosis site. An emulsion is prepared having approximately 0.6 g SnEt[0311] 2/ml of emulsion and approximately 30 g of MCT oil based hydrophobic phase/ml of emulsion. The catheter illustrated in FIG. 7C is positioned in the vasculature of a patient using over the guidewire techniques. The catheter is positioned such that the media delivery port is adjacent to a portion of the vessel which was previously treated with balloon angioplasty and the balloon is expanded into contact with the vessel wall. The prepared emulsion is delivered into the vasculature of the patient via the third utility lumen 16B. Ultrasound energy is delivered from the ultrasound assembly to the potential restenosis site at about 0.3 W/cm2 at a frequency of approximately 1.3 MHz for about ten minutes. After the delivery of ultrasound energy has concluded, the catheter is withdrawn from the vascular system of the patient.
  • EXAMPLE 11
  • The following Example describes the delivery of a light activated drug to an atheroma. Liposomes are prepared including BPD-MA (See FIG. 17) as the light activated drug and DMPC and EPG as the phospholipids. The molar ratio of BPDMA:EPG:DMPC is about 1:3:7. The catheter illustrated in FIG. 7C is positioned in a vessel of the cardiovascular system using over the guidewire techniques. The catheter is positioned such that the media delivery port is adjacent to the atheroma using radiopaque markers included on the catheter and the balloon is expanded into contact with the vessel. Ultrasound energy is delivered at about 0.3 W/cm[0312] 2 at a frequency of approximately 1.3 MHz for about 20 minutes in order to rupture the liposomes and cause tissue death within the atheroma. After the delivery of ultrasound energy has concluded, the catheter is withdrawn from the vascular system of the patient.
  • EXAMPLE 12
  • The following Example describes the delivery of a light activated drug to a tumor. Liposomes are prepared including BPD-MA (See FIG. 17) as the light activated drug and DMPC and EPG as the phospholipids. The molar ratio of BPD-MA:EPG:DMPC is about 1:3:7. The catheter illustrated in FIG. 8 is positioned in the vasculature of a tumor using over the guidewire techniques. The catheter is positioned such that the media delivery port is within the tumor using radiopaque markers included on the catheter. Ultrasound energy is delivered at about 0.3 W/cm[0313] 2 at a frequency of approximately 1.3 MHz for about 20 minutes in order to rupture the liposomes and cause tissue death within the atheroma. After the delivery of ultrasound energy is concluded, the catheter is withdrawn from the vasculature of the tumor.
  • EXAMPLE 13
  • The following Example describes the delivery of a light activated drug to a potential restenosis site. Liposomes are prepared including BPD-MA (See FIG. 17) as the light activated drug and DMPC and EPG as the phospholipids. The molar ratio of BPD-MA:EPG:DMPC is approximately 1:3:7. The catheter illustrated in FIG. 7C is positioned in the vasculature of a patient using over the guidewire techniques. The catheter is positioned such that the media delivery port is adjacent to a portion of the vasculature which was previously treated with balloon angioplasty and the balloon is inflated into contact with the vessel wall. Ultrasound energy is delivered at about 0.3 W/cm[0314] 2 at a frequency of approximately 1.3 MHz for about 15 minutes in order to rupture the liposomes and cause tissue death within the atheroma. After the delivery of ultrasound energy is concluded, the catheter is withdrawn from the vasculature of the patient.
  • EXAMPLE 14
  • The following Example describes the delivery of a light activated drug to an atheroma. Liposomes are prepared including BPD-MA (See FIG. 17) as the light activated drug and DMPC and EPG as the phospholipids. The molar ratio of BPD-MA:EPG:DMPC is about 1:3:7. The phospholipids are systemically delivered. The catheter illustrated in FIG. 7C is positioned in the vasculature of a patient using over the guidewire techniques. The catheter is positioned such that the media delivery port is adjacent to the atheroma and the balloon is inflated into contact with the vessel wall. Ultrasound energy is delivered at about 0.3 W/cm at a frequency of approximately 1.3 MHz for about 15 minutes. After the delivery of ultrasound energy is concluded, the catheter is withdrawn from the vasculature of the patient. [0315]
  • EXAMPLE 15
  • The following Example describes the delivery of a light activated drug to a tumor. Microbubbles are prepared including cisplatin and photofrin according to the methods disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,770,222. The microbubbles are systemically administered. The catheter illustrated in FIG. 1A is positioned within the vasculature of a tumor. Ultrasound energy is delivered at about 0.3 W/cm[0316] 2 at a frequency of approximately 1.3 MHz for about 15 minutes. After the delivery of ultrasound energy is concluded, the catheter is withdrawn from the vasculature of the patient.
  • EXAMPLE 16
  • The following Example describes the delivery of a light activated drug to a tumor. Microbubbles are prepared including cisplatin and photofrin according to the methods disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,770,222. The catheter illustrated in FIG. 3A is positioned within the vasculature of a tumor. The microbubbles are delivered to the tumor via the [0317] second utility lumen 16A of the catheter. Ultrasound energy is delivered at about 0.3 W/cm2 at a frequency of approximately 1.3 MHz for about 15 minutes. After the delivery of ultrasound energy is concluded, the catheter is withdrawn from the vasculature of the patient.
  • EXAMPLE 17
  • The following Example describes the delivery of a light activated drug to a thrombosis. Microbubbles are prepared including heparin, photofrin and an albumin substrate. The microbubbles are systemically administered. The catheter illustrated in FIG. 1A is positioned adjacent to the thrombosis. Ultrasound energy is delivered at about 0.2 W/cm[0318] 2 at a frequency of approximately 1.3 MHz for about 20 minutes. After the delivery of ultrasound energy is concluded, the catheter is withdrawn from the vasculature of the patient.

Claims (9)

What is claimed is:
1. A method for releasing a therapeutic from a microbubble, comprising:
providing a microbubble with a light activated drug; and
delivering ultrasound energy to the microbubble at a frequency and intensity which activates the light activated drug to cause a rupture of the microbubble.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein the microbubble is a liposome.
3. The method of claim 1, wherein the light activated drug is the therapeutic.
4. The method of claim 1, wherein the microbubble includes the therapeutic in addition to the light activated drug.
5. The method of claim 1, wherein the light activated drug is coupled with a shell of the microbubble.
6. The method of claim 1, wherein the light activated drug is enclosed within the microbubble.
7. The method of claim 1, wherein the light activated drug is included in a media outside the microbubble.
8. A microbubble, comprising:
a substrate defining a shell of the microbubble and having a thickness permitting hydraulic transport of the microbubble;
a light activated drug activatable upon exposure to ultrasound energy, activation of the light activated drug causing a disruption in the shell sufficient to cause a rupture of the microbubble; and
a therapeutic releasable from the microbubble upon rupture of the microbubble to yield a therapeutic effect.
9. A method for releasing a thrombolytic agent into a blood vessel, comprising:
encapsulating the thrombolytic agent within a material formed at least in part of a light activated drug;
delivering the thrombolytic agent into the blood vessel; and
emitting ultrasound energy at a frequency and intensity which activates the light activated drug and thereby releases the thrombolytic agent from the material.
US10/620,296 1995-03-05 2003-07-15 Ultrasound assembly for use with light activated drugs Abandoned US20040059313A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US10/620,296 US20040059313A1 (en) 1995-03-05 2003-07-15 Ultrasound assembly for use with light activated drugs
US12/252,291 US20090105633A1 (en) 1995-03-08 2008-10-15 Ultrasound assembly for use with light activated drugs

Applications Claiming Priority (11)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JPP07048710 1995-03-05
JP7048710A JPH08245420A (en) 1995-03-08 1995-03-08 Treating tool using ultrasonic wave
US61110596A 1996-03-05 1996-03-05
JP25581497A JP4791616B2 (en) 1997-09-19 1997-09-19 Drug carrier and method of using the same
JPJ970617JSO 1997-09-19
US97284697A 1997-11-18 1997-11-18
US09/129,980 US6210356B1 (en) 1998-08-05 1998-08-05 Ultrasound assembly for use with a catheter
US09/158,316 US6176842B1 (en) 1995-03-08 1998-09-21 Ultrasound assembly for use with light activated drugs
US09/620,701 US6527759B1 (en) 1995-03-05 2000-07-20 Ultrasound assembly for use with light activated drugs
US10/305,865 US20030157024A1 (en) 1995-03-05 2002-11-26 Ultrasound assembly for use with light activated drugs
US10/620,296 US20040059313A1 (en) 1995-03-05 2003-07-15 Ultrasound assembly for use with light activated drugs

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/305,865 Continuation US20030157024A1 (en) 1995-03-05 2002-11-26 Ultrasound assembly for use with light activated drugs

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/252,291 Continuation US20090105633A1 (en) 1995-03-08 2008-10-15 Ultrasound assembly for use with light activated drugs

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20040059313A1 true US20040059313A1 (en) 2004-03-25

Family

ID=27462251

Family Applications (6)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US09/158,316 Expired - Lifetime US6176842B1 (en) 1995-03-05 1998-09-21 Ultrasound assembly for use with light activated drugs
US09/620,701 Expired - Lifetime US6527759B1 (en) 1995-03-05 2000-07-20 Ultrasound assembly for use with light activated drugs
US10/246,323 Abandoned US20030092667A1 (en) 1995-03-05 2002-09-18 Delivery of therapeutic compositions using ultrasound
US10/305,865 Abandoned US20030157024A1 (en) 1995-03-05 2002-11-26 Ultrasound assembly for use with light activated drugs
US10/620,296 Abandoned US20040059313A1 (en) 1995-03-05 2003-07-15 Ultrasound assembly for use with light activated drugs
US10/782,383 Abandoned US20040229830A1 (en) 1995-03-05 2004-02-19 Delivery of therapeutic compositions using ultrasound

Family Applications Before (4)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US09/158,316 Expired - Lifetime US6176842B1 (en) 1995-03-05 1998-09-21 Ultrasound assembly for use with light activated drugs
US09/620,701 Expired - Lifetime US6527759B1 (en) 1995-03-05 2000-07-20 Ultrasound assembly for use with light activated drugs
US10/246,323 Abandoned US20030092667A1 (en) 1995-03-05 2002-09-18 Delivery of therapeutic compositions using ultrasound
US10/305,865 Abandoned US20030157024A1 (en) 1995-03-05 2002-11-26 Ultrasound assembly for use with light activated drugs

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/782,383 Abandoned US20040229830A1 (en) 1995-03-05 2004-02-19 Delivery of therapeutic compositions using ultrasound

Country Status (1)

Country Link
US (6) US6176842B1 (en)

Cited By (30)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20050084538A1 (en) * 2003-08-27 2005-04-21 The Regents Of The University Of California, A California Corporation Ultrasonic concentration of drug delivery capsules
US20070078290A1 (en) * 2005-09-30 2007-04-05 Esenaliev Rinat O Ultrasound-based treatment methods for therapeutic treatment of skin and subcutaneous tissues
US20080319376A1 (en) * 2007-06-22 2008-12-25 Ekos Corporation Method and apparatus for treatment of intracranial hemorrhages
US20090054853A1 (en) * 2007-08-22 2009-02-26 Huyser Richard F Surgical tool system that forms a sterile gas barrier at the site at which the tool of the system is used and that activates energy-activated agents discharged at the site
US20090297455A1 (en) * 2006-08-09 2009-12-03 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Device for and a method of activating a physiologically effective substance by ultrasonic waves, and a capsule
US20100113983A1 (en) * 2008-10-31 2010-05-06 Microsoft Corporation Utilizing ultrasound to disrupt pathogens
US20110201974A1 (en) * 2010-02-17 2011-08-18 Ekos Corporation Treatment of vascular occlusions using ultrasonic energy and microbubbles
US8690818B2 (en) 1997-05-01 2014-04-08 Ekos Corporation Ultrasound catheter for providing a therapeutic effect to a vessel of a body
US8696612B2 (en) 2001-12-03 2014-04-15 Ekos Corporation Catheter with multiple ultrasound radiating members
US8764700B2 (en) 1998-06-29 2014-07-01 Ekos Corporation Sheath for use with an ultrasound element
US8852166B1 (en) 2002-04-01 2014-10-07 Ekos Corporation Ultrasonic catheter power control
US9107590B2 (en) 2004-01-29 2015-08-18 Ekos Corporation Method and apparatus for detecting vascular conditions with a catheter
US9579494B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2017-02-28 Ekos Corporation Method and apparatus for drug delivery to a target site
US9849273B2 (en) 2009-07-03 2017-12-26 Ekos Corporation Power parameters for ultrasonic catheter
US10064697B2 (en) 2008-10-06 2018-09-04 Santa Anna Tech Llc Vapor based ablation system for treating various indications
US10092742B2 (en) 2014-09-22 2018-10-09 Ekos Corporation Catheter system
US10182833B2 (en) 2007-01-08 2019-01-22 Ekos Corporation Power parameters for ultrasonic catheter
US10188410B2 (en) 2007-01-08 2019-01-29 Ekos Corporation Power parameters for ultrasonic catheter
US10232196B2 (en) 2006-04-24 2019-03-19 Ekos Corporation Ultrasound therapy system
US10656025B2 (en) 2015-06-10 2020-05-19 Ekos Corporation Ultrasound catheter
US10695126B2 (en) 2008-10-06 2020-06-30 Santa Anna Tech Llc Catheter with a double balloon structure to generate and apply a heated ablative zone to tissue
US10842549B2 (en) 2008-10-06 2020-11-24 Santa Anna Tech Llc Vapor ablation system with a catheter having more than one positioning element and configured to treat pulmonary tissue
US10842557B2 (en) 2008-10-06 2020-11-24 Santa Anna Tech Llc Vapor ablation system with a catheter having more than one positioning element and configured to treat duodenal tissue
US10888657B2 (en) 2010-08-27 2021-01-12 Ekos Corporation Method and apparatus for treatment of intracranial hemorrhages
US11020175B2 (en) 2008-10-06 2021-06-01 Santa Anna Tech Llc Methods of ablating tissue using time-limited treatment periods
US11331140B2 (en) 2016-05-19 2022-05-17 Aqua Heart, Inc. Heated vapor ablation systems and methods for treating cardiac conditions
US11458290B2 (en) 2011-05-11 2022-10-04 Ekos Corporation Ultrasound system
US11806066B2 (en) 2018-06-01 2023-11-07 Santa Anna Tech Llc Multi-stage vapor-based ablation treatment methods and vapor generation and delivery systems
US11813014B2 (en) 2008-10-06 2023-11-14 Santa Anna Tech Llc Methods and systems for directed tissue ablation
US11925367B2 (en) 2018-12-20 2024-03-12 Ekos Corporation Power parameters for ultrasonic catheter

Families Citing this family (349)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0732106A3 (en) * 1991-03-22 2003-04-09 Katsuro Tachibana Microbubbles containing booster for therapy of disease with ultrasound
US20070231402A1 (en) * 1994-08-02 2007-10-04 Immunopath Profile, Inc. Therapeutic stem cell composition and stimulant, facilitator, accelerator, and synergizer thereof, growth factor, anti-inflammatory composition and uses thereof
US20020077564A1 (en) * 1996-07-29 2002-06-20 Farallon Medsystems, Inc. Thermography catheter
US5846218A (en) * 1996-09-05 1998-12-08 Pharmasonics, Inc. Balloon catheters having ultrasonically driven interface surfaces and methods for their use
US6676626B1 (en) * 1998-05-01 2004-01-13 Ekos Corporation Ultrasound assembly with increased efficacy
GB9710049D0 (en) * 1997-05-19 1997-07-09 Nycomed Imaging As Method
US6547788B1 (en) * 1997-07-08 2003-04-15 Atrionx, Inc. Medical device with sensor cooperating with expandable member
US6500174B1 (en) 1997-07-08 2002-12-31 Atrionix, Inc. Circumferential ablation device assembly and methods of use and manufacture providing an ablative circumferential band along an expandable member
US6607502B1 (en) 1998-11-25 2003-08-19 Atrionix, Inc. Apparatus and method incorporating an ultrasound transducer onto a delivery member
US6309355B1 (en) 1998-12-22 2001-10-30 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Method and assembly for performing ultrasound surgery using cavitation
US6602274B1 (en) * 1999-01-15 2003-08-05 Light Sciences Corporation Targeted transcutaneous cancer therapy
US6291180B1 (en) * 1999-09-29 2001-09-18 American Registry Of Pathology Ultrasound-mediated high-speed biological reaction and tissue processing
CZ302015B6 (en) 1999-10-08 2010-09-08 Affinium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Fab I inhibitors
EP1222930B1 (en) * 1999-10-14 2006-11-02 Pola Chemical Industries Inc. Compositions for electroporation
WO2001026689A1 (en) 1999-10-14 2001-04-19 Pola Chemical Industries Inc. Compositions for electroporation
US7300414B1 (en) * 1999-11-01 2007-11-27 University Of Cincinnati Transcranial ultrasound thrombolysis system and method of treating a stroke
US7897140B2 (en) * 1999-12-23 2011-03-01 Health Research, Inc. Multi DTPA conjugated tetrapyrollic compounds for phototherapeutic contrast agents
US6579243B2 (en) * 2000-03-02 2003-06-17 Scimed Life Systems, Inc. Catheter with thermal sensor for detection of vulnerable plaque
US6716190B1 (en) * 2000-04-19 2004-04-06 Scimed Life Systems, Inc. Device and methods for the delivery and injection of therapeutic and diagnostic agents to a target site within a body
AU2001258117A1 (en) * 2000-05-08 2001-11-20 The University Of British Columbia Supports for photosensitizer formulations
US6599288B2 (en) 2000-05-16 2003-07-29 Atrionix, Inc. Apparatus and method incorporating an ultrasound transducer onto a delivery member
DE60109444T2 (en) 2000-06-13 2006-04-13 Atrionix, Inc., Irwindale SURGICAL ABLATION PROBE FOR FORMING A RINGED LESION
US7077836B2 (en) * 2000-07-21 2006-07-18 Vein Rx, Inc. Methods and apparatus for sclerosing the wall of a varicose vein
US20050107738A1 (en) * 2000-07-21 2005-05-19 Slater Charles R. Occludable intravascular catheter for drug delivery and method of using the same
US20030120256A1 (en) * 2001-07-03 2003-06-26 Syntheon, Llc Methods and apparatus for sclerosing the wall of a varicose vein
US20050113798A1 (en) * 2000-07-21 2005-05-26 Slater Charles R. Methods and apparatus for treating the interior of a blood vessel
US6514214B2 (en) * 2001-02-13 2003-02-04 Scimed Life Systems, Inc. Intravascular temperature sensor
EP1383573A4 (en) * 2001-03-26 2005-09-14 Ellen A Inc Methods and apparatus for treating diseased tissue
US7049310B2 (en) * 2001-04-06 2006-05-23 Affinium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Fab I inhibitors
US7041046B2 (en) * 2001-05-07 2006-05-09 Xoft, Inc. Combination ionizing radiation and immunomodulator delivery devices and methods for inhibiting hyperplasia
US20030013972A1 (en) * 2001-05-29 2003-01-16 Makin Inder Raj. S. Treatment of lung lesions using ultrasound
US7846096B2 (en) 2001-05-29 2010-12-07 Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. Method for monitoring of medical treatment using pulse-echo ultrasound
US7135029B2 (en) * 2001-06-29 2006-11-14 Makin Inder Raj S Ultrasonic surgical instrument for intracorporeal sonodynamic therapy
US20040015159A1 (en) * 2001-07-03 2004-01-22 Syntheon, Llc Methods and apparatus for treating the wall of a blood vessel with electromagnetic energy
US6629969B2 (en) * 2001-07-26 2003-10-07 Durect Corporation Catheter for modification of agent formulation
US20040019318A1 (en) * 2001-11-07 2004-01-29 Wilson Richard R. Ultrasound assembly for use with a catheter
CA2468835A1 (en) 2001-12-03 2003-06-12 Ekos Corporation Small vessel ultrasound catheter
US7141044B2 (en) * 2001-12-11 2006-11-28 Ekos Corporation Alternate site gene therapy
US20040082940A1 (en) * 2002-10-22 2004-04-29 Michael Black Dermatological apparatus and method
US20030216719A1 (en) * 2001-12-12 2003-11-20 Len Debenedictis Method and apparatus for treating skin using patterns of optical energy
EP1463454A1 (en) * 2001-12-14 2004-10-06 Ekos Corporation Blood flow reestablishment determination
AU2002367296A1 (en) * 2001-12-28 2003-07-24 Ekos Corporation Multi-resonant ultrasonic catheter
US8435529B2 (en) 2002-06-14 2013-05-07 Immunomedics, Inc. Combining radioimmunotherapy and antibody-drug conjugates for improved cancer therapy
US8491896B2 (en) * 2002-06-14 2013-07-23 Immunomedics, Inc. Anti-pancreatic cancer antibodies
AU2003212481A1 (en) * 2002-02-28 2003-09-09 Ekos Corporation Ultrasound assembly for use with a catheter
US6736835B2 (en) * 2002-03-21 2004-05-18 Depuy Acromed, Inc. Early intervention spinal treatment methods and devices for use therein
WO2003096883A2 (en) * 2002-05-16 2003-11-27 Barbara Ann Karmanos Cancer Institute Combined diagnostic and therapeutic ultrasound system
US7175611B2 (en) * 2002-06-05 2007-02-13 Mark Alan Mitchnick Antimicrobial release system
US9238081B2 (en) * 2002-06-14 2016-01-19 Immunomedics, Inc. Detection of early-stage pancreatic adenocarcinoma
US9599619B2 (en) 2002-06-14 2017-03-21 Immunomedics, Inc. Anti-pancreatic cancer antibodies
US8821868B2 (en) 2002-06-14 2014-09-02 Immunomedics, Inc. Anti-pancreatic cancer antibodies
CA2489467C (en) * 2002-06-14 2015-02-24 Immunomedics, Inc. Humanized monoclonal antibody hpam4
CA2490692A1 (en) 2002-06-27 2004-01-08 Health Research, Inc. Fluorinated chlorin and bacteriochlorin photosensitizers for photodynamic therapy
US7131963B1 (en) * 2002-06-27 2006-11-07 Advanced Cardiovascular Systems, Inc. Catheters and methods of using catheters
WO2004005289A2 (en) * 2002-07-02 2004-01-15 Health Research, Inc. Efficient synthesis of pyropheophorbide a and its derivatives
WO2004032621A2 (en) * 2002-08-01 2004-04-22 The Johns Hopkins University Techniques for identifying molecular structures and treating cell types lining a body lumen using fluorescence
US6907884B2 (en) 2002-09-30 2005-06-21 Depay Acromed, Inc. Method of straddling an intraosseous nerve
US8361067B2 (en) 2002-09-30 2013-01-29 Relievant Medsystems, Inc. Methods of therapeutically heating a vertebral body to treat back pain
US7258690B2 (en) 2003-03-28 2007-08-21 Relievant Medsystems, Inc. Windowed thermal ablation probe
US8808284B2 (en) 2008-09-26 2014-08-19 Relievant Medsystems, Inc. Systems for navigating an instrument through bone
US8613744B2 (en) 2002-09-30 2013-12-24 Relievant Medsystems, Inc. Systems and methods for navigating an instrument through bone
US6921371B2 (en) * 2002-10-14 2005-07-26 Ekos Corporation Ultrasound radiating members for catheter
AU2003298937A1 (en) 2002-12-06 2004-06-30 Affinium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds, methods of making them and their use in therapy
US20040230182A1 (en) * 2002-12-27 2004-11-18 Medtronic, Inc. Drug delivery through encapsulation
WO2004060448A2 (en) * 2003-01-03 2004-07-22 Ekos Corporation Ultrasonic catheter with axial energy field
US20070179481A1 (en) * 2003-02-14 2007-08-02 Reliant Technologies, Inc. Laser System for Treatment of Skin Laxity
ATE409485T1 (en) * 2003-03-17 2008-10-15 Affinium Pharm Inc PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING FAB I INHIBITORS AND OTHER ANTIBIOTICS
WO2004093656A2 (en) * 2003-04-22 2004-11-04 Ekos Corporation Ultrasound enhanced central venous catheter
US20040243022A1 (en) * 2003-04-29 2004-12-02 Medtronic Vascular, Inc. Method and system of detecting vulnerable plaque by sensing motion of thin fibrous cap
US20040236308A1 (en) * 2003-05-22 2004-11-25 Atrium Medical Corp. Kinetic isolation pressurization
US9005613B2 (en) 2003-06-16 2015-04-14 Immunomedics, Inc. Anti-mucin antibodies for early detection and treatment of pancreatic cancer
US7057100B2 (en) * 2003-06-26 2006-06-06 The J.C. Robinson Seed Co. Inbred corn line W23129
US7220258B2 (en) * 2003-07-02 2007-05-22 Cancercure As Therapeutic probe, method and system
JP2005029489A (en) * 2003-07-10 2005-02-03 Institute Of Physical & Chemical Research Insecticidal and ovicidal composition
WO2005007003A1 (en) * 2003-07-11 2005-01-27 Reliant Technologies, Inc. Method and apparatus for fractional photo therapy of skin
US20070286896A1 (en) * 2003-08-01 2007-12-13 National Institute Of Advanced Industrial Science And Technology Therapeutic or Diagnostic Drug for Inflammatory Disease Comprising Targeting Liposome
US20050074506A1 (en) * 2003-10-02 2005-04-07 Brainsgate Ltd. Targeted release of nitric oxide in the CNS circulation for modulating the BBB and treating disorders
US20050137520A1 (en) * 2003-10-29 2005-06-23 Rule Peter R. Catheter with ultrasound-controllable porous membrane
CN1878504A (en) * 2003-11-14 2006-12-13 株式会社日立医药 Thrombus detector, thrombus treating device, and methods thereof
US20050124897A1 (en) * 2003-12-03 2005-06-09 Scimed Life Systems, Inc. Apparatus and methods for delivering acoustic energy to body tissue
US20060058708A1 (en) * 2003-12-24 2006-03-16 Gill Heart Method and apparatus for ultrasonically increasing the transportation of therapeutic substances through tissue
EP1725289A4 (en) * 2004-01-29 2007-11-14 Ekos Corp Small vessel ultrasound catheter
US7201737B2 (en) * 2004-01-29 2007-04-10 Ekos Corporation Treatment of vascular occlusions using elevated temperatures
US20050209578A1 (en) * 2004-01-29 2005-09-22 Christian Evans Edward A Ultrasonic catheter with segmented fluid delivery
US7341569B2 (en) 2004-01-30 2008-03-11 Ekos Corporation Treatment of vascular occlusions using ultrasonic energy and microbubbles
US7744555B2 (en) * 2004-02-06 2010-06-29 Depuy Spine, Inc. Implant having a photocatalytic unit
US8267883B2 (en) * 2004-02-06 2012-09-18 Depuy Spine, Inc. Photocatalytic implant having a sensor
DE102004008367A1 (en) * 2004-02-20 2005-09-22 Siemens Ag Method for taking two-dimensional images inside a blood-perfused vessel by means of optical coherence tomography
US20050228286A1 (en) * 2004-04-07 2005-10-13 Messerly Jeffrey D Medical system having a rotatable ultrasound source and a piercing tip
US20050240123A1 (en) * 2004-04-14 2005-10-27 Mast T D Ultrasound medical treatment system and method
US20050240124A1 (en) * 2004-04-15 2005-10-27 Mast T D Ultrasound medical treatment system and method
US7494467B2 (en) * 2004-04-16 2009-02-24 Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. Medical system having multiple ultrasound transducers or an ultrasound transducer and an RF electrode
US20050256405A1 (en) * 2004-05-17 2005-11-17 Makin Inder Raj S Ultrasound-based procedure for uterine medical treatment
US7883468B2 (en) * 2004-05-18 2011-02-08 Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. Medical system having an ultrasound source and an acoustic coupling medium
US7951095B2 (en) * 2004-05-20 2011-05-31 Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. Ultrasound medical system
US20050261587A1 (en) * 2004-05-20 2005-11-24 Makin Inder R S Ultrasound medical system and method
US20050261588A1 (en) * 2004-05-21 2005-11-24 Makin Inder Raj S Ultrasound medical system
US7695436B2 (en) * 2004-05-21 2010-04-13 Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. Transmit apodization of an ultrasound transducer array
EP2848614A3 (en) 2004-06-04 2015-07-29 Debiopharm International SA Acrylamide derivatives as antibiotic agents
US7413572B2 (en) * 2004-06-14 2008-08-19 Reliant Technologies, Inc. Adaptive control of optical pulses for laser medicine
US7806839B2 (en) * 2004-06-14 2010-10-05 Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. System and method for ultrasound therapy using grating lobes
US7794490B2 (en) * 2004-06-22 2010-09-14 Boston Scientific Scimed, Inc. Implantable medical devices with antimicrobial and biodegradable matrices
US20060004317A1 (en) * 2004-06-30 2006-01-05 Christophe Mauge Hydrocephalus shunt
US20060217788A1 (en) * 2004-07-09 2006-09-28 Herron G S Method of using laser induced injury to activate topical prodrugs
US7356368B2 (en) * 2004-07-21 2008-04-08 Boston Scientific Scimed, Inc. Light-activated anti-infective coatings and devices made thereof
US8715733B2 (en) 2004-07-23 2014-05-06 DePuy Synthes Products, LLC Enhanced adipose tissue
US7217425B2 (en) * 2004-07-23 2007-05-15 Depuy Spine, Inc. Autologous coatings for implants
US7399742B2 (en) * 2004-07-23 2008-07-15 Depuy Spine, Inc. Anti-osteolytic therapy involving adiponectin
US20060019869A1 (en) * 2004-07-23 2006-01-26 Thomas Dimauro M Intradiscal anti-inflammatory therapy involving autologous adiponectin
WO2006023203A1 (en) * 2004-08-19 2006-03-02 Vein Rx, Inc. An occludable intravascular catheter for drug delivery and method of using the same
GB0419954D0 (en) 2004-09-08 2004-10-13 Advotek Medical Devices Ltd System for directing therapy
US8750983B2 (en) 2004-09-20 2014-06-10 P Tech, Llc Therapeutic system
US7578796B2 (en) * 2004-10-22 2009-08-25 General Patent Llc Method of shockwave treating fish and shellfish
US7601127B2 (en) * 2004-10-22 2009-10-13 General Patent, Llc Therapeutic stimulation of genital tissue or reproductive organ of an infertility or impotence diagnosed patient
US20060184070A1 (en) * 2004-11-12 2006-08-17 Hansmann Douglas R External ultrasonic therapy
US20060173387A1 (en) * 2004-12-10 2006-08-03 Douglas Hansmann Externally enhanced ultrasonic therapy
KR20060072734A (en) * 2004-12-23 2006-06-28 두산인프라코어 주식회사 Appareatus for supplying compressed air of construction heavy equipments
US7947030B2 (en) * 2004-12-30 2011-05-24 Reynaldo Calderon Retrograde perfusion of tumor sites
CA2592660C (en) * 2004-12-30 2015-12-08 Reynaldo Calderon Computerized system for monitored retrograde perfusion of tumor sites
US8845558B2 (en) * 2005-02-28 2014-09-30 Boston Scientific Scimed, Inc. Methods and apparatus for configuring an ablation source of a catheter
US8157807B2 (en) 2005-06-02 2012-04-17 The Invention Science Fund I, Llc Skin treatment including patterned light
US20060276859A1 (en) * 2005-06-02 2006-12-07 Searete Llc, A Limited Liability Corporation Of The State Of Delaware Photopatterning of skin
EP1874197A4 (en) * 2005-04-12 2010-02-10 Ekos Corp Ultrasound catheter with cavitation promoting surface
US20070032846A1 (en) * 2005-08-05 2007-02-08 Bran Ferren Holographic tattoo
EP1909908B1 (en) * 2005-06-02 2011-03-30 Cancercure Technology AS Ultrasound treatment system
US20070038270A1 (en) * 2005-07-05 2007-02-15 Searete Llc, A Limited Liability Corporation Of The State Of Delaware Multi step photopatterning of skin
US9162037B2 (en) 2005-07-06 2015-10-20 Vascular Pathways, Inc. Intravenous catheter insertion device and method of use
US20070016184A1 (en) * 2005-07-14 2007-01-18 Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. Medical-treatment electrode assembly and method for medical treatment
EP1933941A2 (en) 2005-08-25 2008-06-25 Philip R. Houle Treatment systems for delivery of sensitizer solutions
US20070048340A1 (en) * 2005-08-31 2007-03-01 Searete Llc, A Limited Liability Corporation Of The State Of Delaware Multi step patterning of a skin surface
WO2007028981A1 (en) * 2005-09-08 2007-03-15 University Of Dundee Apparatus and method for sonoporation
US20070083120A1 (en) * 2005-09-22 2007-04-12 Cain Charles A Pulsed cavitational ultrasound therapy
US8057408B2 (en) * 2005-09-22 2011-11-15 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Pulsed cavitational ultrasound therapy
US10219815B2 (en) 2005-09-22 2019-03-05 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Histotripsy for thrombolysis
US20070141106A1 (en) * 2005-10-19 2007-06-21 Bonutti Peter M Drug eluting implant
EP1973902A2 (en) * 2005-12-05 2008-10-01 Affinium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 3-heterocyclylacrylamide compounds as fabi inhibitors and antibacterial agents
WO2007102933A2 (en) * 2006-01-06 2007-09-13 Imarx Therapeutics, Inc Composition for ultrasound therapy and pharmaceutical liquid composition containing the same
US20080177220A1 (en) * 2006-01-06 2008-07-24 The Curators Of The University Of Missouri Ultrasound-Mediated Transcleral Drug Delivery
US8888684B2 (en) * 2006-03-27 2014-11-18 Boston Scientific Scimed, Inc. Medical devices with local drug delivery capabilities
US20130190676A1 (en) 2006-04-20 2013-07-25 Limflow Gmbh Devices and methods for fluid flow through body passages
US20080154181A1 (en) * 2006-05-05 2008-06-26 Khanna Rohit K Central nervous system ultrasonic drain
JP5241714B2 (en) * 2006-07-07 2013-07-17 プロテウス デジタル ヘルス, インコーポレイテッド Smart parenteral delivery system
JP2008024604A (en) * 2006-07-18 2008-02-07 Hitachi Ltd Foaming agent
US8318720B2 (en) * 2006-07-20 2012-11-27 Affinium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Acrylamide derivatives as Fab I inhibitors
US9867530B2 (en) 2006-08-14 2018-01-16 Volcano Corporation Telescopic side port catheter device with imaging system and method for accessing side branch occlusions
US8641660B2 (en) * 2006-10-04 2014-02-04 P Tech, Llc Methods and devices for controlling biologic microenvironments
WO2008052189A2 (en) * 2006-10-26 2008-05-02 Reliant Technologies, Inc. Micropore delivery of active substances
US8192363B2 (en) * 2006-10-27 2012-06-05 Ekos Corporation Catheter with multiple ultrasound radiating members
CZ298978B6 (en) * 2006-11-28 2008-03-26 Fyziologický ústav AV CR Liposomal, gel-like phthalocyanine composition for photodynamic therapy of tumor diseases and process for preparing thereof
US20080188714A1 (en) * 2007-02-07 2008-08-07 Boston Scientific Scimed, Inc. Electromechanical in-situ cleaning of optical elements
EP2125802A4 (en) 2007-02-16 2014-08-20 Debiopharm Int Sa Salts, prodrugs and polymorphs of fab i inhibitors
US20080200873A1 (en) * 2007-02-16 2008-08-21 Alejandro Espinosa Methods and Apparatus for Infusing the Interior of a Blood Vessel
CN101631501B (en) * 2007-03-09 2012-05-30 皇家飞利浦电子股份有限公司 Method of controlling a release of a material carried by ultrasound sensitive particles
US8870771B2 (en) 2007-05-04 2014-10-28 Barbara Ann Karmanos Cancer Institute Method and apparatus for categorizing breast density and assessing cancer risk utilizing acoustic parameters
US10201324B2 (en) 2007-05-04 2019-02-12 Delphinus Medical Technologies, Inc. Patient interface system
EP2272432B1 (en) 2007-05-07 2012-03-14 Vascular Pathways Inc. Intravenous catheter insertion and blood sample devices
US9596993B2 (en) 2007-07-12 2017-03-21 Volcano Corporation Automatic calibration systems and methods of use
WO2009009802A1 (en) * 2007-07-12 2009-01-15 Volcano Corporation Oct-ivus catheter for concurrent luminal imaging
US9622706B2 (en) 2007-07-12 2017-04-18 Volcano Corporation Catheter for in vivo imaging
US20090036831A1 (en) * 2007-08-01 2009-02-05 Cook Incorporated Balloon catheter with delivery ports
US20100332405A1 (en) * 2007-10-24 2010-12-30 Chad Williams Method for assessing reputation of individual
EP2211974A4 (en) * 2007-10-25 2013-02-27 Proteus Digital Health Inc Fluid transfer port information system
EP2214573B1 (en) * 2007-10-26 2019-07-03 University Of Virginia Patent Foundation System for treatment and imaging using ultrasonic energy and microbubbles
WO2009067463A1 (en) * 2007-11-19 2009-05-28 Proteus Biomedical, Inc. Body-associated fluid transport structure evaluation devices
US8767514B2 (en) * 2007-12-03 2014-07-01 Kolo Technologies, Inc. Telemetric sensing using micromachined ultrasonic transducer
CN101868185B (en) * 2007-12-03 2013-12-11 科隆科技公司 CMUT packaging for ultrasound system
CN101868981B (en) * 2007-12-03 2014-05-07 科隆科技公司 Stacked transducing devices
US8157747B2 (en) * 2008-02-15 2012-04-17 Lary Research & Development, Llc Single-use indicator for a surgical instrument and a surgical instrument incorporating same
KR20110000585A (en) * 2008-05-23 2011-01-03 시와 코퍼레이션 Methods, compositions and apparatus for facilitating regeneration
US9446227B2 (en) 2008-09-12 2016-09-20 Sonescence, Inc. Ultrasonic dispersion of compositions in tissue
US20100069827A1 (en) 2008-09-12 2010-03-18 Barry Neil Silberg Pre-Surgical Prophylactic Administration of Antibiotics and Therapeutic Agents
US20100068256A1 (en) * 2008-09-16 2010-03-18 Searete Llc, A Limited Liability Corporation Of The State Of Delaware Ex vivo modifiable medicament release-substance
US20100068275A1 (en) * 2008-09-16 2010-03-18 Searete Llc, A Limited Liability Corporation Of The State Of Delaware Personalizable dosage form
US20100068254A1 (en) * 2008-09-16 2010-03-18 Mahalaxmi Gita Bangera Modifying a medicament availability state of a final dosage form
US20100068152A1 (en) * 2008-09-16 2010-03-18 Searete Llc, A Limited Liability Corporation Of The State Of Delaware Ex vivo modifiable particle or polymeric based final dosage form
US20100068235A1 (en) * 2008-09-16 2010-03-18 Searete LLC, a limited liability corporation of Deleware Individualizable dosage form
US20100068233A1 (en) * 2008-09-16 2010-03-18 Searete Llc, A Limited Liability Corporation Of The State Of Delaware Modifiable dosage form
US20100068153A1 (en) * 2008-09-16 2010-03-18 Searete Llc, A Limited Liability Corporation Of The State Of Delaware Ex vivo activatable final dosage form
US20100069821A1 (en) * 2008-09-16 2010-03-18 Searete Llc, A Limited Liability Corporation Of The State Of Delaware Ex vivo modifiable medicament release-sites final dosage form
CA2957010C (en) 2008-09-26 2017-07-04 Relievant Medsystems, Inc. Systems and methods for navigating an instrument through bone
US10028753B2 (en) 2008-09-26 2018-07-24 Relievant Medsystems, Inc. Spine treatment kits
US8372726B2 (en) 2008-10-07 2013-02-12 Mc10, Inc. Methods and applications of non-planar imaging arrays
US8389862B2 (en) 2008-10-07 2013-03-05 Mc10, Inc. Extremely stretchable electronics
US8097926B2 (en) 2008-10-07 2012-01-17 Mc10, Inc. Systems, methods, and devices having stretchable integrated circuitry for sensing and delivering therapy
US8886334B2 (en) 2008-10-07 2014-11-11 Mc10, Inc. Systems, methods, and devices using stretchable or flexible electronics for medical applications
US9289132B2 (en) 2008-10-07 2016-03-22 Mc10, Inc. Catheter balloon having stretchable integrated circuitry and sensor array
EP2373234A1 (en) * 2008-12-16 2011-10-12 Aardvark Medical, Inc. Methods and systems for delivery of fluids, aerosols and acoustic energy to tissue surfaces, cavities and obstructed passages such as intranasal ostia
US8858439B2 (en) * 2009-06-03 2014-10-14 Olympus Medical Systems Corp. Ultrasound operation apparatus, ultrasound operation system, and cavitation suppression method
CA2770452C (en) * 2009-08-17 2017-09-19 Histosonics, Inc. Disposable acoustic coupling medium container
CA2770706C (en) * 2009-08-26 2017-06-20 Charles A. Cain Devices and methods for using controlled bubble cloud cavitation in fractionating urinary stones
WO2011028603A2 (en) 2009-08-26 2011-03-10 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Micromanipulator control arm for therapeutic and imaging ultrasound transducers
US8539813B2 (en) 2009-09-22 2013-09-24 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Gel phantoms for testing cavitational ultrasound (histotripsy) transducers
WO2011041727A1 (en) 2009-10-01 2011-04-07 Mc10, Inc. Protective cases with integrated electronics
US9375223B2 (en) * 2009-10-06 2016-06-28 Cardioprolific Inc. Methods and devices for endovascular therapy
US20110105960A1 (en) * 2009-10-06 2011-05-05 Wallace Michael P Ultrasound-enhanced Stenosis therapy
US20110237982A1 (en) * 2009-10-06 2011-09-29 Wallace Michael P Ultrasound-enhanced stenosis therapy
US20110082414A1 (en) * 2009-10-06 2011-04-07 Wallace Michael P Ultrasound-enhanced stenosis therapy
US11039845B2 (en) 2009-10-06 2021-06-22 Cardioprolific Inc. Methods and devices for endovascular therapy
EP2531096A4 (en) 2010-02-01 2013-09-11 Proteus Digital Health Inc Two-wrist data gathering system
AU2011210648B2 (en) 2010-02-01 2014-10-16 Otsuka Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Data gathering system
WO2011100697A1 (en) 2010-02-12 2011-08-18 Delphinus Medical Technologies, Inc. Method of characterizing tissue of a patient
US9144403B2 (en) 2010-02-12 2015-09-29 Delphinus Medical Technologies, Inc. Method of characterizing the pathological response of tissue to a treatment plan
WO2011109735A2 (en) * 2010-03-05 2011-09-09 Cornell University Ultrasound-assisted convection enhanced delivery of compounds in vivo with a transducer cannula assembly
US8932258B2 (en) 2010-05-14 2015-01-13 C. R. Bard, Inc. Catheter placement device and method
US9950139B2 (en) 2010-05-14 2018-04-24 C. R. Bard, Inc. Catheter placement device including guidewire and catheter control elements
US9872971B2 (en) 2010-05-14 2018-01-23 C. R. Bard, Inc. Guidewire extension system for a catheter placement device
US10384039B2 (en) 2010-05-14 2019-08-20 C. R. Bard, Inc. Catheter insertion device including top-mounted advancement components
EP3511017A1 (en) 2010-09-27 2019-07-17 Siwa Corporation Selective removal of age-modified cells for treatment of atherosclerosis
US9566456B2 (en) 2010-10-18 2017-02-14 CardioSonic Ltd. Ultrasound transceiver and cooling thereof
US8696581B2 (en) * 2010-10-18 2014-04-15 CardioSonic Ltd. Ultrasound transducer and uses thereof
JP2013543423A (en) * 2010-10-18 2013-12-05 カーディオソニック リミテッド Tissue treatment
US9028417B2 (en) 2010-10-18 2015-05-12 CardioSonic Ltd. Ultrasound emission element
US8721571B2 (en) 2010-11-22 2014-05-13 Siwa Corporation Selective removal of cells having accumulated agents
US11141063B2 (en) 2010-12-23 2021-10-12 Philips Image Guided Therapy Corporation Integrated system architectures and methods of use
US11040140B2 (en) 2010-12-31 2021-06-22 Philips Image Guided Therapy Corporation Deep vein thrombosis therapeutic methods
US8690833B2 (en) 2011-01-31 2014-04-08 Vascular Pathways, Inc. Intravenous catheter and insertion device with reduced blood spatter
EP2675485A4 (en) 2011-02-15 2014-10-15 Immunomedics Inc Anti-mucin antibodies for early detection and treatment of pancreatic cancer
ES2750035T3 (en) 2011-02-25 2020-03-24 Bard Inc C R Medical component insertion device including a retractable needle
USD903101S1 (en) 2011-05-13 2020-11-24 C. R. Bard, Inc. Catheter
WO2012166686A2 (en) 2011-05-27 2012-12-06 Mc10, Inc. Electronic, optical and/or mechanical apparatus and systems and methods for fabricating same
EP3881876A1 (en) 2011-08-01 2021-09-22 Alcyone Lifesciences, Inc. Microfluidic drug delivery devices
US9144694B2 (en) 2011-08-10 2015-09-29 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Lesion generation through bone using histotripsy therapy without aberration correction
US9360630B2 (en) 2011-08-31 2016-06-07 Volcano Corporation Optical-electrical rotary joint and methods of use
WO2013049836A1 (en) * 2011-09-29 2013-04-04 Biolase, Inc. Cavitation medication delivery system
WO2013101772A1 (en) 2011-12-30 2013-07-04 Relievant Medsystems, Inc. Systems and methods for treating back pain
US9049783B2 (en) 2012-04-13 2015-06-02 Histosonics, Inc. Systems and methods for obtaining large creepage isolation on printed circuit boards
US10357304B2 (en) 2012-04-18 2019-07-23 CardioSonic Ltd. Tissue treatment
WO2013166019A1 (en) 2012-04-30 2013-11-07 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Ultrasound transducer manufacturing using rapid-prototyping method
US11357447B2 (en) 2012-05-31 2022-06-14 Sonivie Ltd. Method and/or apparatus for measuring renal denervation effectiveness
CA2875916C (en) 2012-06-19 2017-04-25 Debiopharm International Sa Prodrug derivatives of (e)-n-methyl-n-((3-methylbenzofuran-2-yl)methyl)-3-(7-oxo-5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-1,8-naphthyridin-3-yl)acrylamide
US9382329B2 (en) 2012-08-14 2016-07-05 Ibc Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Disease therapy by inducing immune response to Trop-2 expressing cells
US9763641B2 (en) 2012-08-30 2017-09-19 Delphinus Medical Technologies, Inc. Method and system for imaging a volume of tissue with tissue boundary detection
US10588691B2 (en) 2012-09-12 2020-03-17 Relievant Medsystems, Inc. Radiofrequency ablation of tissue within a vertebral body
US9307926B2 (en) 2012-10-05 2016-04-12 Volcano Corporation Automatic stent detection
EP2904671B1 (en) 2012-10-05 2022-05-04 David Welford Systems and methods for amplifying light
WO2014055906A1 (en) 2012-10-05 2014-04-10 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Bubble-induced color doppler feedback during histotripsy
US10568586B2 (en) 2012-10-05 2020-02-25 Volcano Corporation Systems for indicating parameters in an imaging data set and methods of use
US10070827B2 (en) 2012-10-05 2018-09-11 Volcano Corporation Automatic image playback
US9286673B2 (en) 2012-10-05 2016-03-15 Volcano Corporation Systems for correcting distortions in a medical image and methods of use thereof
US9324141B2 (en) 2012-10-05 2016-04-26 Volcano Corporation Removal of A-scan streaking artifact
US9292918B2 (en) 2012-10-05 2016-03-22 Volcano Corporation Methods and systems for transforming luminal images
US9858668B2 (en) 2012-10-05 2018-01-02 Volcano Corporation Guidewire artifact removal in images
US9367965B2 (en) 2012-10-05 2016-06-14 Volcano Corporation Systems and methods for generating images of tissue
US11272845B2 (en) 2012-10-05 2022-03-15 Philips Image Guided Therapy Corporation System and method for instant and automatic border detection
US9171794B2 (en) 2012-10-09 2015-10-27 Mc10, Inc. Embedding thin chips in polymer
US9840734B2 (en) 2012-10-22 2017-12-12 Raindance Technologies, Inc. Methods for analyzing DNA
US20140128734A1 (en) 2012-11-05 2014-05-08 Ekos Corporation Catheter systems and methods
CA2889478C (en) 2012-11-05 2020-11-24 Relievant Medsystems, Inc. Systems and methods for creating curved paths through bone and modulating nerves within the bone
WO2014093374A1 (en) 2012-12-13 2014-06-19 Volcano Corporation Devices, systems, and methods for targeted cannulation
US9919129B2 (en) 2012-12-18 2018-03-20 Alcyone Lifesciences, Inc. Systems and methods for reducing or preventing backflow in a delivery system
US11406498B2 (en) 2012-12-20 2022-08-09 Philips Image Guided Therapy Corporation Implant delivery system and implants
US10939826B2 (en) 2012-12-20 2021-03-09 Philips Image Guided Therapy Corporation Aspirating and removing biological material
EP2934310A4 (en) 2012-12-20 2016-10-12 Nathaniel J Kemp Optical coherence tomography system that is reconfigurable between different imaging modes
CA2895770A1 (en) 2012-12-20 2014-07-24 Jeremy Stigall Locating intravascular images
JP6785554B2 (en) 2012-12-20 2020-11-18 ボルケーノ コーポレイション Smooth transition catheter
US10942022B2 (en) 2012-12-20 2021-03-09 Philips Image Guided Therapy Corporation Manual calibration of imaging system
US10166003B2 (en) 2012-12-21 2019-01-01 Volcano Corporation Ultrasound imaging with variable line density
US10413317B2 (en) 2012-12-21 2019-09-17 Volcano Corporation System and method for catheter steering and operation
EP2936626A4 (en) 2012-12-21 2016-08-17 David Welford Systems and methods for narrowing a wavelength emission of light
WO2014100207A1 (en) * 2012-12-21 2014-06-26 Paul Hoseit Imaging guidewire with photoactivation capabilities
CA2895993A1 (en) 2012-12-21 2014-06-26 Jason Spencer System and method for graphical processing of medical data
US10058284B2 (en) 2012-12-21 2018-08-28 Volcano Corporation Simultaneous imaging, monitoring, and therapy
WO2014099672A1 (en) 2012-12-21 2014-06-26 Andrew Hancock System and method for multipath processing of image signals
CA2896004A1 (en) 2012-12-21 2014-06-26 Nathaniel J. Kemp Power-efficient optical buffering using optical switch
US9612105B2 (en) 2012-12-21 2017-04-04 Volcano Corporation Polarization sensitive optical coherence tomography system
US9486143B2 (en) 2012-12-21 2016-11-08 Volcano Corporation Intravascular forward imaging device
CA2895769A1 (en) 2012-12-21 2014-06-26 Douglas Meyer Rotational ultrasound imaging catheter with extended catheter body telescope
EP3434311B1 (en) * 2012-12-28 2021-01-27 Bard Peripheral Vascular, Inc. Drug delivery via mechanical vibration balloon
US9522254B2 (en) 2013-01-30 2016-12-20 Vascular Pathways, Inc. Systems and methods for venipuncture and catheter placement
US9050053B2 (en) 2013-02-15 2015-06-09 Naimco, Inc. Ultrasound device with cavity for conductive medium
WO2014127235A1 (en) * 2013-02-15 2014-08-21 Naimco, Inc. Preconfigured gel with infused drug for ultrasound
US10226597B2 (en) 2013-03-07 2019-03-12 Volcano Corporation Guidewire with centering mechanism
EP2965263B1 (en) 2013-03-07 2022-07-20 Bernhard Sturm Multimodal segmentation in intravascular images
US10835367B2 (en) 2013-03-08 2020-11-17 Limflow Gmbh Devices for fluid flow through body passages
CN105101912B (en) 2013-03-08 2017-08-29 林弗洛公司 There is provided or maintain the method and system of the fluid stream by body passage
EP3895604A1 (en) 2013-03-12 2021-10-20 Collins, Donna Systems and methods for diagnosing coronary microvascular disease
US20140276923A1 (en) 2013-03-12 2014-09-18 Volcano Corporation Vibrating catheter and methods of use
US11026591B2 (en) 2013-03-13 2021-06-08 Philips Image Guided Therapy Corporation Intravascular pressure sensor calibration
US10758207B2 (en) 2013-03-13 2020-09-01 Philips Image Guided Therapy Corporation Systems and methods for producing an image from a rotational intravascular ultrasound device
US10123770B2 (en) 2013-03-13 2018-11-13 Delphinus Medical Technologies, Inc. Patient support system
US9301687B2 (en) 2013-03-13 2016-04-05 Volcano Corporation System and method for OCT depth calibration
JP6342984B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2018-06-13 ボルケーノ コーポレイション Filter with echogenic properties
US10292677B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2019-05-21 Volcano Corporation Endoluminal filter having enhanced echogenic properties
US10219887B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2019-03-05 Volcano Corporation Filters with echogenic characteristics
US9452228B2 (en) 2013-04-01 2016-09-27 Immunomedics, Inc. Antibodies reactive with an epitope located in the N-terminal region of MUC5AC comprising cysteine-rich subdomain 2 (Cys2)
WO2014188430A2 (en) 2013-05-23 2014-11-27 CardioSonic Ltd. Devices and methods for renal denervation and assessment thereof
WO2014204954A1 (en) 2013-06-17 2014-12-24 Alcyone Lifesciences, Inc. Methods and devices for protecting catheter tips and stereotactic fixtures for microcatheters
CN105530869B (en) 2013-07-03 2019-10-29 希斯托索尼克斯公司 The histotripsy excitation sequence optimized is formed to bubble cloud using impact scattering
WO2015003154A1 (en) 2013-07-03 2015-01-08 Histosonics, Inc. Articulating arm limiter for cavitational ultrasound therapy system
JP6498670B2 (en) 2013-07-31 2019-04-10 アルキオーネ・ライフサイエンシズ・インコーポレイテッドAlcyone Lifesciences, Inc. Systems and methods for drug delivery, therapy, and monitoring
US9867629B2 (en) * 2013-07-31 2018-01-16 Shockwave Medical, Inc. Angioplasty balloon
US9724151B2 (en) 2013-08-08 2017-08-08 Relievant Medsystems, Inc. Modulating nerves within bone using bone fasteners
WO2015027164A1 (en) 2013-08-22 2015-02-26 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Histotripsy using very short ultrasound pulses
US9956388B2 (en) 2014-06-04 2018-05-01 Sonescence, Inc. Systems and methods for therapeutic agent delivery
US9545263B2 (en) 2014-06-19 2017-01-17 Limflow Gmbh Devices and methods for treating lower extremity vasculature
US10285667B2 (en) 2014-08-05 2019-05-14 Delphinus Medical Technologies, Inc. Method for generating an enhanced image of a volume of tissue
US10232146B2 (en) 2014-09-05 2019-03-19 C. R. Bard, Inc. Catheter insertion device including retractable needle
IL251210B2 (en) 2014-09-19 2023-12-01 Siwa Corp Anti-age antibodies for treating inflammation and auto-immune disorders
US9993535B2 (en) 2014-12-18 2018-06-12 Siwa Corporation Method and composition for treating sarcopenia
US10358502B2 (en) 2014-12-18 2019-07-23 Siwa Corporation Product and method for treating sarcopenia
US10806396B2 (en) 2015-01-26 2020-10-20 Alcyone Lifesciences, Inc. Drug delivery methods with tracer
EP4193939A1 (en) * 2015-03-26 2023-06-14 Vensica Medical Ltd. Ultrasonic urinary bladder drug delivery
WO2016172635A1 (en) * 2015-04-24 2016-10-27 The Regents Of The University Of California Nanoporphyrin telodendrimers for treatment of vascular abnormalities
USD903100S1 (en) 2015-05-01 2020-11-24 C. R. Bard, Inc. Catheter placement device
CN116672577A (en) 2015-05-15 2023-09-01 C·R·巴德股份有限公司 Catheter placement device including an extendable needle safety member
ES2948135T3 (en) 2015-06-24 2023-08-31 Univ Michigan Regents Histotripsy therapy systems for the treatment of brain tissue
US10307580B2 (en) * 2015-06-25 2019-06-04 Cardiovascular Systems, Inc. Devices, systems and methods for enhancing intraluminal drug delivery and uptake
CN114681623A (en) 2015-08-18 2022-07-01 乐天医药生技股份有限公司 Method for producing phthalocyanine dye conjugate and stable conjugate
WO2017079754A1 (en) * 2015-11-06 2017-05-11 Bkr Ip Holdco Llc Modified transdermal delivery patch with multiple absorbent pads
EP3399922A4 (en) 2016-01-04 2019-08-07 Alcyone Lifesciences, Inc. Methods and devices for treating stroke
MX2018009988A (en) 2016-02-19 2018-12-17 Siwa Corp Method and composition for treating cancer, killing metastatic cancer cells and preventing cancer metastasis using antibody to advanced glycation end products (age).
RS61312B1 (en) 2016-02-26 2021-02-26 Debiopharm Int Sa Medicament for treatment of diabetic foot infections
US11389372B2 (en) 2016-04-18 2022-07-19 Softwave Tissue Regeneration Technologies, Llc Acoustic shock wave therapeutic methods
US11389371B2 (en) 2018-05-21 2022-07-19 Softwave Tissue Regeneration Technologies, Llc Acoustic shock wave therapeutic methods
US11389373B2 (en) 2016-04-18 2022-07-19 Softwave Tissue Regeneration Technologies, Llc Acoustic shock wave therapeutic methods to prevent or treat opioid addiction
US11458069B2 (en) 2016-04-18 2022-10-04 Softwave Tissue Regeneration Technologies, Llc Acoustic shock wave therapeutic methods to treat medical conditions using reflexology zones
US11213585B2 (en) 2016-06-23 2022-01-04 Siwa Corporation Vaccines for use in treating various diseases and disorders
WO2018014021A2 (en) * 2016-07-15 2018-01-18 North Carolina State University Ultrasound transducer and array for intravascular thrombolysis
AU2017322745B2 (en) 2016-09-12 2021-09-23 C. R. Bard, Inc. Blood control for a catheter insertion device
US10995151B1 (en) 2017-01-06 2021-05-04 Siwa Corporation Methods and compositions for treating disease-related cachexia
US10925937B1 (en) 2017-01-06 2021-02-23 Siwa Corporation Vaccines for use in treating juvenile disorders associated with inflammation
US10961321B1 (en) 2017-01-06 2021-03-30 Siwa Corporation Methods and compositions for treating pain associated with inflammation
US10858449B1 (en) 2017-01-06 2020-12-08 Siwa Corporation Methods and compositions for treating osteoarthritis
USD826739S1 (en) * 2017-02-17 2018-08-28 Malvern Panalytical, Inc. Differential scanning microcalorimeter
AU2017401073B2 (en) 2017-03-01 2022-06-02 C. R. Bard, Inc. Catheter insertion device
WO2018173053A1 (en) 2017-03-20 2018-09-27 Sonievie Ltd. Pulmonary hypertension treatment method and/or system
CN110730634A (en) * 2017-04-10 2020-01-24 林弗洛公司 Apparatus and method for treating the vasculature of a lower limb
CA3059803A1 (en) 2017-04-13 2018-10-18 Siwa Corporation Humanized monoclonal advanced glycation end-product antibody
US11278356B2 (en) * 2017-04-28 2022-03-22 Arrinex, Inc. Systems and methods for locating blood vessels in the treatment of rhinitis
US20200107844A1 (en) * 2017-05-19 2020-04-09 University Of Cincinnati Intravascular Ultrasound Device and Methods for Avoiding or Treating Reperfusion Injury
US11071557B2 (en) 2017-10-19 2021-07-27 Medtronic Vascular, Inc. Catheter for creating pulse wave within vasculature
US11518801B1 (en) 2017-12-22 2022-12-06 Siwa Corporation Methods and compositions for treating diabetes and diabetic complications
EP3762084A4 (en) 2018-03-07 2021-09-29 Bard Access Systems, Inc. Guidewire advancement and blood flashback systems for a medical device insertion system
EP3773262A4 (en) * 2018-04-01 2022-01-19 Vensica Medical Ltd. System and method for ultrasonic bladder therapeutic agent delivery
US20220265291A9 (en) * 2018-06-28 2022-08-25 Marizyme, Inc. Pharmaceutical compositions and methods for the treatment of thrombosis and delivery by medical devices
EP3823722A4 (en) * 2018-07-20 2022-04-27 Suono Bio, Inc. Devices and methods for ultrasonic delivery of an agent within an oral cavity
USD921884S1 (en) 2018-07-27 2021-06-08 Bard Access Systems, Inc. Catheter insertion device
WO2020033764A1 (en) * 2018-08-08 2020-02-13 Craniovation, Inc. Tissue treatment with sensitizer and light and/or sound
AU2019359268A1 (en) 2018-10-09 2021-04-08 Limflow Gmbh Devices and methods for catheter alignment
JP2022504917A (en) * 2018-10-11 2022-01-13 スオーノ バイオ, インコーポレイテッド Tethered ultrasonic devices and their use
US11266817B2 (en) 2018-10-25 2022-03-08 Medtronic Vascular, Inc. Cavitation catheter
WO2020113083A1 (en) 2018-11-28 2020-06-04 Histosonics, Inc. Histotripsy systems and methods
CA3128067A1 (en) 2019-02-13 2020-08-20 Alpheus Medical, Inc. Non-invasive sonodynamic therapy
WO2021034862A1 (en) 2019-08-19 2021-02-25 Becton, Dickinson And Company Midline catheter placement device
EP4027912A4 (en) 2019-09-12 2023-08-16 Relievant Medsystems, Inc. Systems and methods for tissue modulation
WO2021087294A1 (en) 2019-11-01 2021-05-06 Limflow Gmbh Devices and methods for increasing blood perfusion to a distal extremity
WO2021155026A1 (en) 2020-01-28 2021-08-05 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Systems and methods for histotripsy immunosensitization
CA3227280A1 (en) * 2021-07-29 2023-02-02 Raghavendra Vitthalrao GHUGE Balloon catheter and methods of treatment using same
WO2023076479A1 (en) * 2021-10-27 2023-05-04 Suono Bio, Inc. Ultrasound-mediated drug delivery

Citations (96)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3443226A (en) * 1966-05-02 1969-05-06 Richard B D Knight Rebalance voltage measuring apparatus employing an a.c. potentiometer
US3565062A (en) * 1968-06-13 1971-02-23 Ultrasonic Systems Ultrasonic method and apparatus for removing cholesterol and other deposits from blood vessels and the like
US4027659A (en) * 1975-11-21 1977-06-07 Krandex Corporation Radiographic opaque and conductive stripped medical tubes
US4319580A (en) * 1979-08-28 1982-03-16 The Board Of Regents Of The University Of Washington Method for detecting air emboli in the blood in an intracorporeal blood vessel
US4512762A (en) * 1982-11-23 1985-04-23 The Beth Israel Hospital Association Method of treatment of atherosclerosis and a balloon catheter for same
US4573470A (en) * 1984-05-30 1986-03-04 Advanced Cardiovascular Systems, Inc. Low-profile steerable intraoperative balloon dilitation catheter
US4582067A (en) * 1983-02-14 1986-04-15 Washington Research Foundation Method for endoscopic blood flow detection by the use of ultrasonic energy
US4657543A (en) * 1984-07-23 1987-04-14 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Ultrasonically modulated polymeric devices for delivering compositions
US4657756A (en) * 1980-11-17 1987-04-14 Schering Aktiengesellschaft Microbubble precursors and apparatus for their production and use
US4750902A (en) * 1985-08-28 1988-06-14 Sonomed Technology, Inc. Endoscopic ultrasonic aspirators
US4797285A (en) * 1985-12-06 1989-01-10 Yissum Research And Development Company Of The Hebrew University Of Jerusalem Lipsome/anthraquinone drug composition and method
US4808153A (en) * 1986-11-17 1989-02-28 Ultramed Corporation Device for removing plaque from arteries
US4821740A (en) * 1986-11-26 1989-04-18 Shunro Tachibana Endermic application kits for external medicines
US4900540A (en) * 1983-06-20 1990-02-13 Trustees Of The University Of Massachusetts Lipisomes containing gas for ultrasound detection
US4917102A (en) * 1988-09-14 1990-04-17 Advanced Cardiovascular Systems, Inc. Guidewire assembly with steerable adjustable tip
US4917088A (en) * 1985-05-02 1990-04-17 C. R. Bard, Inc. Balloon dilation probe
US4920954A (en) * 1988-08-05 1990-05-01 Sonic Needle Corporation Ultrasonic device for applying cavitation forces
US4924863A (en) * 1988-05-04 1990-05-15 Mmtc, Inc. Angioplastic method for removing plaque from a vas
US4936281A (en) * 1989-04-13 1990-06-26 Everest Medical Corporation Ultrasonically enhanced RF ablation catheter
US4992257A (en) * 1988-03-11 1991-02-12 Efamol Holdings Plc Dihydroporphyrins and method of treating tumors
US5007898A (en) * 1988-06-02 1991-04-16 Advanced Surgical Intervention, Inc. Balloon dilatation catheter
US5021044A (en) * 1989-01-30 1991-06-04 Advanced Cardiovascular Systems, Inc. Catheter for even distribution of therapeutic fluids
US5081993A (en) * 1987-11-11 1992-01-21 Circulation Research Limited Methods and apparatus for the examination and treatment of internal organs
US5085662A (en) * 1989-11-13 1992-02-04 Scimed Life Systems, Inc. Atherectomy catheter and related components
US5117831A (en) * 1990-03-28 1992-06-02 Cardiovascular Imaging Systems, Inc. Vascular catheter having tandem imaging and dilatation components
US5181920A (en) * 1990-06-08 1993-01-26 Devices For Vascular Intervention, Inc. Atherectomy device with angioplasty balloon and method
US5190766A (en) * 1990-04-16 1993-03-02 Ken Ishihara Method of controlling drug release by resonant sound wave
US5197946A (en) * 1990-06-27 1993-03-30 Shunro Tachibana Injection instrument with ultrasonic oscillating element
US5209720A (en) * 1989-12-22 1993-05-11 Unger Evan C Methods for providing localized therapeutic heat to biological tissues and fluids using gas filled liposomes
US5215680A (en) * 1990-07-10 1993-06-01 Cavitation-Control Technology, Inc. Method for the production of medical-grade lipid-coated microbubbles, paramagnetic labeling of such microbubbles and therapeutic uses of microbubbles
US5216130A (en) * 1990-05-17 1993-06-01 Albany Medical College Complex for in-vivo target localization
US5277913A (en) * 1991-09-09 1994-01-11 Thompson David H Liposomal delivery system with photoactivatable triggered release
US5279546A (en) * 1990-06-27 1994-01-18 Lake Region Manufacturing Company, Inc. Thrombolysis catheter system
US5282785A (en) * 1990-06-15 1994-02-01 Cortrak Medical, Inc. Drug delivery apparatus and method
US5295484A (en) * 1992-05-19 1994-03-22 Arizona Board Of Regents For And On Behalf Of The University Of Arizona Apparatus and method for intra-cardiac ablation of arrhythmias
US5304115A (en) * 1991-01-11 1994-04-19 Baxter International Inc. Ultrasonic angioplasty device incorporating improved transmission member and ablation probe
US5315998A (en) * 1991-03-22 1994-05-31 Katsuro Tachibana Booster for therapy of diseases with ultrasound and pharmaceutical liquid composition containing the same
US5318014A (en) * 1992-09-14 1994-06-07 Coraje, Inc. Ultrasonic ablation/dissolution transducer
US5323769A (en) * 1990-02-23 1994-06-28 Cygnus Therapeutic Systems Ultrasound-enhanced delivery of materials into and through the skin
US5324225A (en) * 1990-12-11 1994-06-28 Takara Co., Ltd. Interactive toy figure with sound-activated and pressure-activated switches
US5380273A (en) * 1992-05-19 1995-01-10 Dubrul; Will R. Vibrating catheter
US5390678A (en) * 1993-10-12 1995-02-21 Baxter International Inc. Method and device for measuring ultrasonic activity in an ultrasound delivery system
US5399158A (en) * 1990-05-31 1995-03-21 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Army Method of lysing thrombi
US5415636A (en) * 1994-04-13 1995-05-16 Schneider (Usa) Inc Dilation-drug delivery catheter
US5419763A (en) * 1994-01-04 1995-05-30 Cortrak Medical, Inc. Prostatic drug-delivery catheter
US5421338A (en) * 1988-03-21 1995-06-06 Boston Scientific Corporation Acoustic imaging catheter and the like
US5423797A (en) * 1994-04-25 1995-06-13 Medelex, Inc. Acoustic catheter with rotary drive
US5489279A (en) * 1994-03-21 1996-02-06 Dusa Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Method of applying photodynamic therapy to dermal lesion
US5498238A (en) * 1990-06-15 1996-03-12 Cortrak Medical, Inc. Simultaneous angioplasty and phoretic drug delivery
US5509896A (en) * 1994-09-09 1996-04-23 Coraje, Inc. Enhancement of thrombolysis with external ultrasound
US5514092A (en) * 1994-08-08 1996-05-07 Schneider (Usa) Inc. Drug delivery and dilatation-drug delivery catheters in a rapid exchange configuration
US5520189A (en) * 1990-07-13 1996-05-28 Coraje, Inc. Intravascular ultrasound imaging guidewire
US5594136A (en) * 1989-12-21 1997-01-14 Pharmacyclics, Inc. Texaphyrin solid supports and devices
US5599923A (en) * 1989-03-06 1997-02-04 Board Of Regents, University Of Tx Texaphyrin metal complexes having improved functionalization
US5603327A (en) * 1993-02-01 1997-02-18 Endosonics Corporation Ultrasound catheter probe
US5606974A (en) * 1995-05-02 1997-03-04 Heart Rhythm Technologies, Inc. Catheter having ultrasonic device
US5609574A (en) * 1992-11-02 1997-03-11 Localmed, Inc. Intravascular catheter with infusion array
US5616342A (en) * 1995-04-11 1997-04-01 Pdt, Inc. Emulsioin suitable for administering a poorly water-soluble photosensitizing compound and use thereof
US5618275A (en) * 1995-10-27 1997-04-08 Sonex International Corporation Ultrasonic method and apparatus for cosmetic and dermatological applications
US5617851A (en) * 1992-10-14 1997-04-08 Endodermic Medical Technologies Company Ultrasonic transdermal system for withdrawing fluid from an organism and determining the concentration of a substance in the fluid
US5620479A (en) * 1992-11-13 1997-04-15 The Regents Of The University Of California Method and apparatus for thermal therapy of tumors
US5628728A (en) * 1995-05-31 1997-05-13 Ekos Corporation Medicine applying tool
US5630837A (en) * 1993-07-01 1997-05-20 Boston Scientific Corporation Acoustic ablation
US5632970A (en) * 1992-01-21 1997-05-27 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas Fluoresence detection using texaphyrins
US5707608A (en) * 1995-08-02 1998-01-13 Qlt Phototherapeutics, Inc. Methods of making liposomes containing hydro-monobenzoporphyrin photosensitizer
US5713848A (en) * 1993-05-19 1998-02-03 Dubrul; Will R. Vibrating catheter
US5718921A (en) * 1987-03-13 1998-02-17 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Microspheres comprising polymer and drug dispersed there within
US5725494A (en) * 1995-11-30 1998-03-10 Pharmasonics, Inc. Apparatus and methods for ultrasonically enhanced intraluminal therapy
US5733572A (en) * 1989-12-22 1998-03-31 Imarx Pharmaceutical Corp. Gas and gaseous precursor filled microspheres as topical and subcutaneous delivery vehicles
US5735811A (en) * 1995-11-30 1998-04-07 Pharmasonics, Inc. Apparatus and methods for ultrasonically enhanced fluid delivery
US5766902A (en) * 1993-08-20 1998-06-16 Therexsys Limited Transfection process
US5770222A (en) * 1989-12-22 1998-06-23 Imarx Pharmaceutical Corp. Therapeutic drug delivery systems
US5876989A (en) * 1994-09-08 1999-03-02 Photocure As Transfer of molecules into the cytosol of cells
US5895398A (en) * 1996-02-02 1999-04-20 The Regents Of The University Of California Method of using a clot capture coil
US5895356A (en) * 1995-11-15 1999-04-20 American Medical Systems, Inc. Apparatus and method for transurethral focussed ultrasound therapy
US5916192A (en) * 1991-01-11 1999-06-29 Advanced Cardiovascular Systems, Inc. Ultrasonic angioplasty-atherectomy catheter and method of use
US6024718A (en) * 1996-09-04 2000-02-15 The Regents Of The University Of California Intraluminal directed ultrasound delivery device
US6030374A (en) * 1998-05-29 2000-02-29 Mcdaniel; David H. Ultrasound enhancement of percutaneous drug absorption
US6068857A (en) * 1993-09-09 2000-05-30 Schering Aktiengesellchaft Microparticles containing active ingredients, agents containing these microparticles, their use for ultrasound-controlled release of active ingredients, as well as a process for their production
US6210356B1 (en) * 1998-08-05 2001-04-03 Ekos Corporation Ultrasound assembly for use with a catheter
US6228046B1 (en) * 1997-06-02 2001-05-08 Pharmasonics, Inc. Catheters comprising a plurality of oscillators and methods for their use
US6245747B1 (en) * 1996-03-12 2001-06-12 The Board Of Regents Of The University Of Nebraska Targeted site specific antisense oligodeoxynucleotide delivery method
US20010003790A1 (en) * 1996-02-15 2001-06-14 Shlomo Ben-Haim Catheter based surgery
US6346098B1 (en) * 2000-03-07 2002-02-12 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Methods and kits for locally administering an active agent to an interstitial space of a host
US20020032394A1 (en) * 2000-03-08 2002-03-14 Axel Brisken Methods, systems, and kits for plaque stabilization
US6372498B2 (en) * 1997-12-31 2002-04-16 Pharmasonics, Inc. Methods, systems, and kits for intravascular nucleic acid delivery
US6508816B2 (en) * 1998-03-27 2003-01-21 John H. Shadduck Medical instrument working end creating very high pressure gradients
US6524251B2 (en) * 1999-10-05 2003-02-25 Omnisonics Medical Technologies, Inc. Ultrasonic device for tissue ablation and sheath for use therewith
US6527761B1 (en) * 2000-10-27 2003-03-04 Pulmonx, Inc. Methods and devices for obstructing and aspirating lung tissue segments
US20030065525A1 (en) * 2001-10-01 2003-04-03 Daniella Giacchetti Systems and methods for providing beauty guidance
US6548047B1 (en) * 1997-09-15 2003-04-15 Bristol-Myers Squibb Medical Imaging, Inc. Thermal preactivation of gaseous precursor filled compositions
US6551337B1 (en) * 1999-10-05 2003-04-22 Omnisonics Medical Technologies, Inc. Ultrasonic medical device operating in a transverse mode
US20040024347A1 (en) * 2001-12-03 2004-02-05 Wilson Richard R. Catheter with multiple ultrasound radiating members
US20040039329A1 (en) * 2002-05-24 2004-02-26 Dornier Medtech Systems Gmbh Method and apparatus for transferring medically effective substances into cells
US6723063B1 (en) * 1998-06-29 2004-04-20 Ekos Corporation Sheath for use with an ultrasound element
US20050027247A1 (en) * 2003-07-29 2005-02-03 Scimed Life Systems, Inc. Apparatus and method for treating intravascular disease

Family Cites Families (53)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3433226A (en) 1965-07-21 1969-03-18 Aeroprojects Inc Vibratory catheterization apparatus and method of using
US4040414A (en) 1976-05-12 1977-08-09 Xygiene, Inc. Ultrasonic personal care instrument and method
US4354502A (en) 1979-08-28 1982-10-19 The Board Of Regents Of The University Of Washington Intravascular catheter including untrasonic transducer for use in detection and aspiration of air emboli
US5370675A (en) 1992-08-12 1994-12-06 Vidamed, Inc. Medical probe device and method
US4531943A (en) 1983-08-08 1985-07-30 Angiomedics Corporation Catheter with soft deformable tip
US4955863A (en) 1986-02-05 1990-09-11 Menlo Care, Inc. Adjustable catheter assembly
US4767402A (en) 1986-07-08 1988-08-30 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Ultrasound enhancement of transdermal drug delivery
US4780212A (en) 1987-07-31 1988-10-25 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Ultrasound enchancement of membrane permeability
US4870953A (en) 1987-11-13 1989-10-03 Donmicheal T Anthony Intravascular ultrasonic catheter/probe and method for treating intravascular blockage
JPH0629196B2 (en) 1987-12-01 1994-04-20 甲子郎 梅村 Physiological action enhancer for tumor treatment by ultrasound
US5163421A (en) 1988-01-22 1992-11-17 Angiosonics, Inc. In vivo ultrasonic system with angioplasty and ultrasonic contrast imaging
US5158071A (en) 1988-07-01 1992-10-27 Hitachi, Ltd. Ultrasonic apparatus for therapeutical use
US4877031A (en) 1988-07-22 1989-10-31 Advanced Cardiovascular Systems, Inc. Steerable perfusion dilatation catheter
US5344435A (en) 1988-07-28 1994-09-06 Bsd Medical Corporation Urethral inserted applicator prostate hyperthermia
US5078144A (en) 1988-08-19 1992-01-07 Olympus Optical Co. Ltd. System for applying ultrasonic waves and a treatment instrument to a body part
US5567687A (en) 1989-03-06 1996-10-22 University Of Texas Texaphyrins and uses thereof
US5328470A (en) 1989-03-31 1994-07-12 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Treatment of diseases by site-specific instillation of cells or site-specific transformation of cells and kits therefor
US5088499A (en) 1989-12-22 1992-02-18 Unger Evan C Liposomes as contrast agents for ultrasonic imaging and methods for preparing the same
US5149319A (en) * 1990-09-11 1992-09-22 Unger Evan C Methods for providing localized therapeutic heat to biological tissues and fluids
US5542935A (en) * 1989-12-22 1996-08-06 Imarx Pharmaceutical Corp. Therapeutic delivery systems related applications
DE4005743A1 (en) 1990-02-23 1991-08-29 Wolf Gmbh Richard Lithotriptor to destroy gallstones intra-or trans-luminally - has shock-wave generator, lead contg. incompressible material, and opt balloon to press generator against gall bladder
US5250034A (en) 1990-09-17 1993-10-05 E-Z-Em, Inc. Pressure responsive valve catheter
US5269291A (en) 1990-12-10 1993-12-14 Coraje, Inc. Miniature ultrasonic transducer for plaque ablation
US5997497A (en) 1991-01-11 1999-12-07 Advanced Cardiovascular Systems Ultrasound catheter having integrated drug delivery system and methods of using same
US5447509A (en) 1991-01-11 1995-09-05 Baxter International Inc. Ultrasound catheter system having modulated output with feedback control
US5324255A (en) 1991-01-11 1994-06-28 Baxter International Inc. Angioplasty and ablative devices having onboard ultrasound components and devices and methods for utilizing ultrasound to treat or prevent vasopasm
US5267954A (en) 1991-01-11 1993-12-07 Baxter International Inc. Ultra-sound catheter for removing obstructions from tubular anatomical structures such as blood vessels
US5445155A (en) 1991-03-13 1995-08-29 Scimed Life Systems Incorporated Intravascular imaging apparatus and methods for use and manufacture
US5353798A (en) 1991-03-13 1994-10-11 Scimed Life Systems, Incorporated Intravascular imaging apparatus and methods for use and manufacture
US5458568A (en) 1991-05-24 1995-10-17 Cortrak Medical, Inc. Porous balloon for selective dilatation and drug delivery
US5219358A (en) 1991-08-29 1993-06-15 Ethicon, Inc. Shape memory effect surgical needles
JPH07505790A (en) 1991-11-08 1995-06-29 バクスター インターナショナル インコーポレーテッド Transfer catheter and ultrasound probe for use with the same
US5325860A (en) 1991-11-08 1994-07-05 Mayo Foundation For Medical Education And Research Ultrasonic and interventional catheter and method
GB2263974B (en) 1992-01-30 1995-11-08 Intravascular Res Ltd Ultrasound imaging and catheters for use therein
US5327891A (en) 1992-07-30 1994-07-12 Rammler David H Catheter track and catheter for diagnosis and treatment
JPH07500523A (en) 1992-08-28 1995-01-19 コートラック・メディカル・インコーポレーテッド Polymer matrix drug delivery device and method
US5362309A (en) 1992-09-14 1994-11-08 Coraje, Inc. Apparatus and method for enhanced intravascular phonophoresis including dissolution of intravascular blockage and concomitant inhibition of restenosis
JP2746021B2 (en) 1992-10-20 1998-04-28 富士写真光機株式会社 Ultrasonic probe
DE4235506A1 (en) 1992-10-21 1994-04-28 Bavaria Med Tech Drug injection catheter
US5267985A (en) 1993-02-11 1993-12-07 Trancell, Inc. Drug delivery by multiple frequency phonophoresis
DE69432148T2 (en) 1993-07-01 2003-10-16 Boston Scient Ltd CATHETER FOR IMAGE DISPLAY, DISPLAY OF ELECTRICAL SIGNALS AND ABLATION
US5830686A (en) * 1994-01-13 1998-11-03 Calydon Tissue-specific enhancer active in prostate
US5873828A (en) 1994-02-18 1999-02-23 Olympus Optical Co., Ltd. Ultrasonic diagnosis and treatment system
JP3060199B2 (en) 1994-09-30 2000-07-10 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Method for producing hydroxygallium phthalocyanine crystal
US5569198A (en) * 1995-01-23 1996-10-29 Cortrak Medical Inc. Microporous catheter
AU5183096A (en) 1995-03-08 1996-09-23 Ekos, Llc Ultrasound therapy device
US5735280A (en) 1995-05-02 1998-04-07 Heart Rhythm Technologies, Inc. Ultrasound energy delivery system and method
CA2220689A1 (en) 1995-05-10 1996-11-14 Cardiogenesis Corporation System for treating or diagnosing heart tissue
EP0825834A4 (en) 1995-05-15 2000-01-05 Coraje Inc Enhancement of ultrasound thrombolysis
US5849727A (en) * 1996-06-28 1998-12-15 Board Of Regents Of The University Of Nebraska Compositions and methods for altering the biodistribution of biological agents
US5846218A (en) * 1996-09-05 1998-12-08 Pharmasonics, Inc. Balloon catheters having ultrasonically driven interface surfaces and methods for their use
WO1998048711A1 (en) 1997-05-01 1998-11-05 Ekos Corporation Ultrasound catheter
JP4441000B2 (en) 1997-06-23 2010-03-24 克郎 立花 Biological tissue processing device

Patent Citations (100)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3443226A (en) * 1966-05-02 1969-05-06 Richard B D Knight Rebalance voltage measuring apparatus employing an a.c. potentiometer
US3565062A (en) * 1968-06-13 1971-02-23 Ultrasonic Systems Ultrasonic method and apparatus for removing cholesterol and other deposits from blood vessels and the like
US4027659A (en) * 1975-11-21 1977-06-07 Krandex Corporation Radiographic opaque and conductive stripped medical tubes
US4319580A (en) * 1979-08-28 1982-03-16 The Board Of Regents Of The University Of Washington Method for detecting air emboli in the blood in an intracorporeal blood vessel
US4657756A (en) * 1980-11-17 1987-04-14 Schering Aktiengesellschaft Microbubble precursors and apparatus for their production and use
US4512762A (en) * 1982-11-23 1985-04-23 The Beth Israel Hospital Association Method of treatment of atherosclerosis and a balloon catheter for same
US4582067A (en) * 1983-02-14 1986-04-15 Washington Research Foundation Method for endoscopic blood flow detection by the use of ultrasonic energy
US4900540A (en) * 1983-06-20 1990-02-13 Trustees Of The University Of Massachusetts Lipisomes containing gas for ultrasound detection
US4573470A (en) * 1984-05-30 1986-03-04 Advanced Cardiovascular Systems, Inc. Low-profile steerable intraoperative balloon dilitation catheter
US4657543A (en) * 1984-07-23 1987-04-14 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Ultrasonically modulated polymeric devices for delivering compositions
US4917088A (en) * 1985-05-02 1990-04-17 C. R. Bard, Inc. Balloon dilation probe
US4750902A (en) * 1985-08-28 1988-06-14 Sonomed Technology, Inc. Endoscopic ultrasonic aspirators
US4797285A (en) * 1985-12-06 1989-01-10 Yissum Research And Development Company Of The Hebrew University Of Jerusalem Lipsome/anthraquinone drug composition and method
US4808153A (en) * 1986-11-17 1989-02-28 Ultramed Corporation Device for removing plaque from arteries
US4821740A (en) * 1986-11-26 1989-04-18 Shunro Tachibana Endermic application kits for external medicines
US5718921A (en) * 1987-03-13 1998-02-17 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Microspheres comprising polymer and drug dispersed there within
US5081993A (en) * 1987-11-11 1992-01-21 Circulation Research Limited Methods and apparatus for the examination and treatment of internal organs
US4992257A (en) * 1988-03-11 1991-02-12 Efamol Holdings Plc Dihydroporphyrins and method of treating tumors
US5421338A (en) * 1988-03-21 1995-06-06 Boston Scientific Corporation Acoustic imaging catheter and the like
US4924863A (en) * 1988-05-04 1990-05-15 Mmtc, Inc. Angioplastic method for removing plaque from a vas
US5007898A (en) * 1988-06-02 1991-04-16 Advanced Surgical Intervention, Inc. Balloon dilatation catheter
US4920954A (en) * 1988-08-05 1990-05-01 Sonic Needle Corporation Ultrasonic device for applying cavitation forces
US4917102A (en) * 1988-09-14 1990-04-17 Advanced Cardiovascular Systems, Inc. Guidewire assembly with steerable adjustable tip
US5021044A (en) * 1989-01-30 1991-06-04 Advanced Cardiovascular Systems, Inc. Catheter for even distribution of therapeutic fluids
US5599923A (en) * 1989-03-06 1997-02-04 Board Of Regents, University Of Tx Texaphyrin metal complexes having improved functionalization
US4936281A (en) * 1989-04-13 1990-06-26 Everest Medical Corporation Ultrasonically enhanced RF ablation catheter
US5085662A (en) * 1989-11-13 1992-02-04 Scimed Life Systems, Inc. Atherectomy catheter and related components
US5594136A (en) * 1989-12-21 1997-01-14 Pharmacyclics, Inc. Texaphyrin solid supports and devices
US5770222A (en) * 1989-12-22 1998-06-23 Imarx Pharmaceutical Corp. Therapeutic drug delivery systems
US5733572A (en) * 1989-12-22 1998-03-31 Imarx Pharmaceutical Corp. Gas and gaseous precursor filled microspheres as topical and subcutaneous delivery vehicles
US5209720A (en) * 1989-12-22 1993-05-11 Unger Evan C Methods for providing localized therapeutic heat to biological tissues and fluids using gas filled liposomes
US5323769A (en) * 1990-02-23 1994-06-28 Cygnus Therapeutic Systems Ultrasound-enhanced delivery of materials into and through the skin
US5117831A (en) * 1990-03-28 1992-06-02 Cardiovascular Imaging Systems, Inc. Vascular catheter having tandem imaging and dilatation components
US5190766A (en) * 1990-04-16 1993-03-02 Ken Ishihara Method of controlling drug release by resonant sound wave
US5216130A (en) * 1990-05-17 1993-06-01 Albany Medical College Complex for in-vivo target localization
US5399158A (en) * 1990-05-31 1995-03-21 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Army Method of lysing thrombi
US5181920A (en) * 1990-06-08 1993-01-26 Devices For Vascular Intervention, Inc. Atherectomy device with angioplasty balloon and method
US5286254A (en) * 1990-06-15 1994-02-15 Cortrak Medical, Inc. Drug delivery apparatus and method
US5282785A (en) * 1990-06-15 1994-02-01 Cortrak Medical, Inc. Drug delivery apparatus and method
US5498238A (en) * 1990-06-15 1996-03-12 Cortrak Medical, Inc. Simultaneous angioplasty and phoretic drug delivery
US5628730A (en) * 1990-06-15 1997-05-13 Cortrak Medical, Inc. Phoretic balloon catheter with hydrogel coating
US5197946A (en) * 1990-06-27 1993-03-30 Shunro Tachibana Injection instrument with ultrasonic oscillating element
US5279546A (en) * 1990-06-27 1994-01-18 Lake Region Manufacturing Company, Inc. Thrombolysis catheter system
US5215680A (en) * 1990-07-10 1993-06-01 Cavitation-Control Technology, Inc. Method for the production of medical-grade lipid-coated microbubbles, paramagnetic labeling of such microbubbles and therapeutic uses of microbubbles
US5520189A (en) * 1990-07-13 1996-05-28 Coraje, Inc. Intravascular ultrasound imaging guidewire
US5324225A (en) * 1990-12-11 1994-06-28 Takara Co., Ltd. Interactive toy figure with sound-activated and pressure-activated switches
US5304115A (en) * 1991-01-11 1994-04-19 Baxter International Inc. Ultrasonic angioplasty device incorporating improved transmission member and ablation probe
US5916192A (en) * 1991-01-11 1999-06-29 Advanced Cardiovascular Systems, Inc. Ultrasonic angioplasty-atherectomy catheter and method of use
US5315998A (en) * 1991-03-22 1994-05-31 Katsuro Tachibana Booster for therapy of diseases with ultrasound and pharmaceutical liquid composition containing the same
US5277913A (en) * 1991-09-09 1994-01-11 Thompson David H Liposomal delivery system with photoactivatable triggered release
US5632970A (en) * 1992-01-21 1997-05-27 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas Fluoresence detection using texaphyrins
US5295484A (en) * 1992-05-19 1994-03-22 Arizona Board Of Regents For And On Behalf Of The University Of Arizona Apparatus and method for intra-cardiac ablation of arrhythmias
US5380273A (en) * 1992-05-19 1995-01-10 Dubrul; Will R. Vibrating catheter
US5318014A (en) * 1992-09-14 1994-06-07 Coraje, Inc. Ultrasonic ablation/dissolution transducer
US5617851A (en) * 1992-10-14 1997-04-08 Endodermic Medical Technologies Company Ultrasonic transdermal system for withdrawing fluid from an organism and determining the concentration of a substance in the fluid
US5609574A (en) * 1992-11-02 1997-03-11 Localmed, Inc. Intravascular catheter with infusion array
US5620479A (en) * 1992-11-13 1997-04-15 The Regents Of The University Of California Method and apparatus for thermal therapy of tumors
US5603327A (en) * 1993-02-01 1997-02-18 Endosonics Corporation Ultrasound catheter probe
US5713848A (en) * 1993-05-19 1998-02-03 Dubrul; Will R. Vibrating catheter
US5630837A (en) * 1993-07-01 1997-05-20 Boston Scientific Corporation Acoustic ablation
US5766902A (en) * 1993-08-20 1998-06-16 Therexsys Limited Transfection process
US6068857A (en) * 1993-09-09 2000-05-30 Schering Aktiengesellchaft Microparticles containing active ingredients, agents containing these microparticles, their use for ultrasound-controlled release of active ingredients, as well as a process for their production
US5390678A (en) * 1993-10-12 1995-02-21 Baxter International Inc. Method and device for measuring ultrasonic activity in an ultrasound delivery system
US5419763A (en) * 1994-01-04 1995-05-30 Cortrak Medical, Inc. Prostatic drug-delivery catheter
US5419763B1 (en) * 1994-01-04 1997-07-15 Cor Trak Medical Inc Prostatic drug-delivery catheter
US5489279A (en) * 1994-03-21 1996-02-06 Dusa Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Method of applying photodynamic therapy to dermal lesion
US5415636A (en) * 1994-04-13 1995-05-16 Schneider (Usa) Inc Dilation-drug delivery catheter
US5423797A (en) * 1994-04-25 1995-06-13 Medelex, Inc. Acoustic catheter with rotary drive
US5514092A (en) * 1994-08-08 1996-05-07 Schneider (Usa) Inc. Drug delivery and dilatation-drug delivery catheters in a rapid exchange configuration
US6680301B2 (en) * 1994-09-08 2004-01-20 Photocure As Transfer of molecules into the cytosol of cells
US5876989A (en) * 1994-09-08 1999-03-02 Photocure As Transfer of molecules into the cytosol of cells
US5509896A (en) * 1994-09-09 1996-04-23 Coraje, Inc. Enhancement of thrombolysis with external ultrasound
US5616342A (en) * 1995-04-11 1997-04-01 Pdt, Inc. Emulsioin suitable for administering a poorly water-soluble photosensitizing compound and use thereof
US5606974A (en) * 1995-05-02 1997-03-04 Heart Rhythm Technologies, Inc. Catheter having ultrasonic device
US5628728A (en) * 1995-05-31 1997-05-13 Ekos Corporation Medicine applying tool
US5707608A (en) * 1995-08-02 1998-01-13 Qlt Phototherapeutics, Inc. Methods of making liposomes containing hydro-monobenzoporphyrin photosensitizer
US5618275A (en) * 1995-10-27 1997-04-08 Sonex International Corporation Ultrasonic method and apparatus for cosmetic and dermatological applications
US5895356A (en) * 1995-11-15 1999-04-20 American Medical Systems, Inc. Apparatus and method for transurethral focussed ultrasound therapy
US5735811A (en) * 1995-11-30 1998-04-07 Pharmasonics, Inc. Apparatus and methods for ultrasonically enhanced fluid delivery
US5725494A (en) * 1995-11-30 1998-03-10 Pharmasonics, Inc. Apparatus and methods for ultrasonically enhanced intraluminal therapy
US5895398A (en) * 1996-02-02 1999-04-20 The Regents Of The University Of California Method of using a clot capture coil
US20010003790A1 (en) * 1996-02-15 2001-06-14 Shlomo Ben-Haim Catheter based surgery
US6245747B1 (en) * 1996-03-12 2001-06-12 The Board Of Regents Of The University Of Nebraska Targeted site specific antisense oligodeoxynucleotide delivery method
US6024718A (en) * 1996-09-04 2000-02-15 The Regents Of The University Of California Intraluminal directed ultrasound delivery device
US6228046B1 (en) * 1997-06-02 2001-05-08 Pharmasonics, Inc. Catheters comprising a plurality of oscillators and methods for their use
US6548047B1 (en) * 1997-09-15 2003-04-15 Bristol-Myers Squibb Medical Imaging, Inc. Thermal preactivation of gaseous precursor filled compositions
US6372498B2 (en) * 1997-12-31 2002-04-16 Pharmasonics, Inc. Methods, systems, and kits for intravascular nucleic acid delivery
US6508816B2 (en) * 1998-03-27 2003-01-21 John H. Shadduck Medical instrument working end creating very high pressure gradients
US6030374A (en) * 1998-05-29 2000-02-29 Mcdaniel; David H. Ultrasound enhancement of percutaneous drug absorption
US6723063B1 (en) * 1998-06-29 2004-04-20 Ekos Corporation Sheath for use with an ultrasound element
US6210356B1 (en) * 1998-08-05 2001-04-03 Ekos Corporation Ultrasound assembly for use with a catheter
US6551337B1 (en) * 1999-10-05 2003-04-22 Omnisonics Medical Technologies, Inc. Ultrasonic medical device operating in a transverse mode
US6524251B2 (en) * 1999-10-05 2003-02-25 Omnisonics Medical Technologies, Inc. Ultrasonic device for tissue ablation and sheath for use therewith
US6346098B1 (en) * 2000-03-07 2002-02-12 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Methods and kits for locally administering an active agent to an interstitial space of a host
US20020032394A1 (en) * 2000-03-08 2002-03-14 Axel Brisken Methods, systems, and kits for plaque stabilization
US6527761B1 (en) * 2000-10-27 2003-03-04 Pulmonx, Inc. Methods and devices for obstructing and aspirating lung tissue segments
US20030065525A1 (en) * 2001-10-01 2003-04-03 Daniella Giacchetti Systems and methods for providing beauty guidance
US20040024347A1 (en) * 2001-12-03 2004-02-05 Wilson Richard R. Catheter with multiple ultrasound radiating members
US20040039329A1 (en) * 2002-05-24 2004-02-26 Dornier Medtech Systems Gmbh Method and apparatus for transferring medically effective substances into cells
US20050027247A1 (en) * 2003-07-29 2005-02-03 Scimed Life Systems, Inc. Apparatus and method for treating intravascular disease

Cited By (46)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8690818B2 (en) 1997-05-01 2014-04-08 Ekos Corporation Ultrasound catheter for providing a therapeutic effect to a vessel of a body
US8764700B2 (en) 1998-06-29 2014-07-01 Ekos Corporation Sheath for use with an ultrasound element
US10926074B2 (en) 2001-12-03 2021-02-23 Ekos Corporation Catheter with multiple ultrasound radiating members
US9415242B2 (en) 2001-12-03 2016-08-16 Ekos Corporation Catheter with multiple ultrasound radiating members
US8696612B2 (en) 2001-12-03 2014-04-15 Ekos Corporation Catheter with multiple ultrasound radiating members
US10080878B2 (en) 2001-12-03 2018-09-25 Ekos Corporation Catheter with multiple ultrasound radiating members
US8852166B1 (en) 2002-04-01 2014-10-07 Ekos Corporation Ultrasonic catheter power control
US9943675B1 (en) 2002-04-01 2018-04-17 Ekos Corporation Ultrasonic catheter power control
US20050084538A1 (en) * 2003-08-27 2005-04-21 The Regents Of The University Of California, A California Corporation Ultrasonic concentration of drug delivery capsules
US7358226B2 (en) * 2003-08-27 2008-04-15 The Regents Of The University Of California Ultrasonic concentration of drug delivery capsules
US9107590B2 (en) 2004-01-29 2015-08-18 Ekos Corporation Method and apparatus for detecting vascular conditions with a catheter
US20070078290A1 (en) * 2005-09-30 2007-04-05 Esenaliev Rinat O Ultrasound-based treatment methods for therapeutic treatment of skin and subcutaneous tissues
US11058901B2 (en) 2006-04-24 2021-07-13 Ekos Corporation Ultrasound therapy system
US10232196B2 (en) 2006-04-24 2019-03-19 Ekos Corporation Ultrasound therapy system
US20090297455A1 (en) * 2006-08-09 2009-12-03 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Device for and a method of activating a physiologically effective substance by ultrasonic waves, and a capsule
US10182833B2 (en) 2007-01-08 2019-01-22 Ekos Corporation Power parameters for ultrasonic catheter
US10188410B2 (en) 2007-01-08 2019-01-29 Ekos Corporation Power parameters for ultrasonic catheter
US20080319376A1 (en) * 2007-06-22 2008-12-25 Ekos Corporation Method and apparatus for treatment of intracranial hemorrhages
US11672553B2 (en) 2007-06-22 2023-06-13 Ekos Corporation Method and apparatus for treatment of intracranial hemorrhages
US9044568B2 (en) 2007-06-22 2015-06-02 Ekos Corporation Method and apparatus for treatment of intracranial hemorrhages
US20090054853A1 (en) * 2007-08-22 2009-02-26 Huyser Richard F Surgical tool system that forms a sterile gas barrier at the site at which the tool of the system is used and that activates energy-activated agents discharged at the site
US11589920B2 (en) 2008-10-06 2023-02-28 Santa Anna Tech Llc Catheter with a double balloon structure to generate and apply an ablative zone to tissue
US11779430B2 (en) 2008-10-06 2023-10-10 Santa Anna Tech Llc Vapor based ablation system for treating uterine bleeding
US11813014B2 (en) 2008-10-06 2023-11-14 Santa Anna Tech Llc Methods and systems for directed tissue ablation
US10064697B2 (en) 2008-10-06 2018-09-04 Santa Anna Tech Llc Vapor based ablation system for treating various indications
US11020175B2 (en) 2008-10-06 2021-06-01 Santa Anna Tech Llc Methods of ablating tissue using time-limited treatment periods
US10695126B2 (en) 2008-10-06 2020-06-30 Santa Anna Tech Llc Catheter with a double balloon structure to generate and apply a heated ablative zone to tissue
US10842549B2 (en) 2008-10-06 2020-11-24 Santa Anna Tech Llc Vapor ablation system with a catheter having more than one positioning element and configured to treat pulmonary tissue
US10842557B2 (en) 2008-10-06 2020-11-24 Santa Anna Tech Llc Vapor ablation system with a catheter having more than one positioning element and configured to treat duodenal tissue
US10842548B2 (en) 2008-10-06 2020-11-24 Santa Anna Tech Llc Vapor ablation system with a catheter having more than one positioning element
US20100113983A1 (en) * 2008-10-31 2010-05-06 Microsoft Corporation Utilizing ultrasound to disrupt pathogens
US9849273B2 (en) 2009-07-03 2017-12-26 Ekos Corporation Power parameters for ultrasonic catheter
US8740835B2 (en) 2010-02-17 2014-06-03 Ekos Corporation Treatment of vascular occlusions using ultrasonic energy and microbubbles
US20110201974A1 (en) * 2010-02-17 2011-08-18 Ekos Corporation Treatment of vascular occlusions using ultrasonic energy and microbubbles
US9192566B2 (en) 2010-02-17 2015-11-24 Ekos Corporation Treatment of vascular occlusions using ultrasonic energy and microbubbles
US10888657B2 (en) 2010-08-27 2021-01-12 Ekos Corporation Method and apparatus for treatment of intracranial hemorrhages
US11458290B2 (en) 2011-05-11 2022-10-04 Ekos Corporation Ultrasound system
US9579494B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2017-02-28 Ekos Corporation Method and apparatus for drug delivery to a target site
US10507320B2 (en) 2014-09-22 2019-12-17 Ekos Corporation Catheter system
US10092742B2 (en) 2014-09-22 2018-10-09 Ekos Corporation Catheter system
US10656025B2 (en) 2015-06-10 2020-05-19 Ekos Corporation Ultrasound catheter
US11740138B2 (en) 2015-06-10 2023-08-29 Ekos Corporation Ultrasound catheter
US11331140B2 (en) 2016-05-19 2022-05-17 Aqua Heart, Inc. Heated vapor ablation systems and methods for treating cardiac conditions
US11806066B2 (en) 2018-06-01 2023-11-07 Santa Anna Tech Llc Multi-stage vapor-based ablation treatment methods and vapor generation and delivery systems
US11864809B2 (en) 2018-06-01 2024-01-09 Santa Anna Tech Llc Vapor-based ablation treatment methods with improved treatment volume vapor management
US11925367B2 (en) 2018-12-20 2024-03-12 Ekos Corporation Power parameters for ultrasonic catheter

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20040229830A1 (en) 2004-11-18
US20030092667A1 (en) 2003-05-15
US20030157024A1 (en) 2003-08-21
US6176842B1 (en) 2001-01-23
US6527759B1 (en) 2003-03-04

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US6176842B1 (en) Ultrasound assembly for use with light activated drugs
US20090105633A1 (en) Ultrasound assembly for use with light activated drugs
US5715824A (en) Methods of preparing gas-filled liposomes
JP3910630B2 (en) New therapeutic drug delivery system
Sun et al. Physical triggering strategies for drug delivery
AU736301B2 (en) Methods for delivering compounds into a cell
US6443898B1 (en) Therapeutic delivery systems
US7083572B2 (en) Therapeutic delivery systems
CA2110490C (en) Drug delivery systems comprising gas-filled liposomes at least 90% devoid of liquid in their interior
US20020159952A1 (en) Novel acoustically active drug delivery systems
US20030147812A1 (en) Device and methods for initiating chemical reactions and for the targeted delivery of drugs or other agents
WO2001026704A2 (en) Targeted drug activation
WO1999013943A1 (en) Ultrasound assembly for use with light activated drugs
AU731072B2 (en) Methods of preparing gas-filled liposomes
Sivakumar LSGGGe Eq. 2
AU7825001A (en) Methods for delivering compounds into a cell

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: EKOS L.L.C., WASHINGTON

Free format text: LICENSE AGREEMENT;ASSIGNORS:TACHIBANA, SHUNRO;TACHIBANA, KATSURO;REEL/FRAME:014892/0626

Effective date: 19960122

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION